McMurrich1914 Chapter 8: Difference between revisions

From Embryology
(Created page with "{{McMurrich1914 header}} ==CHAPTER VIII. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE MUSCULAR SYSTEM== Two forms of muscular tissue exist in the human body, the striated tissue, which forms the...")
 
mNo edit summary
 
(One intermediate revision by the same user not shown)
Line 1: Line 1:
{{McMurrich1914 header}}
{{McMurrich1914 header}}


==CHAPTER VIII. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE MUSCULAR SYSTEM==
=Chapter VIII. The Development of the Muscular System=
 


Two forms of muscular tissue exist in the human body, the striated tissue, which forms the skeletal muscles and is under the control of the central nervous system, and the non-striated, which is controlled by the sympathetic nervous system and is found in the skin, in the walls of the digestive tract, the blood-vessels and lymphatics, and in connection with the genito-urinary apparatus. In the walls of the heart a muscle tissue occurs which is frequently regarded as a third form, characterized by being under control of the sympathetic system and yet being striated; it is, however, in its origin much more nearly allied to the non-striated than to the striated form of tissue, and will be considered a variety of the former.
Two forms of muscular tissue exist in the human body, the striated tissue, which forms the skeletal muscles and is under the control of the central nervous system, and the non-striated, which is controlled by the sympathetic nervous system and is found in the skin, in the walls of the digestive tract, the blood-vessels and lymphatics, and in connection with the genito-urinary apparatus. In the walls of the heart a muscle tissue occurs which is frequently regarded as a third form, characterized by being under control of the sympathetic system and yet being striated; it is, however, in its origin much more nearly allied to the non-striated than to the striated form of tissue, and will be considered a variety of the former.




The Histogenesis of Non-striated Muscular Tissue.  -  With the exception of the sphincter and dilator of the pupil and the muscles of the sudoriparous glands, which are formed from the ectoderm, all the non-striated muscle tissue of the body is formed by the conversion of mesenchyme cells into muscle-fibers. The details of this process have been worked out by McGill for the musculature of the digestive and respiratory tracts of the pig and are as follows: The mesenchyme surrounding the mucosa in these tracts is at first a loose syncytium (Fig. 117, m) and in the regions where the muscle tissue is to form a condensation of the mesenchyme occurs followed by an elongation of the mesenchyme cells and their nuclei, so that the muscle layers become clearly distinguishable from the neighboring undifferentiated tissue (Fig. 117, mm). Fibrils of two kinds then begin to appear in the cytoplasm of the muscle cells. Coarse fibrils (f.c) make their appearance as rows of granules, which enlarge and increase in number until they finally fuse to form homogeneous 13 i93
==The Histogenesis of Non-striated Muscular Tissue==
 
With the exception of the sphincter and dilator of the pupil and the muscles of the sudoriparous glands, which are formed from the ectoderm, all the non-striated muscle tissue of the body is formed by the conversion of mesenchyme cells into muscle-fibers. The details of this process have been worked out by McGill for the musculature of the digestive and respiratory tracts of the pig and are as follows: The mesenchyme surrounding the mucosa in these tracts is at first a loose syncytium (Fig. 117, m) and in the regions where the muscle tissue is to form a condensation of the mesenchyme occurs followed by an elongation of the mesenchyme cells and their nuclei, so that the muscle layers become clearly distinguishable from the neighboring undifferentiated tissue (Fig. 117, mm). Fibrils of two kinds then begin to appear in the cytoplasm of the muscle cells. Coarse fibrils (f.c) make their appearance as rows of granules, which enlarge and increase in number until they finally fuse to form homogeneous  
 
194 HYSTOGENESIS OF NON-STRIATED MUSCULAR TISSUE
 
 
 
mm.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7.nz.
 




Line 32: Line 16:


b, Basement membrane; e, epithelium; /.c, coarse fibril;//., fine fibril; ga, ganglion of Auerbach's plexus; gm, ganglion of Meissner's plexus; m, mesenchyne; mm, muscularis mucosae; pb, protoplasmic bridge; vf, varicose fibril.  -  (McCill.)  
b, Basement membrane; e, epithelium; /.c, coarse fibril;//., fine fibril; ga, ganglion of Auerbach's plexus; gm, ganglion of Meissner's plexus; m, mesenchyne; mm, muscularis mucosae; pb, protoplasmic bridge; vf, varicose fibril.  -  (McCill.)  
HISTOGENESIS OF NON-STRIATED MUSCULAR TISSUE
J 95




Line 51: Line 29:


Fig. 118.  -  Section through the Heartwall of a Duck Embryo of Three Days.  -  (M. Heidenhain.)  
Fig. 118.  -  Section through the Heartwall of a Duck Embryo of Three Days.  -  (M. Heidenhain.)  
196
HISTOGENESIS OF NON-STRIATED MUSCULAR TISSUE




Line 75: Line 47:




 
==The Histogenesis of Striated Muscle Tissue==
 
The histogenesis of striated or voluntary muscle tissue resembles very closely that which has just been described for the heart muscle. There is a similar formation of a syncytium by the fusion of the cells of the myotomes, an appearance of granules which unite to form fibrils, an increase of the fibrils by longitudinal division and a primary arrangement of the fibrils around the periphery of areas of sarcoplasm (Fig. 119), each of which represents a muscle fiber. In addition there is an active proliferation of the nuclei of the original myoblasts, the new nuclei arranging themselves more or less regularly in rows and later migrating from their original central position to the periphery of the fibers, and, in the limb muscles, the development is further complicated by a process of degeneration which affects groups of muscle fibers, so that bundles of normal fibers are separated by strands of degenerated tissue in which the fibrils have disappeared, the nuclei have become pale and the sarcoplasm vacuolated and homogeneous. Later the degenerated tissue seems to disappear entirely and mesenchymatous connective tissue grows in between the persisting fibers, grouping them into bundles and the bundles into the individual muscles.
HISTOGENESIS OF STRIATED MUSCLE TISSUE 197
The Histogenesis of Striated Muscle Tissue. -  The histogenesis of striated or voluntary muscle tissue resembles very closely that which has just been described for the heart muscle. There is a similar formation of a syncytium by the fusion of the cells of the myotomes, an appearance of granules which unite to form fibrils, an increase of the fibrils by longitudinal division and a primary arrangement of the fibrils around the periphery of areas of sarcoplasm (Fig. 119), each of which represents a muscle fiber. In addition there is an active proliferation of the nuclei of the original myoblasts, the new nuclei arranging themselves more or less regularly in rows and later migrating from their original central position to the periphery of the fibers, and, in the limb muscles, the development is further complicated by a process of degeneration which affects groups of muscle fibers, so that bundles of normal fibers are separated by strands of degenerated tissue in which the fibrils have disappeared, the nuclei have become pale and the sarcoplasm vacuolated and homogeneous. Later the degenerated tissue seems to disappear entirely and mesenchymatous connective tissue grows in between the persisting fibers, grouping them into bundles and the bundles into the individual muscles.




Line 84: Line 54:




The Development of the Skeletal Muscles.  -  It has already been pointed out that all the skeletal muscles of the body, with the exception of those connected with the branchial arches, are derived from the myotomes of the mesodermic somites, even the limb muscles possibly having such an origin, although the cells of the tissue from which the muscles of the limb buds form lack an epithelial arrangement and are indistinguishable from the somatic mesenchyme which forms the axial cores of the limbs.
==The Development of the Skeletal Muscles==
It has already been pointed out that all the skeletal muscles of the body, with the exception of those connected with the branchial arches, are derived from the myotomes of the mesodermic somites, even the limb muscles possibly having such an origin, although the cells of the tissue from which the muscles of the limb buds form lack an epithelial arrangement and are indistinguishable from the somatic mesenchyme which forms the axial cores of the limbs.




The various fibers of each myotome are at first loosely arranged,  
The various fibers of each myotome are at first loosely arranged, but later they become more compact and are arranged parallel with one another, their long axes being directed antero-posteriorly. This stage is also transitory, however, the fibers of each myotome undergoing various modifications to produce the conditions existing in the adult, in which the original segmental arrangement of the fibers can be perceived in comparatively few muscles. The exact nature of these modifications is almost unknown from direct observation, but since the relation between a nerve and the myotome belonging to the same segment is established at a very early period of development and persists throughout life, no matter what changes of fusion, splitting, or migration the myotome may undergo, it is possible to trace out more or less completely the history of the various myotomes by determining their segmental innervation. It is known, for example, that the latissimus dorsi arises from the seventh and eighth* cervical myotomes, but later undergoes a migration, becoming attached to the lower thoracic and lumbar vertebrae and to the crest of the ilium, far away from its place of origin (Mall), and yet it retains its nerve-supply from the seventh and eighth cervical nerves with which it was originally associated, its nerve-supply consequently indicating the extent of its migration.
 
 
I98 DEVELOPMENT OF SKELETAL MUSCLES
but later they become more compact and are arranged parallel with one another, their long axes being directed antero-posteriorly. This stage is also transitory, however, the fibers of each myotome undergoing various modifications to produce the conditions existing in the adult, in which the original segmental arrangement of the fibers can be perceived in comparatively few muscles. The exact nature of these modifications is almost unknown from direct observation, but since the relation between a nerve and the myotome belonging to the same segment is established at a very early period of development and persists throughout life, no matter what changes of fusion, splitting, or migration the myotome may undergo, it is possible to trace out more or less completely the history of the various myotomes by determining their segmental innervation. It is known, for example, that the latissimus dorsi arises from the seventh and eighth* cervical myotomes, but later undergoes a migration, becoming attached to the lower thoracic and lumbar vertebrae and to the crest of the ilium, far away from its place of origin (Mall), and yet it retains its nerve-supply from the seventh and eighth cervical nerves with which it was originally associated, its nerve-supply consequently indicating the extent of its migration.




Line 99: Line 66:


2. A tangential splitting into two or more layers. Examples of this are also abundant and are afforded by the muscles of the fourth, fifth, and sixth layers of the back, as recognized in English text-books  
2. A tangential splitting into two or more layers. Examples of this are also abundant and are afforded by the muscles of the fourth, fifth, and sixth layers of the back, as recognized in English text-books  
* This enumeration is based on convenience in associating the myotomes with the nerves which supply them. The myotomes mentioned are those which correspond to the sixth and seventh cervical vertebrae.
* This enumeration is based on convenience in associating the myotomes with the nerves which supply them. The myotomes mentioned are those which correspond to the sixth and seventh cervical vertebrae.






DEVELOPMENT OF SKELETAL MUSCLES 1 99
of anatomy, by the two oblique and the transverse layers of the abdominal walls, and by the intercostal muscles and the transversus of the thorax.
of anatomy, by the two oblique and the transverse layers of the abdominal walls, and by the intercostal muscles and the transversus of the thorax.


Line 117: Line 84:




Indeed, in comparing one of the mammals with a member of one of the lower classes of vertebrates, the greater amount of connective tissue compared with the amount of muscular tissue in the former is very striking, the inference being that these connectivetissue structures (fasciae, aponeuroses, ligaments) represent portions of the muscular tissue of the lower form (Bardeleben). Many of the accessory ligaments occurring in connection with diarthrodial joints apparently owe their origin to a degeneration of muscle tissue, the  
Indeed, in comparing one of the mammals with a member of one of the lower classes of vertebrates, the greater amount of connective tissue compared with the amount of muscular tissue in the former is very striking, the inference being that these connectivetissue structures (fasciae, aponeuroses, ligaments) represent portions of the muscular tissue of the lower form (Bardeleben). Many of the accessory ligaments occurring in connection with diarthrodial joints apparently owe their origin to a degeneration of muscle tissue, the fibular lateral ligament of the knee-joint, for instance, being probably a degenerated portion of the peroneus longus, while the sacrotuberous ligament appears to stand in a similar relation to the long head of the biceps femoris (Sutton).
 
 
200 THE TRUNK MUSCULATURE
fibular lateral ligament of the knee-joint, for instance, being probably a degenerated portion of the peroneus longus, while the sacrotuberous ligament appears to stand in a similar relation to the long head of the biceps femoris (Sutton).




Line 130: Line 93:




The Trunk Musculature.  -  It has already been seen (p. 82) that the myotomes at first occupy a dorsal position, becoming prolonged ventrally as development proceeds so as to overlap the somatic mesoderm, until those of opposite sides come into contact in the mid-ventral line. Before this is accomplished, however, a longitudinal splitting of each myotome occurs, whereby there is separated off a dorsal portion which gives rise to a segment of the dorsal musculature of the trunk and is supplied by the ramus dorsalis  
==The Trunk Musculature==
 
It has already been seen (p. 82) that the myotomes at first occupy a dorsal position, becoming prolonged ventrally as development proceeds so as to overlap the somatic mesoderm, until those of opposite sides come into contact in the mid-ventral line. Before this is accomplished, however, a longitudinal splitting of each myotome occurs, whereby there is separated off a dorsal portion which gives rise to a segment of the dorsal musculature of the trunk and is supplied by the ramus dorsalis  




THE TRUNK MUSCULATURE 201
of its corresponding spinal nerve. In the lower vertebrates this separation of each of the trunk myotomes into a dorsal and ventral portion is much more distinct in the adult than it is in man, the two portions being separated by a horizontal plate of connective tissue extending the entire length of the trunk and being attached by its inner edge to the transverse processes of the vertebrae, while peripherally it becomes continuous with the connective tissue of the  
of its corresponding spinal nerve. In the lower vertebrates this separation of each of the trunk myotomes into a dorsal and ventral portion is much more distinct in the adult than it is in man, the two portions being separated by a horizontal plate of connective tissue extending the entire length of the trunk and being attached by its inner edge to the transverse processes of the vertebrae, while peripherally it becomes continuous with the connective tissue of the  






Fig. 120.  -  Embryo of 13 mm. showing the Formation of the Rectus Muscle. -   
Fig. 120.  -  Embryo of 13 mm. showing the Formation of the Rectus Muscle. -  (Mall.)  
(Mall.)  
dermis along a line known as the lateral line. In man the dorsal portion is also much smaller in proportion to the ventral portion than in the lower vertebrates. From this dorsal portion of the myotomes are derived the muscles belonging to the three deepest layers of the dorsal musculature, the more superficial layers being


 
dermis along a line known as the lateral line. In man the dorsal portion is also much smaller in proportion to the ventral portion than in the lower vertebrates. From this dorsal portion of the myotomes are derived the muscles belonging to the three deepest layers of the dorsal musculature, the more superficial layers being composed of muscles belonging to the limb system. Further longitudinal and tangential divisions and a fusion of successive myotomes bring about the conditions which obtain in the adult dorsal musculature.
202 THE TRUNK MUSCULATURE
composed of muscles belonging to the limb system. Further longitudinal and tangential divisions and a fusion of successive myotomes bring about the conditions which obtain in the adult dorsal musculature.




Line 158: Line 118:




THE TRUNK MUSCULATURE
The table on page 203 will show the relation of the various trunk muscles to the portions of the myotomes.




203
The intimate association between the pelvic girdle and the axial skeleton brings about extensive modifications of the posterior trunk myotomes. So far as their dorsal portions are concerned probably all these myotomes as far back as the fifth sacral are represented in the sacro-spinalis, but the ventral portions from the first lumbar myotome onward are greatly modified. The last myotome taking part in the formation of the rectus abdominis is the twelfth thoracic and the last to be represented in the lateral musculature of the




o
Fig. 121.  -  Perineal Region of Embryos of (A) Two Months and (25) Four to Five Months, showing the Development of the Perineal Muscles.
CD




dc, Nervus dorsalis clitoridis; p, pudendal nerve; sa, sphincter ani; sc sphincter cloacae; sv, sphincter vaginse.  -  (Popowsky.)


abdomen is the first lumbar, the ventral portions of the remaining lumbar and of the first and second sacral myotomes either having disappeared or being devoted to the formation of the musculature of the lower limb.




The ventral portions of the third and fourth sacral myotomes are represented, however, by the levator ani and coccygeus, and are the last myotomes which persist as muscles in the human body, although traces of still more posterior myotomes are to be found in muscles such as the curvator coccygis sometimes developed in connection with the coccygeal vertebrae.




The perineal muscles and the external sphincter ani are also developments of the third and fourth (and second) sacral myotomes. At a time when the cloaca (see p. 280) is still present, a sheet of muscles lying close beneath the integument forms a sphincter around its opening (Fig. 121). On the development of the partition which divides the cloaca into rectal and urinogenital portions, the sphincter is also diyided, its more posterior portion persisting as the external sphincter ani, while the anterior part gradually differentiates into the various perineal muscles (Popowsky).




==The Cranial Musculature==


As was pointed out in an earlier chapter, the existence of distinct mesodermic somites has not yet been completely demonstrated in the head of the human embryo, but in lower forms, such as the elasmobranch fishes, they are clearly distinguishable, and it may be supposed that their indistinctness in man is a secondary condition. Exactly how many of these somites are represented in the mammalian head it is impossible to say, but it seems probable, from comparison with lower forms, that there is a considerable number. The majority of them, however, early undergo degeneration, and in the adult condition only three are recognizable, two of which are prseoral in position and one postoral. The myotomes of the anterior praeoral segment give rise to the muscles of the eye supplied by the third cranial nerve, those of the posterior one furnish the superior oblique muscles innervated by the fourth nerve, while from the postoral myotomes the lateral recti, supplied by the sixth nerve, are developed. The muscles supplied by the hypoglossal nerve are also derived from myotomes, but they have already been considered in connection with the trunk musculature.




to  
The remaining muscles of the head differ from all other voluntary muscles of the body in the fact that they are derived from the branchiomeres formed by the segmentation of the cephalic ventral mesoderm. These muscles, therefore, are not to be regarded as equivalent to the myotomic muscles if their embryological origin is to be taken as a criterion of equivalency, and in their case it would seem, from the fact that they are innervated by nerves fundamentally distinct from those which supply the myotomic muscles, that this criterion is a good one. They must be regarded, therefore, as belonging to a special category, and may be termed branchiomeric muscles to distinguish them from the myotomic set.


0


If their embryological origin be taken as a basis for homology, it is clear that they should be regarded as equivalent to the muscles derived from the ventral mesoderm of the trunk, and these, as has been seen, are the non-striated muscles associated with the viscera, among which may be included the striated heart muscle. At first sight this homology seems decidedly strained, chiefly because long-continued custom has regarded the histological and physiological peculiarities of striated and non-striated muscle tissue as fundamental. It may be pointed out, however, that the branchiomeric muscles are, strictly speaking, visceral muscles, and indeed give rise to muscle sheets (the constrictors of the pharynx) which surround the upper or pharyngeal portion of the digestive tract. It is possible, then, that the homology is not so strained as might appear, but further discussion of it may profitably be deferred until the cranial nerves are under consideration.




The skeleton of the first branchial arch becomes converted partly into the jaw apparatus and partly into auditory ossicles, and the muscles derived from the corresponding branchiomere become the muscles of mastication (the temporal, masseter, and pterygoids), the mylohyoid, anterior belly of the digastric, the tensor veli palatini and the tensor tympani. The nerve which corresponds to the first branchial arch is the trigeminus or fifth, and consequently these various muscles are supplied by it.




The second arch has corresponding to it the seventh nerve, and its musculature is partly represented by the stylohyoid and posterior belly of the digastric and by the stapedius muscle of the middle ear. From the more superficial portions of the branchiomere, however, a sheet of tissue arises which gradually extends upward and downward to form a thin covering for the entire head and neck, its lower portion giving rise to the platysma and the nuchal fascia which extends backward from the dorsal border of this muscle, while its upper parts become the occipito-frontalis and the superficial muscles of the face (the muscles of expression), together with the fascia? which unite the various muscles of this group. The extension of the platysma sheet of muscles over the face is well shown by the development of the branches of the facial nerve which supply it (Fig. 122).






Fig. 122.  -  Head of Embryos (.4) of Two Months and (B) of Three Months showing the Extension of the Seventh Nerve upon the Face.  -  (Popowsky.)


Ul
3


The degeneration of the upper part of the third arch produces a shifting forward of one of the muscles derived from its branchiomere, the stylopharyngeus arising from the base of the styloid process. The innervation of this muscle by the ninth nerve indicates, however, its true significance, and since fibers of this nerve of the third arch also pass to the constrictor muscles of the pharynx, a portion of these must also be regarded as having arisen from the third branchiomere.




The cartilages of the fourth and fifth arches enter into the formation of the larynx and the muscles of the corresponding branchiomeres constitute the muscles of the larynx, together with the remaining portions of the constrictors of the pharynx and the muscles of the soft palate, with the exception of the tensor. Both these arches have branches of the tenth nerve associated with them and hence this nerve supplies the muscles named. In addition, two of the extrinsic muscles of the tongue, the glosso-palatinus and chondroglossus, belong to the fourth or fifth branchiomere, although the remaining muscles of this physiological set are myotomic in origin.




Finally, portions of two other muscles should probably be included in the list of branchiomeric muscles, these muscles being the trapezius and sternomastoid. It has already been seen that they are partly derived from the cervical myotomes, but they are also innervated in part by the spinal accessory, and since the motor fibers of this nerve are serially homologous with those of the vagus it would seem that the muscles which they supply are probably branchiomeric in origin. Observations on the development of these muscles, determining their relations to the branchiomeres, are necessary, however, before their morphological significance can be regarded as definitely settled.




The table on page 209 shows the relations of the various cranial muscles to the myotomes and branchiomeres, as well as to the motor cranial nerves.




Eleventh








3
CO


ui
Trapezius. Sternomastoid.
3




Line 215: Line 183:




Tenth








Ul


Constrictors of pharynx (in part). Pharyngopalatinus. Levator veli palatini. Musculus
uvulae. Muscles of the larynx. Glosso-pal
atinus.




Chrondro
glossus.






â– 5 .S




Line 231: Line 205:




Stylo-pha
ryngeus.




to
Constrictors
of pharynx
(in part).


CO




6
> <U CO




Line 243: Line 222:




Stylohyoid.




O
Digastric
(posterior
belly).




Stapedius. Platysma. Occipitofrontalis.




Muscles of
expression.






CO


a) 3
h-1 M




Line 259: Line 247:




O
3


Ul


Temporal. . Masseter.




Pterygoids.




Mylohyoid.




Digastric
(anterior
belly).




Tensor veli
palatini.




Tensor
tympani.






3
3




O u CO O


•A <u 3
Superior Inferior Medial _ Inferior






>
M V


1
O


«5 <u "0
s






O
'in U
% I
u
pq


I
3
1




==The Limb Muscles.==


It has been customary to regard the limb muscles as derivatives of certain of the myotomes, these structures in their growth vent rally in the trunk walls being supposed to pass out upon the postaxial surface of the limb buds and loop back again to the trunk along the praeaxial surface, each myotome thus giving rise to a portion of both the dorsal and the ventral musculature of the limb. This view has not, however, been verified by direct observation of an actual looping of the myotomes over the axis of the limb buds; indeed, on the contrary, the limb muscles have been found to develop from the cores of mesenchyme which form the axes of the limb buds and from which the limb skeleton is also developed. This may be explained by supposing that the limb muscles are primarily derivatives of the myotomes and that an extensive concentration of their developmental history has taken place, so that the axial mesenchyme actually represents myotomic material even though no direct connection between it and the myotomes can be discovered. Condensations of the developmental history certainly occur and the fact that the muscles of the human limbs, as they differentiate from the axial cores, present essentially the same arrangement as in the adult seems to indicate that there is actually an extensive condensation of the phylogenetic history of the individual muscles, since comparative anatomy shows the arrangement of the muscles of the higher mammalian limbs to be the result of a long series of progressive modifications from a primitive condition. However, even though this be the case, there is yet the possibility that the limb musculature, like the limb skeleton, may take its origin from the ventral mesoderm and consequently belong to a different embryological category from the axial myotomic muscles.




The strongest evidence in favor of the myotomic origin of the limb muscles is that furnished by their nerve supply, this presenting a distinctly segmental arrangement. This does not necessarily imply, however, a corresponding primarily metameric arrangement of the muscles, any more than the pronouncedly segmental arrangement of the cutaneous nerves implies a primary metamerism of the dermis (see p. 143). It may mean only that the nerves, being segmental, retain their segmental relations to one another even in their distribution to non-metameric structures, and that, consequently, the limb musculature is supplied in succession from one border of the limb bud to the other from succeeding nerve roots.




But whether further observation may prove or disprove the myotomic origin of the limb musculature, the fact remains that it possesses a segmentally arranged innervation, and it is possible,


M




Fig. 123.  -  Diagram of a Segment of the Body and Limb. bl, Axial blastema; dm, dorsal musculature of trunk; rl, nerve to limb; s, septum between dorsal and ventral trunk musculature; str.d, dorsal layer of limb musculature; tr.d and tr.v, dorsal and ventral divisions of a spinal nerve; vm, ventral musculature of the trunk.  -  (Kollmann.)
therefore, to recognize in the limb buds a series of parallel bands of muscle tissue, extending longitudinally along the bud and each supplied by a definite segmental nerve. And furthermore, corresponding to each band upon the ventral (praeaxial) surface of the limb bud, there is a band similarly innervated upon the dorsal (postaxial) surface, since the fibers which pass to the limb from each nerve root sooner or later arrange themselves in praeaxial and postaxial groups as is shown in the diagram Fig. 123. The first nerve which enters the limb bud lies along its anterior border, and consequently the muscle bands which are supplied by it will, in the adult, lie along






Fig. 124.  -  External Surface of the Os Innominatum showing the Attachment
of Muscles and the Zones Supplied by the Various Nerves.




12, Twelfth thoracic nerve; I to V, lumbar nerves; 1 and 2, sacral nerves.  -  (Bolk.)
the outer side of the arm and along the inner side of the leg, in consequence of the rotation in opposite directions which the limbs undergo during development (see p. 101).




The first nerve which supplies the muscles attached to the dorsum of the ilium is the second lumbar, and following that there come successively from before backward the remaining lumbar and the






Fig. 125.  -  Sections through (A) the Thigh and (B) the Calf showing the Zones Supplied by the Nerves. The Nerves are Numbered in Continuation with the Thoracic Series.  -  (A, after Bolk.)


"3b


first and second sacral nerves. The arrangement of the muscle bands supplied by these nerves and the muscles of the adult to which they contribute may be seen from Fig. 124. What is shown there is only the upper portions of the postaxial bands, their lower portions


extending downward on the anterior surface of the leg. Only the sacral bands, however, extend throughout the entire length of the limb into the foot, the second lumbar band passing down only to about the middle of the thigh, the third to about the knee, the fourth to about the middle of the crus and the fifth as far as the base of the fifth metatarsal bone, and the same is true of the corresponding praeaxial bands, which descend from the ventral surface of the os coxae (innominatum) along the inner and posterior surfaces of the leg to the same points. The first and second sacral bands can be traced into the foot, the first giving rise to the musculature of its


bo




Fig. 126.  -  Section through the Upper Part of the Arm showing the Zones Supplied by the Nerves.




$v to jv, Ventral branches; 5J to Sd, dorsal branches of the cervical nerves. -  (Bolk.)


inner side and the second to that of its outer side, the praeaxial bands forming the plantar musculature, while the postaxial ones are upon the dorsum of the foot as a result of the rotation which the limb has undergone.




In a transverse section through a limb at any level all the muscle bands, both praeaxial and postaxial, which descend to that level will be cut and will lie in a definite succession from one border of the limb to the other, as is seen in Fig. 125. In the differentiation of the individual muscles which proceeds as the nerves extend from the trunk into the axial mesenchyme of the limb, the muscle bands undergo modifications similar to those already described as occurring in the trunk myotomes. Thus, each of the muscles represented in Fig. 125, B, is formed by the fusion of elements derived from two or more bands; the soleus and gastrocnemius represent deep and superficial layers formed from the same bands by a horizontal (tangential) splitting, these same muscles contain a portion of the second sacral band which overlaps muscles composed only of higher myotomes, and the intermuscular septum between the peroneus brevis and the flexor hallucis longus represents a portion of the third sacral band which has degenerated into connective tissue.




.O
A similar arrangement occurs in the bands which are to be recognized in the musculature of the upper limb. These are supplied by the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth cervical and the first thoracic nerves, and only those supplied by the eighth cervical and the first thoracic nerves extend as far as the tips of the fingers. The arrangement of the bands in the upper part of the brachium may be seen from Fig. 126, in connection with which it must be noted that the fourth cervical band does not extend down to the level at which the section is taken and that the praeaxial band of the eighth cervical nerve and both the praeaxial and postaxial bands of the first thoracic are represented only by connective tissue in this region.




In another sense than the longitudinal one there is a division of the limb musculature into more or less definite areas, namely, in a transverse direction in accordance with the jointing of the skeleton. Thus, there may be recognized a group of muscles which pass from the axial skeleton to the pectoral girdle, another from the limb girdle to the brachium or thigh, another from the brachium or thigh to the antibrachium or crus, another from the antibrachium or crus to the carpus or tarsus, and another from the carpus or tarsus to the digits. This transverse segmentation, if it may be so termed, is not, however, perfectly definite, many muscles, even in the lower vertebrates, passing over more than one joint, and in the mammalia, especially, it is further obscured by secondary migrations, by the partial degeneration of muscles and by an end to end union of primarily distinct muscles.




The latissimus dorsi, serratus anterior and pectoral muscles are all examples of a process of migration as is shown by their innervation from cervical nerves, as well as by the actual migration which has been traced in the developing embryo (Mall, Lewis). In the lower limb evidences of migration may be seen in the femoral head of the biceps, comparative anatomy showing this to be a derivative of the gluteal set of muscles which has secondarily become attached to the femur and has associated itself with a praeaxial muscle to form a compound structure. An appearance of migration may also be produced by a muscle making a secondary attachment below its original origin or above the insertion and the upper or lower part, as the case may be, then degenerating into connective tissue. This has been the case with the peroneus longus, which, in the lower mammals, has a femoral origin, but has in man a new origin from the fibula, its upper portion being represented by the fibular lateral ligament of the knee-joint. So too the pectoralis minor is primarily inserted into the humerus, but it has made a secondary attachment to the coracoid process, its distal portion forming a coraco-humeral ligament.




The comparative study of the flexor muscles of the antibrachial and crural regions has yielded abundant evidence of extensive modifications in the differentiation of the limb muscles. In the tailed amphibia these muscles are represented by a series of superposed layers, the most superficial of which arises from the humerus or femur, while the remaining ones take their origin from the ulna or fibula and are directed distally and laterally to be inserted either into the palmar or plantar aponeurosis, or, in the case of the deeper layers, into the radius (tibia) or carpus (tarsus). In the arm of the lower mammalia the deepest layer becomes the pronator quadratus, the lateral portions of the superficial layer are the flexor carpi ulnaris and the flexor carpi radialis, while the intervening layers, together with the median portion of the superficial one, assuming a more directly longitudinal direction, fuse to form a common flexor mass which acts on the digits through the palmar aponeurosis. From this latter structure and from the carpal and metacarpal bones five layers of palmar muscles take origin. The radial and ulnar portions of the most superficial of these become the flexor pollicis brevis and abductor pollicis brevis and the abductor quinti digiti, while the rest of the layer degenerates into connective tissue, forming tendons








Fig. 127.  -  Transverse sections through (A) the forearm and (B) the hand showing the arrangement of the layers of the flexor muscles. The superficial layer is shaded horizontally, the second layer vertically, the third obliquely to the left, the fourth vertically, and the fifth obliquely to the right. AbM, abductor digiti quinti; AdP, adductor pollicis; BR, brachio-radialis; ECD, extensor digitorum communis; ECU, extensor carpi ulnaris;£Z, extensor indicis; EMD, extensor digiti quinti; EMP, abductor pollicis longus; ERB, extensor carpi radialis brevis; FCR, flexor carpi radialis; FCU, flexor carpi ulnaris; FLP, flexor pollicis longus; FM, flexor digiti quinti brevis; FP, flexor digitorum profundus; FS, flexor digitorum sublimis; ID, interossei dorsales; IV, interossei volares; L, lumbricales; OM, opponens digiti quinti; PL, palmaris longus; PT, pronator teres; R, radius; U, ulna; II-V, second to fifth metacarpal.




which pass to the four ulnar digits. Gradually superficial portions of the antibrachial flexor mass separate off, carrying with them the layers of the palmar aponeurosis from which the tendons representing the superficial layer of the palmar muscles arise, and they form with these the flexor digitorum sublimis. The deeper layers of the antibrachial flexor mass become the flexor digitorum profundus and the flexor pollicis longus (Fig. 127, A), and retain their connection with the deeper layers of the palmar aponeurosis which form their tendons; and since the second layer of the palmar muscles takes origin from this portion of the aponeurosis it becomes the lumbrical muscles, arising from the profundus tendons (Fig. 127,






O


Fig. 128.  -  Transverse sections through (A) the crus and (B) the foot, showing the arrangement of the layers of the flexor muscles. The shading has the same significance as in the preceding figure. AbH, abductor hallucis; AbM, abductor minimi digiti; AdH, adductor hallucis; ELD, extensor longus digitorum; F, fibula; FBD, flexor brevis digitorium; FBH, flexor brevis hallucis; FBM, flexor brevis minimi digiti; FLD, flexor longus digitorum; G, gastrocnemius; ID, interossei dorsalis; IV, interossei ventrales; L, lumbricales; P, plantaris; Pe, peroneus longus; Po, popliteus; S, soleus; T, tibia; TA, tibialis anticus; TP, tibialis posticus; I-V, first to fifth metatarsal.




B). The third layer of palmar muscles becomes the adductors of the digits, reduced in man to the adductor pollicis, while from the two deepest layers the interossei are developed. Of these the fourth layer consists primarily of a pair of slips corresponding to each digit, while the fifth is represented by a series of muscles which extend obliquely across between adjacent metacarpals. With these last muscles certain of the fourth layer slips unite to form the dorsal interossei, while the rest become the volar interossei. j The modifications of the almost identical primary arrangement in the crus and foot are somewhat different. The superficial layer of the crural flexors becomes the gastrocnemius and plantaris (Fig. 128, A) and the deepest layer becomes the popliteus and the interosseous membrane. The second and third layers unite to form a common mass which is inserted into the deeper layers of the plantar aponeurosis and later differentiates into the soleus and the long digital flexor, the former shifting its insertion from the plantar aponeurosis to the os calcis, while the flexor retains its connection with the deeper layers of the aponeurosis, these separating from the superficial layer to form the long flexor tendons. The fourth layer partly assumes a longitudinal direction and becomes the tibialis posterior and the flexor hallucis longus and partly retains its original cblique direction and its connection with the deep layers of the plantar aponeurosis, becoming the quadratus plantse. In the foot (Fig. 128, B) the superficial layer persists as muscular tissue, forming the abductors, the flexor digitorum brevis and the medial head of the flexor hallucis brevis, the second layer becomes the lumbricales, and the third the lateral head of the flexor hallucis brevis and the adductor hallucis, while the fourth and fifth layers together form the ioterossei, as in the hand, the flexor quinti digiti brevis really belonging to that group of muscles.




==Literature==


C. R. Bardeen and W. H. Lewis: "Development of the Limbs, Body-wall, and Back in Man," The American Journal of Anat., 1, 1901.


K. Bardeleben: "Musk el und Fascia," Jenaische Zeitschr. fiir Naturwissensch., xv, 1882.


L. Bolk: "Beziehungen zwischen Skelett, Muskulatur und Nerven der Extremitaten,
dargelegt am Beckengurtel, an dessen Muskulatur sowie am Plexus lumbo
sacralis," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxi, 1894.


'3
L. Bolk: " Rekonstruktion der Segmentirung der Gliedmassenmuskulatur dargelegt
an den Muskeln des Oberschenkels und des Schultergurtels," Morphol. Jahrbuch,
xxii, 1895.


L. Bolk: "Die Sklerozonie des Humerus," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxill, 1S96.


L. Bolk: "Die Segmentaldifferenzierung des menschlichen Rumpfes und seiner
Extremitaten," 1, Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxv, 1898.


R. Futamtjra: "Ueber die Entwickelung der Facialismuskulatur des Menschen,"
Anat. Hefte, xxx, 1906.


E. Godlewski: "Die Entwicklung des Skelet- und Herzmuskelgewebes der Sauge
thiere," Archiv fur mikr. Anat., lx, 1902.


E. Grafenberg: "Die Entwicklung der menschlichen Beckenmuskulatur," Anal. Hefte, xxiii, 1904.


W. P. Herringham: "The Minute Anatomy of the Brachial Plexus," Proceedings
of the Royal Soc. London, xli, 1886.


W. H. Lewis: " The Development of the Arm in Man," Amer. Jour, of Anat., 1, 1902


J. B. MacCallum: "On the Histology and Histogenesis of the Heart Muscle-cell,"
Anat. Anzeiger, xiil, 1897.


J. B. MacCallum: "On the Histogenesis of the Striated Muscle-fiber and the
Growth of the Human Sartorius Muscle," Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, 1898


F. P. Mall: "Development of the Ventral Abdominal Walls in Man," Journ. of
Morphol., xiv, 1898.


Caroline McGill: "The Histogenesis of Smooth Muscle in the Alimentary Canal
and Respiratory Tract of the Pig," Internat. Monatschr. Anat. und Phys., xxiv,
1907.


J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Forearm Flexors," Amer. Journ, of Anat.,
11, 1903.


CO
J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Palmar Musculature," Amer. Journ. of
Anat., 11, 1903.


>.
J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Crural Flexors," Amer. Journ. of Anat.,
iv, 1904.  


J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Plantar Musculature," Amer. Journ. of
Anat., vi, 1907.




A. Meek: "Preliminary Note on the Post-embryonal History of Striped Muscle-fibers
in Mammalia," Anat. Anzeiger, xiv, 1898. (See also Anat. Anzeiger, xv, 1899.)


B. Morpurgo: "Ueber die post-embryonale Entwickelung der quergestreiften Muskel
von weissen Ratten," Anat. Anzeiger, xv, 1899.


I. Popowsky: " Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte des N. facialis beim Menschen," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxiii, 1896.


I. Popowsky: " Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Dammmuskulatur beim Menschen," Anat. Hefte, xi, 1899.


L. Rethi: "Der peripheren Verlauf der motorischen Rachen- und Gaumennerven," Sitzungsber. der kais. Akad. Wissensch. Wien. Math.-Naturwiss. Classe, Cii, 1893.


C. S. Sherrington: " Notes on the Arrangement of Some Motor Fibers in the Lumbosacral Plexus," Journal of Physiol., xin, 1892.


 
J. B. Sutton: "Ligaments, their Nature and Morphology," London, 1897.
 
s
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
w
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
O
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
.2
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
'u
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CD
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CI
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
cd
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
cd
 
.a
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
"E,
 
 
 
Ul
'a
cd
 
.1
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ft
 
"2
 
 
 
 
 
 
"2
 
12
to • «
 
T3
 
cd u
m p
 
c
L u
 
 
 
 
 
"3
r2
 
Ul
_2
'n
CD
ft
 
en
a
3
 
M
cd ft
 
 
 
"o
,d
d
 
ohyoid nothyr reohyc
 
'8
.2
 
d
 
 
 
c c
 
 
 
CD
 
 
 
 
 
"3
 
 
 
cd
 
cd
 
 
 
CD
 
 
 
'3
CD
 
yl
 
1-^
 
rt
 
 
 
 
 
H
 
GO
 
 
 
 
 
55
 
O 00 h
 
O
 
.. . ,
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
ui
 
 
 
 
 
Ul
 
 
 
 
 
Ul
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
O
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
cd
•n
 
 
 
 
 
3
 
 
 
 
 
cd
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
O
 
 
 
 
 
O
 
 
 
 
 
O
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
O
 
 
 
 
 
u
 
 
 
 
 
pg
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
!-.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Ih
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
.s
 
 
 
 
 
CD
.2
 
 
 
 
 
Ul
3 Ul
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
M
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
cd
g
 
 
 
 
 
"3 d
 
 
 
 
 
> en
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3
 
 
 
 
 
O
3
 
 
 
 
 
d
cd
H
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
03
 
d
 
 
 
cd
3
 
d
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
- - .
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3
 
cd
 
 
 
cd
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C J
 
a
 
4)
3
 
C J
 
s
 
CD
.2"
 
 
 
 
 
Ul
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
U-i
 
 
 
2
 
.2"
 
"o
 
s
 
 
 
 
 
â– 3
 
 
 
 
 
CC
c
ft
 
 
 
U
CD
>.
 
 
_2 .2
D
IT:
 
ft
 
 
s
en
cd
u
 
3
 
c
H
<D
 
<d >^
u
.2
CD
1
 
 
 
1
in ed
M
 
3
 
"2 c H
 
 
2
 
en
in
In 41 >
Ul
d cd
 
 
 
a
 
 
x>
cd
Ul
3
u u
Pi
 
Ul
"cd
T3
s
cd
>%
(X,
 
 
 
 
204
 
 
THE TRUNK MUSCULATURE
 
 
The table on page 203 will show the relation of the various trunk muscles to the portions of the myotomes.
 
 
The intimate association between the pelvic girdle and the axial skeleton brings about extensive modifications of the posterior trunk myotomes. So far as their dorsal portions are concerned probably all these myotomes as far back as the fifth sacral are represented in the sacro-spinalis, but the ventral portions from the first lumbar myotome onward are greatly modified. The last myotome taking part in the formation of the rectus abdominis is the twelfth thoracic and the last to be represented in the lateral musculature of the
 
 
 
A B
Fig. 121.  -  Perineal Region of Embryos of (A) Two Months and (25) Four to
Five Months, showing the Development of the Perineal Muscles.
 
 
dc, Nervus dorsalis clitoridis; p, pudendal nerve; sa, sphincter ani; sc sphincter cloacae;
sv, sphincter vaginse.  -  (Popowsky.)
abdomen is the first lumbar, the ventral portions of the remaining lumbar and of the first and second sacral myotomes either having disappeared or being devoted to the formation of the musculature of the lower limb.
 
 
The ventral portions of the third and fourth sacral myotomes are represented, however, by the levator ani and coccygeus, and are the last myotomes which persist as muscles in the human body, although traces of still more posterior myotomes are to be found in muscles such as the curvator coccygis sometimes developed in connection with the coccygeal vertebrae.
 
 
The perineal muscles and the external sphincter ani are also
 
 
THE CRANIAL MUSCULATURE 205
developments of the third and fourth (and second) sacral myotomes. At a time when the cloaca (see p. 280) is still present, a sheet of muscles lying close beneath the integument forms a sphincter around its opening (Fig. 121). On the development of the partition which divides the cloaca into rectal and urinogenital portions, the sphincter is also diyided, its more posterior portion persisting as the external sphincter ani, while the anterior part gradually differentiates into the various perineal muscles (Popowsky).
 
 
The Cranial Musculature.  -  As was pointed out in an earlier chapter, the existence of distinct mesodermic somites has not yet been completely demonstrated in the head of the human embryo, but in lower forms, such as the elasmobranch fishes, they are clearly distinguishable, and it may be supposed that their indistinctness in man is a secondary condition. Exactly how many of these somites are represented in the mammalian head it is impossible to say, but it seems probable, from comparison with lower forms, that there is a considerable number. The majority of them, however, early undergo degeneration, and in the adult condition only three are recognizable, two of which are prseoral in position and one postoral. The myotomes of the anterior praeoral segment give rise to the muscles of the eye supplied by the third cranial nerve, those of the posterior one furnish the superior oblique muscles innervated by the fourth nerve, while from the postoral myotomes the lateral recti, supplied by the sixth nerve, are developed. The muscles supplied by the hypoglossal nerve are also derived from myotomes, but they have already been considered in connection with the trunk musculature.
 
 
The remaining muscles of the head differ from all other voluntary muscles of the body in the fact that they are derived from the branchiomeres formed by the segmentation of the cephalic ventral mesoderm. These muscles, therefore, are not to be regarded as equivalent to the myotomic muscles if their embryological origin is to be taken as a criterion of equivalency, and in their case it would seem, from the fact that they are innervated by nerves fundamentally distinct from those which supply the myotomic muscles, that this
 
 
2o6 THE CRANIAL MUSCULATURE
criterion is a good one. They must be regarded, therefore, as belonging to a special category, and may be termed branchiomeric muscles to distinguish them from the myotomic set.
 
 
If their embryological origin be taken as a basis for homology, it is clear that they should be regarded as equivalent to the muscles derived from the ventral mesoderm of the trunk, and these, as has been seen, are the non-striated muscles associated with the viscera, among which may be included the striated heart muscle. At first sight this homology seems decidedly strained, chiefly because long-continued custom has regarded the histological and physiological peculiarities of striated and non-striated muscle tissue as fundamental. It may be pointed out, however, that the branchiomeric muscles are, strictly speaking, visceral muscles, and indeed give rise to muscle sheets (the constrictors of the pharynx) which surround the upper or pharyngeal portion of the digestive tract. It is possible, then, that the homology is not so strained as might appear, but further discussion of it may profitably be deferred until the cranial nerves are under consideration.
 
 
The skeleton of the first branchial arch becomes converted partly into the jaw apparatus and partly into auditory ossicles, and the muscles derived from the corresponding branchiomere become the muscles of mastication (the temporal, masseter, and pterygoids), the mylohyoid, anterior belly of the digastric, the tensor veli palatini and the tensor tympani. The nerve which corresponds to the first branchial arch is the trigeminus or fifth, and consequently these various muscles are supplied by it.
 
 
The second arch has corresponding to it the seventh nerve, and its musculature is partly represented by the stylohyoid and posterior belly of the digastric and by the stapedius muscle of the middle ear. From the more superficial portions of the branchiomere, however, a sheet of tissue arises which gradually extends upward and downward to form a thin covering for the entire head and neck, its lower portion giving rise to the platysma and the nuchal fascia which extends backward from the dorsal border of this muscle, while its upper parts become the occipito-frontalis and the superficial muscles of the face (the muscles of expression), together with the fascia? which unite the various muscles of this group. The extension of the platysma sheet of muscles over the face is well shown by the
 
 
THE CRANIAL MUSCULATURE
 
 
207
 
 
 
 
Fig. 122.  -  Head of Embryos (.4) of Two Months and (B) of Three Months showing the Extension of the Seventh Nerve upon the Face.  -  (Popowsky.)
 
 
208 THE CRANIAL MUSCULATURE
development of the branches of the facial nerve which supply it (Fig. 122).
 
 
The degeneration of the upper part of the third arch produces a shifting forward of one of the muscles derived from its branchiomere, the stylopharyngeus arising from the base of the styloid process. The innervation of this muscle by the ninth nerve indicates, however, its true significance, and since fibers of this nerve of the third arch also pass to the constrictor muscles of the pharynx, a portion of these must also be regarded as having arisen from the third branchiomere.
 
 
The cartilages of the fourth and fifth arches enter into the formation of the larynx and the muscles of the corresponding branchiomeres constitute the muscles of the larynx, together with the remaining portions of the constrictors of the pharynx and the muscles of the soft palate, with the exception of the tensor. Both these arches have branches of the tenth nerve associated with them and hence this nerve supplies the muscles named. In addition, two of the extrinsic muscles of the tongue, the glosso-palatinus and chondroglossus, belong to the fourth or fifth branchiomere, although the remaining muscles of this physiological set are myotomic in origin.
 
 
Finally, portions of two other muscles should probably be included in the list of branchiomeric muscles, these muscles being the trapezius and sternomastoid. It has already been seen that they are partly derived from the cervical myotomes, but they are also innervated in part by the spinal accessory, and since the motor fibers of this nerve are serially homologous with those of the vagus it would seem that the muscles which they supply are probably branchiomeric in origin. Observations on the development of these muscles, determining their relations to the branchiomeres, are necessary, however, before their morphological significance can be regarded as definitely settled.
 
 
The table on page 209 shows the relations of the various cranial muscles to the myotomes and branchiomeres, as well as to the motor cranial nerves.
 
 
 
 
THE CRANIAL MUSCULATURE
 
 
209
 
 
Eleventh
 
 
 
 
 
Trapezius. Sternomastoid.
 
 
 
 
 
Tenth
 
 
 
 
 
Constrictors of pharynx (in part). Pharyngopalatinus. Levator veli palatini. Musculus
uvulae. Muscles of the larynx. Glosso-pal
atinus.
 
 
Chrondro
glossus.
 
 
 
â– 5 .S
 
 
 
 
 
Stylo-pha
ryngeus.
 
 
Constrictors
of pharynx
(in part).
 
 
 
6
> <U CO
 
 
 
 
 
Stylohyoid.
 
 
Digastric
(posterior
belly).
 
 
Stapedius. Platysma. Occipitofrontalis.
 
 
Muscles of
expression.
 
 
 
CO
 
a) 3
h-1 M
 
 
 
 
 
3
 
 
 
 
 
Temporal. . Masseter.
 
 
Pterygoids.
 
 
Mylohyoid.
 
 
Digastric
(anterior
belly).
 
 
Tensor veli
palatini.
 
 
Tensor
tympani.
 
 
 
3
3
 
 
O u CO O
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
•A <u 3
 
 
 
 
 
Superior Inferior Medial _ Inferior
 
 
 
>
M V
 
1
O
 
«5 <u "0
s
 
 
 
'in U
% I
u
pq
 
I
3
1
 
 
14
 
 
2IO THE LIMB MUSCLES
The Limb Muscles.  -  It has been customary to regard the limb muscles as derivatives of certain of the myotomes, these structures in their growth vent rally in the trunk walls being supposed to pass out upon the postaxial surface of the limb buds and loop back again to the trunk along the praeaxial surface, each myotome thus giving rise to a portion of both the dorsal and the ventral musculature of the limb. This view has not, however, been verified by direct observation of an actual looping of the myotomes over the axis of the limb buds; indeed, on the contrary, the limb muscles have been found to develop from the cores of mesenchyme which form the axes of the limb buds and from which the limb skeleton is also developed. This may be explained by supposing that the limb muscles are primarily derivatives of the myotomes and that an extensive concentration of their developmental history has taken place, so that the axial mesenchyme actually represents myotomic material even though no direct connection between it and the myotomes can be discovered. Condensations of the developmental history certainly occur and the fact that the muscles of the human limbs, as they differentiate from the axial cores, present essentially the same arrangement as in the adult seems to indicate that there is actually an extensive condensation of the phylogenetic history of the individual muscles, since comparative anatomy shows the arrangement of the muscles of the higher mammalian limbs to be the result of a long series of progressive modifications from a primitive condition. However, even though this be the case, there is yet the possibility that the limb musculature, like the limb skeleton, may take its origin from the ventral mesoderm and consequently belong to a different embryological category from the axial myotomic muscles.
 
 
The strongest evidence in favor of the myotomic origin of the limb muscles is that furnished by their nerve supply, this presenting a distinctly segmental arrangement. This does not necessarily imply, however, a corresponding primarily metameric arrangement of the muscles, any more than the pronouncedly segmental arrangement of the cutaneous nerves implies a primary metamerism of the
 
 
THE LIMB MUSCLES
 
 
211
 
 
dermis (see p. 143). It may mean only that the nerves, being segmental, retain their segmental relations to one another even in their distribution to non-metameric structures, and that, consequently, the limb musculature is supplied in succession from one border of the limb bud to the other from succeeding nerve roots.
 
 
But whether further observation may prove or disprove the myotomic origin of the limb musculature, the fact remains that it possesses a segmentally arranged innervation, and it is possible,
 
 
 
Fig. 123.  -  Diagram of a Segment of the Body and Limb. bl, Axial blastema; dm, dorsal musculature of trunk; rl, nerve to limb; s, septum between dorsal and ventral trunk musculature; str.d, dorsal layer of limb musculature; tr.d and tr.v, dorsal and ventral divisions of a spinal nerve; vm, ventral musculature of the trunk.  -  (Kollmann.)
therefore, to recognize in the limb buds a series of parallel bands of muscle tissue, extending longitudinally along the bud and each supplied by a definite segmental nerve. And furthermore, corresponding to each band upon the ventral (praeaxial) surface of the limb bud, there is a band similarly innervated upon the dorsal (postaxial) surface, since the fibers which pass to the limb from each nerve root sooner or later arrange themselves in praeaxial and postaxial
 
 
212
 
 
THE LIMB MUSCLES
 
 
groups as is shown in the diagram Fig. 123. The first nerve which enters the limb bud lies along its anterior border, and consequently the muscle bands which are supplied by it will, in the adult, lie along
 
 
 
Fig. 124.  -  External Surface of the Os Innominatum showing the Attachment
of Muscles and the Zones Supplied by the Various Nerves.
 
 
12, Twelfth thoracic nerve; I to V, lumbar nerves; 1 and 2, sacral nerves.  -  (Bolk.)
the outer side of the arm and along the inner side of the leg, in consequence of the rotation in opposite directions which the limbs undergo during development (see p. 101).
 
 
 
 
THE LIMB MUSCLES
 
 
213
 
 
The first nerve which supplies the muscles attached to the dorsum of the ilium is the second lumbar, and following that there come successively from before backward the remaining lumbar and the
 
 
 
my
 
 
 
Fig. 125.  -  Sections through (A) the Thigh and (B) the Calf showing the Zones Supplied by the Nerves. The Nerves are Numbered in Continuation with the Thoracic Series.  -  (A, after Bolk.)
first and second sacral nerves. The arrangement of the muscle bands supplied by these nerves and the muscles of the adult to which they contribute may be seen from Fig. 124. What is shown there is only the upper portions of the postaxial bands, their lower portions
 
 
214
 
 
THE LIMB MUSCLES
 
 
extending downward on the anterior surface of the leg. Only the sacral bands, however, extend throughout the entire length of the limb into the foot, the second lumbar band passing down only to about the middle of the thigh, the third to about the knee, the fourth to about the middle of the crus and the fifth as far as the base of the fifth metatarsal bone, and the same is true of the corresponding praeaxial bands, which descend from the ventral surface of the os coxae (innominatum) along the inner and posterior surfaces of the leg to the same points. The first and second sacral bands can be traced into the foot, the first giving rise to the musculature of its
 
 
 
Fig. 126.  -  Section through the Upper Part of the Arm showing the Zones Supplied by the Nerves.
 
 
$v to jv, Ventral branches; 5J to Sd, dorsal branches of the cervical nerves. -  (Bolk.)
inner side and the second to that of its outer side, the praeaxial bands forming the plantar musculature, while the postaxial ones are upon the dorsum of the foot as a result of the rotation which the limb has undergone.
 
 
In a transverse section through a limb at any level all the muscle bands, both praeaxial and postaxial, which descend to that level will be cut and will lie in a definite succession from one border of the limb to the other, as is seen in Fig. 125. In the differentiation of the individual muscles which proceeds as the nerves extend from the trunk into the axial mesenchyme of the limb, the muscle bands
 
 
THE LIMB MUSCLES 215
undergo modifications similar to those already described as occurring in the trunk myotomes. Thus, each of the muscles represented in Fig. 125, B, is formed by the fusion of elements derived from two or more bands; the soleus and gastrocnemius represent deep and superficial layers formed from the same bands by a horizontal (tangential) splitting, these same muscles contain a portion of the second sacral band which overlaps muscles composed only of higher myotomes, and the intermuscular septum between the peroneus brevis and the flexor hallucis longus represents a portion of the third sacral band which has degenerated into connective tissue.
 
 
A similar arrangement occurs in the bands which are to be recognized in the musculature of the upper limb. These are supplied by the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth cervical and the first thoracic nerves, and only those supplied by the eighth cervical and the first thoracic nerves extend as far as the tips of the fingers. The arrangement of the bands in the upper part of the brachium may be seen from Fig. 126, in connection with which it must be noted that the fourth cervical band does not extend down to the level at which the section is taken and that the praeaxial band of the eighth cervical nerve and both the praeaxial and postaxial bands of the first thoracic are represented only by connective tissue in this region.
 
 
In another sense than the longitudinal one there is a division of the limb musculature into more or less definite areas, namely, in a transverse direction in accordance with the jointing of the skeleton. Thus, there may be recognized a group of muscles which pass from the axial skeleton to the pectoral girdle, another from the limb girdle to the brachium or thigh, another from the brachium or thigh to the antibrachium or crus, another from the antibrachium or crus to the carpus or tarsus, and another from the carpus or tarsus to the digits. This transverse segmentation, if it may be so termed, is not, however, perfectly definite, many muscles, even in the lower vertebrates, passing over more than one joint, and in the mammalia, especially, it is further obscured by secondary migrations, by the partial degeneration of muscles and by an end to end union of primarily distinct muscles.
 
 
 
 
2l6 THE LIMB MUSCLES
The latissimus dorsi, serratus anterior and pectoral muscles are all examples of a process of migration as is shown by their innervation from cervical nerves, as well as by the actual migration which has been traced in the developing embryo (Mall, Lewis). In the lower limb evidences of migration may be seen in the femoral head of the biceps, comparative anatomy showing this to be a derivative of the gluteal set of muscles which has secondarily become attached to the femur and has associated itself with a praeaxial muscle to form a compound structure. An appearance of migration may also be produced by a muscle making a secondary attachment below its original origin or above the insertion and the upper or lower part, as the case may be, then degenerating into connective tissue. This has been the case with the peroneus longus, which, in the lower mammals, has a femoral origin, but has in man a new origin from the fibula, its upper portion being represented by the fibular lateral ligament of the knee-joint. So too the pectoralis minor is primarily inserted into the humerus, but it has made a secondary attachment to the coracoid process, its distal portion forming a coraco-humeral ligament.
 
 
The comparative study of the flexor muscles of the antibrachial and crural regions has yielded abundant evidence of extensive modifications in the differentiation of the limb muscles. In the tailed amphibia these muscles are represented by a series of superposed layers, the most superficial of which arises from the humerus or femur, while the remaining ones take their origin from the ulna or fibula and are directed distally and laterally to be inserted either into the palmar or plantar aponeurosis, or, in the case of the deeper layers, into the radius (tibia) or carpus (tarsus). In the arm of the lower mammalia the deepest layer becomes the pronator quadratus, the lateral portions of the superficial layer are the flexor carpi ulnaris and the flexor carpi radialis, while the intervening layers, together with the median portion of the superficial one, assuming a more directly longitudinal direction, fuse to form a common flexor mass which acts on the digits through the palmar aponeurosis. From this latter structure and from the carpal and metacarpal bones five
 
 
THE LIMB MUSCLES
 
 
217
 
 
layers of palmar muscles take origin. The radial and ulnar portions of the most superficial of these become the flexor pollicis brevis and abductor pollicis brevis and the abductor quinti digiti, while the rest of the layer degenerates into connective tissue, forming tendons
 
 
 
 
Fig. 127.  -  Transverse sections through (A) the forearm and (B) the hand showing the arrangement of the layers of the flexor muscles. The superficial layer is shaded horizontally, the second layer vertically, the third obliquely to the left, the fourth vertically, and the fifth obliquely to the right. AbM, abductor digiti quinti; AdP, adductor pollicis; BR, brachio-radialis; ECD, extensor digitorum communis; ECU, extensor carpi ulnaris;£Z, extensor indicis; EMD, extensor digiti quinti; EMP, abductor pollicis longus; ERB, extensor carpi radialis brevis; FCR, flexor carpi radialis; FCU, flexor carpi ulnaris; FLP, flexor pollicis longus; FM, flexor digiti quinti brevis; FP, flexor digitorum profundus; FS, flexor digitorum sublimis; ID, interossei dorsales; IV, interossei volares; L, lumbricales; OM, opponens digiti quinti; PL, palmaris longus; PT, pronator teres; R, radius; U, ulna; II-V, second to fifth metacarpal.
 
 
which pass to the four ulnar digits. Gradually superficial portions of the antibrachial flexor mass separate off, carrying with them the layers of the palmar aponeurosis from which the tendons representing
 
 
2l8
 
 
THE LIMB MUSCLES
 
 
the superficial layer of the palmar muscles arise, and they form with these the flexor digitorum sublimis. The deeper layers of the antibrachial flexor mass become the flexor digitorum profundus and the flexor pollicis longus (Fig. 127, A), and retain their connection with the deeper layers of the palmar aponeurosis which form their tendons; and since the second layer of the palmar muscles takes origin from this portion of the aponeurosis it becomes the lumbrical muscles, arising from the profundus tendons (Fig. 127,
 
 
 
 
Fig. 128.  -  Transverse sections through (A) the crus and (B) the foot, showing the arrangement of the layers of the flexor muscles. The shading has the same significance as in the preceding figure. AbH, abductor hallucis; AbM, abductor minimi digiti; AdH, adductor hallucis; ELD, extensor longus digitorum; F, fibula; FBD, flexor brevis digitorium; FBH, flexor brevis hallucis; FBM, flexor brevis minimi digiti; FLD, flexor longus digitorum; G, gastrocnemius; ID, interossei dorsalis; IV, interossei ventrales; L, lumbricales; P, plantaris; Pe, peroneus longus; Po, popliteus; S, soleus; T, tibia; TA, tibialis anticus; TP, tibialis posticus; I-V, first to fifth metatarsal.
 
 
B). The third layer of palmar muscles becomes the adductors of the digits, reduced in man to the adductor pollicis, while from the two deepest layers the interossei are developed. Of these the fourth layer consists primarily of a pair of slips corresponding to each digit, while the fifth is represented by a series of muscles which extend obliquely across between adjacent metacarpals. With these last muscles certain of the fourth layer slips unite to form the dorsal interossei, while the rest become the volar interossei. j The modifications of the almost identical primary arrangement in the crus and foot are somewhat different. The superficial layer
 
 
LITERATURE 210,
of the crural flexors becomes the gastrocnemius and plantaris (Fig. 128, A) and the deepest layer becomes the popliteus and the interosseous membrane. The second and third layers unite to form a common mass which is inserted into the deeper layers of the plantar aponeurosis and later differentiates into the soleus and the long digital flexor, the former shifting its insertion from the plantar aponeurosis to the os calcis, while the flexor retains its connection with the deeper layers of the aponeurosis, these separating from the superficial layer to form the long flexor tendons. The fourth layer partly assumes a longitudinal direction and becomes the tibialis posterior and the flexor hallucis longus and partly retains its original cblique direction and its connection with the deep layers of the plantar aponeurosis, becoming the quadratus plantse. In the foot (Fig. 128, B) the superficial layer persists as muscular tissue, forming the abductors, the flexor digitorum brevis and the medial head of the flexor hallucis brevis, the second layer becomes the lumbricales, and the third the lateral head of the flexor hallucis brevis and the adductor hallucis, while the fourth and fifth layers together form the ioterossei, as in the hand, the flexor quinti digiti brevis really belonging to that group of muscles.
 
 
LITERATURE.
 
 
C. R. Bardeen and W. H. Lewis: "Development of the Limbs, Body-wall, and
Back in Man," The American Journal of Anat., 1, 1901. K. Bardeleben: "Musk el und Fascia," Jenaische Zeitschr. fiir Naturwissensch.,
xv, 1882. L. Bolk: "Beziehungen zwischen Skelett, Muskulatur und Nerven der Extremitaten,
dargelegt am Beckengurtel, an dessen Muskulatur sowie am Plexus lumbo
sacralis," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxi, 1894. L. Bolk: " Rekonstruktion der Segmentirung der Gliedmassenmuskulatur dargelegt
an den Muskeln des Oberschenkels und des Schultergurtels," Morphol. Jahrbuch,
xxii, 1895. L. Bolk: "Die Sklerozonie des Humerus," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxill, 1S96. L. Bolk: "Die Segmentaldifferenzierung des menschlichen Rumpfes und seiner
Extremitaten," 1, Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxv, 1898. R. Futamtjra: "Ueber die Entwickelung der Facialismuskulatur des Menschen,"
Anat. Hefte, xxx, 1906. E. Godlewski: "Die Entwicklung des Skelet- und Herzmuskelgewebes der Sauge
thiere," Archiv fur mikr. Anat., lx, 1902.
 
 
 
 
220 LITERATURE
E. Grafenberg: "Die Entwicklung der menschlichen Beckenmuskulatur," Anal.
 
 
Hefte, xxiii, 1904. W. P. Herringham: "The Minute Anatomy of the Brachial Plexus," Proceedings
of the Royal Soc. London, xli, 1886. W. H. Lewis: " The Development of the Arm in Man," Amer. Jour, of Anat., 1, 1902 J. B. MacCallum: "On the Histology and Histogenesis of the Heart Muscle-cell,"
Anat. Anzeiger, xiil, 1897. J. B. MacCallum: "On the Histogenesis of the Striated Muscle-fiber and the
Growth of the Human Sartorius Muscle," Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, 1898
F. P. Mall: "Development of the Ventral Abdominal Walls in Man," Journ. of
Morphol., xiv, 1898. Caroline McGill: "The Histogenesis of Smooth Muscle in the Alimentary Canal
and Respiratory Tract of the Pig," Internat. Monatschr. Anat. und Phys., xxiv,
1907. J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Forearm Flexors," Amer. Journ, of Anat.,
11, 1903. J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Palmar Musculature," Amer. Journ. of
Anat., 11, 1903. J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Crural Flexors," Amer. Journ. of Anat.,
iv, 1904. J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Plantar Musculature," Amer. Journ. of
Anat., vi, 1907.
 
 
A. Meek: "Preliminary Note on the Post-embryonal History of Striped Muscle-fibers
in Mammalia," Anat. Anzeiger, xiv, 1898. (See also Anat. Anzeiger, xv, 1899.)
B. Morpurgo: "Ueber die post-embryonale Entwickelung der quergestreiften Muskel
von weissen Ratten," Anat. Anzeiger, xv, 1899. I. Popowsky: " Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte des N. facialis beim Menschen," Morphol.
 
 
Jahrbuch, xxiii, 1896. I. Popowsky: " Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Dammmuskulatur beim Menschen,"
Anat. Hefte, xi, 1899. L. Rethi: "Der peripheren Verlauf der motorischen Rachen- und Gaumennerven,"
Sitzungsber. der kais. Akad. Wissensch. Wien. Math.-Naturwiss. Classe, Cii, 1893.
 
 
C. S. Sherrington: " Notes on the Arrangement of Some Motor Fibers in the Lumbosacral Plexus," Journal of Physiol., xin, 1892. J. B. Sutton: "Ligaments, their Nature and Morphology," London, 1897.
 
 
 
==CHAPTER IX THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE CIRCULATORY AND LYMPHATIC SYSTEMS==
 
{{McMurrich1914 header}}
 
At present nothing is known as to the earliest stages of development of the circulatory system in the human embryo, but it may be supposed that they resemble in their fundamental features what has been observed in such forms as the rabbit and the chick. In both these the system originates in two separate parts, one of which, located in the embryonic mesoderm, gives rise to the heart, while the other, arising in the extra-embryonic mesoderm, forms the first blood-vessels. It will be convenient to consider these two parts separately, and the formation of the blood-vessels may be first described.
 
 
In the rabbit the extension of the mesoderm from the embryonic region, where it first appears, over the yolk-sac is a gradual process, and it is in the more peripheral portions of the layer that the bloodvessels first make their appearance. They can be distinguished before the splitting of the mesoderm has been completed, but are always developed in that portion of the layer which is most intimately associated with the yolk-sac, and consequently becomes the splanchnic layer. They belong, indeed, to the deeper portion of that layer, that nearest the endoderm of the yolk-sac, and so characteristic is their origin from this portion of the layer that it has been termed the angioblast and has been held to be derived from the endoderm independently of the mesoderm proper. The first indication of blood-vessels is the appearance in the peripheral portion of the mesoderm of cords or minute patches of spherical cells (Fig. 129, .4). These increase in size by the division and separation of the cells from one another (Fig. 129, B), a clear fluid appearing in the intervals which separate them. Soon the cells surrounding each cord arrange
 
 
222
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE BLOOD-VESSELS
 
 
themselves to form an enclosing wall, and the cords, increasing in size, unite together to form a network of vessels in which float the spherical cells which may be known as mesamceboids (Minot). Viewed from the surface at this stage a portion of the vascular area of the mesoderm would have the appearance shown in Fig. 130, revealing a dense network of canals in which, at intervals, are groups of mesamaeboids adherent to the walls, constituting what have been termed the blood-islands, while in the meshes of the network unaltered mesoderm cells can be seen, forming the so-called substance-islands.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 129.  -  Transverse Section through the Area Vasculosa of Rabbit Embryos showing the Transformation of Mesoderm cells into the Vascular Cords.
 
 
Ec, Ectoderm; En, endoderm; Me, mesoderm.  -  (van der Stricht.)
At the periphery of the vascular area the vessels arrange themselves to form a sinus terminalis enclosing the entire area, and the vascularization of the splanchnic mesoderm gradually extends toward the embryo. Reaching it, the vessels penetrate the embryonic tissues and eventually come into connection with the heart, which has already differentiated and has begun to beat before the connection with the vessels is made, so that when it is made the circulation is at once established. Before, however, the vascularization reaches the embryo some of the canals begin to enlarge (Fig.
 
 
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE BLOOD-VESSELS
 
 
223
 
 
B£
 
 
131,-4), producing arteries and veins, the rest of the network forming capillaries uniting these two sets of vessels, and, this process continuing, there are eventually differentiated a single vitelline artery and two vitelline veins (Fig. 131, B).
 
 
In the human embryo the small size of the yolk-sac permits of the extension of the vascular area over its entire surface at an early period, and this condition has already been reached in the earliest stages known and consequently no sinus terminalis such as occurs in the rabbit is visible. Otherwise the conditions are probably similar to what has been described above, the first circulation developed being associated with the yolk-sac.
 
 
It is to be noted that the capillary network of the area vasculosa consists of relatively wide anastomosing spaces whose endothelial lining rests directly upon the substance islands (Fig. 130). In certain of the embryonic organs, notably the liver, the metanephros and the heart, the network has a similar character, consisting of wide anastomosing spaces bounded by an endothelium which rests directly, or almost so, upon the parenchyma of the organ (the hepatic cylinders, the mesonephric tubules, or the cardiac muscle trabecular) (Figs. 132 and 190, B). To this form of capillary the term sinusoid has been applied (Minot), and it appears to be formed by the expansion of the wall of a previously existing blood-vessel, which thus moulds itself, as it were, over the parenchyma of the organ. The
 
 
 
Fig. 130.  -  Surface View of a Portion of the Area Vasculosa of a Chick.
 
 
The vascular network is represented by the shaded portion. Bi, Bloodisland; Si, substance-island.  -  (Disse.)
 
 
224
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE BLOOD
 
 
true capillaries, on the other hand, are more definitely tubular in form, are usually imbedded in mesenchymatous connective tissue and are developed in the same manner as the primary capillaries of the area vasculosa, by the aggregation of vasifactive cells to form cords, and the subsequent hollowing out of these. Whether these vasifactive cells are new differentiations of the embryonic mesenchyme or are budded off from the walls of existing capillaries which have grown in from extra-embryonic regions, is at present undecided. The Formation of the Blood.  -  The mesamceboids, which are
 
 
gl
 
 
 
 
 
i i
 
 
 
A , \
Fig. 131.  -  The Vascular Areas of Rabbit Embryos. In B the Veins are Represented by Black and the Network is Omitted.  -  (van Beneden and Julin.)
 
 
the first formed blood-corpuscles are all nucleated and destitute or nearly so of haemoglobin. They have been held by some observers to be the only source of the various forms of corpuscles that are found in the adult vessels, while others maintain that they give rise only to the red corpuscles, the leukocytes arising in tissues external to the blood-vessels and only secondarily making their way into them. According to this latter view the red and white corpuscles have a different origin and remain distinct throughout life.
 
 
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE BLOOD 225
So long as the formation of blood-vessels is taking place in the extra-embryonic mesoderm, so long are new mesamceboids being differentiated from the mesoderm. But whether the formation of blood-vessels within the embryo results from a differentiation of the embryonic mesoderm in situ, or from the actual ingrowth of vessels from the extra-embryonic regions (His), is as yet uncertain, and hence it is also uncertain whether mesamceboids are differentiated from the embryonic mesoderm or merely pass into the embryonic region from the more peripheral areas. However this may be, it is certain that they and the erythrocytes that are formed from them increase by division in the interior of the embryo, and that there are certain portions of the body in which these divisions take place most abundantly, partly, perhaps, on account of the more favorable conditions of nutrition which they present and partly because they are regions where the circulation is sluggish and permits the accumulation of erythrocytes. These regions constitute what have been termed the hematopoietic organs, and are especially noticeable in the later stages of fetal life, diminishing in number and variety about the time of birth. It must be remembered, however, that the life of individual corpuscles is comparatively short, their death and disintegration taking place continually during the entire life of the individual, so that there is a necessity for the formation of new corpuscles and for the existence of haematopoietic organs at all stages of life.
 
 
In the fetus mesamceboids in process of division may be found in the general circulation and even in the heart itself, but they are much more plentiful in places where the blood-pressure is diminished, as, for instance, in the larger capillaries of the lower limbs and in the capillaries of all the visceral organs and of the subcutaneous tissues. Certain organs, however, such as the liver, the spleen, and the bone-marrow, present especially favorable conditions for the multiplication of the blood-cells, and in these not only are the capillaries enlarged so as to afford resting-places for the corpuscles, but gaps appear in the walls of the vessels through which the blood-elements may pass and so come into intimate relations with the actual tissues is
 
 
226
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE BLOOD
 
 
of the organs (Fig. 132). After birth the haematopoietic function of the liver ceases and that of the spleen becomes limited to the formation of white corpuscles, though the complete function may be re-established in cases of extreme anaemia. The bone-marrow, however, retains the function completely, being throughout life the seat of formation of both red and white corpuscles, the lymphatic nodes and follicles, as well as the spleen, assisting in the formation of the latter elements.
 
 
The mesamceboids early become converted into nucleated red
corpuscles or erythrocytes by the development of haemoglobin in their cytoplasm, their nuclei at the same time becoming granular. Up to a stage at which the embryo has a length of about 12 mm. these are the only form of red corpuscle in the circulation, but at this time (Minot) a new form, characterized by its smaller size and more deeply staining nucleus, makes its appearance. These erythrocytes have been termed normoblasts (Ehrlich), although they are merely transition stages leading to the formation of erythroplastids by the extrusion of their nuclei (Fig. 133). The cast-off nuclei undergo degeneration and phagocytic absorption by the leukocytes, and the masses of cytoplasm pass into the circulation, becoming more and more numerous as development proceeds, until finally they are the typical haemoglobin-containing elements in the blood and form what are properly termed the red bloodcorpuscles.
 
 
It has already (p. 224) been pointed out that discrepant views
 
 
 
Fig. 132.  -  Section of a Portion or the Liver of a Rabbit Embryo of 5 mm. e, Erythrocytes in the liver substance and in a capillary; h, hepatic cells.  -  (van der Stricht)
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE BLOOD 227
prevail as to the origin of the white blood-corpuscles. Indeed, three distinct modes of origin have been assigned to them. According to one view they have a common origin with the erythrocytes from the mesamceboids (Weidenreich), according to another they are formed from mesenchyme cells outside the cavities of the blood-vessels (Maximo w), while according to a third view the first formed leukocytes take their origin from the endodermal epithelial cells of the thymus gland (Prenant).
 
 
But whatever may be their origin in later stages the leukocytes multiply by mitosis and there is a tendency for the dividing cells to collect in the lymphoid tissues, such as
the lymph nodes, tonsils, etc., to form /||\ /^s 0$\ /^p. & more or less definite groups which  -  ^^ v^ KjJ \Jj
have been termed germ-centers (Flem
. m , .. . . _ Fig. 133.  -  Stages in the
ming). The new cells when they first transformation of an Ery
pass into the circulation have a rel- throcyte into an _ Erythro
r plastid.  -  (van der Stricnt.)
atively large nucleus surrounded by a
small amount of cytoplasm without granules and, since they resemble the cells found in the lymphatic vessels, are termed lymphocytes (Fig. 134, a). In the circulation, however, other forms of leukocytes also occur, which are believed to have their origin from cells with much larger nuclei and more abundant cytoplasm, which occur throughout life in the bone-marrow and have been termed myelocytes. Cells of a similar type, free in the circulation, constitute what are termed the finely granular leukocytes (neutrophile cells of Ehrlich) (Fig. 134, b), but whether these and the myelocytes are derived from lymphocytes or have an independent origin is as yet undetermined. Less abundant are the coarsely granular leukocytes (eosinophile cells of Ehrlich) (Fig. 134, c), characterized by the coarseness and staining reactions of their cytoplasmic granules and by their reniform or constricted nucleus. They are probably derivatives of the finely granular type and it has been maintained by Weidenreich that their granules have been acquired by the phagocytosis of degenerated erythrocytes. Finally, a third type is formed by the polymorphonuclear or polynuclear leukocytes (basophile cells
 
 
228
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE BLOOD
 
 
of Ehrlich) (Fig. 134, d), which are to be regarded as leukocytes in the process of degeneration and are characterized by their irregularly lobed or fragmented nuclei, as well as by their staining peculiarities.
 
 
In the fetal haematopoietic organs and in the bone-marrow of the adult large, so-called giant-cells are found, which, although they do not enter into the general circulation, are yet associated with the development of the blood-corpuscles. These giant-cells as they
 
 
 
 
Fig. 134.  -  Figures of the Different Forms of White Corpuscles occurring
in Human Blood.
 
 
a, Lymphocytes; b, finely granular (neutrophile) leukocyte; c, coarsely granular (eosino
phile) leukocyte; d, polymorphonuclear (basophile) leukocyte.  -  (Weidenreich.)
 
 
occur in the bone-marrow are of two kinds which seem to be quite distinct, although both are probably formed from leukocytes. In one kind the cytoplasm contains several nuclei, wherce they have been termed polycaryocytes, and they seem to be the cells which have already been mentioned as osteoclasts (p. 158). In the other kind (Fig- I 35) tne nucleus is single, but it is large and irregular in shape, frequently appearing as if it were producing buds. These megacaryocytes appear to be phagocytic cells, having as their function the destruction of degenerated corpuscles and of the nuclei of the erythrocytes.
 
 
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART 229
The blood-platelets have recently been shown by Wright to be formed from the cytoplasm of the megacaryocytes, by the constriction and separation of portions of the slender processes to which they give rise in their amoeboid movements (Fig. 135).
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 135.  -  Megacaryocyte from a Kitten, which has Extended two pseudopodial processes through the wall of blood-vessel and is budding off blood-platelets.
 
 
bp, Blood-platelets; V, blood-vessel.  -  (J. H. Wright.)
The Formation of the Heart.  -  The heart makes its appearance while the embryo is still spread out upon the surface of the yolk-sac, and arises as two separate portions which only later come into contact in the median line. On each side of the body near the margins of the embryonic area a fold of the splanchnopleure appears, projecting into the ccelomic cavity, and within this fold a very thinwalled sac is formed, probably by a splitting off of its innermost cells (Fig. 136, .4). Each fold will produce a portion of the muscular walls (myocardium) of the heart, and each sac part of its endothelium (endocardium). As the constriction of the embryo from the yolk-sac proceeds, the two folds are gradually brought nearer together (Fig. 136, B), until they meet in the mid-ventral line, when the myocardial folds and endocardial sacs fuse together (Fig. 136, C) to form a cylindrical heart lying in the mid-ventral line of the body, in front of the anterior surface of the yolk-sac and in what will later be the
 
 
230
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
 
 
cervical region of the body. At an early stage the various veins which have already been formed, the vitellines, umbilicals, jugulars
 
 
 
en
 
 
Fig. 136.  -  Diagrams Illustrating the Formation or the Heart in the
Guinea-pig. The mesoderm is represented in black and the endocardium by a broken line. am, Amnion; en, endoderm; h, heart; i, digestive tract.-  -  (After Strahl and Carius.)
and cardinals, unite together to open into a sac-like structure, the sinus venosus, and this opens into the posterior end of the heart cylinder. The anterior end of the cylinder tapers off to form the
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
 
 
231
 
 
aortic bulb, which is continued forward on the ventral surface of the pharyngeal region and carries the blood away from the heart. The blood accordingly opens into the posterior end of the heart tube and flows out from its anterior end.
 
 
The simple cylindrical form soon changes, however, the heart tube in embryos of 2.15 mm. in length having become bent upon itself into a somewhat S-shaped curve (Fig. 137). Dorsally and to the left is the end into which the sinus venosus opens, and from this
 
 
 
Fig. 137.  -  Heart of EmbrycTof 2.15 mm., from a Reconstruction.
 
 
a, Atrium; ab, aortic bulb; d, diaphragm; dc, ductus Cuvieri; /, liver; v, ventricle; vj, jugular vein; vu, umbilical vein.  -  (His.)
 
 
 
Fig. 138.  -  Heart of Embryo of 4.2 mm., seen from the Dorsal Surface.
 
 
DC, Ductus Cuvieri; I A , left atrium rA, right atrium; vf, jugular vein; VI, left ventricle; vu, umbilical vein.  -  (His.)
 
 
the heart tube ascends somewhat and then bends so as to pass at first ventrally and then caudally and to the right, where it again bends at first dorsally and then anteriorly to pass over into the aortic bulb. The portion of the curve which lies dorsally and to the left is destined to give rise to both atria, the portion which passes from right to left represents the future left ventricle, while the succeeding portion represents the right ventricle. In later stages (Fig. 138) the left ventricular portion drops downward in front of the atrial
 
 
232
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
 
 
portion, assuming a more horizontal position, while the portion which represents the right ventricle is drawn forward so as to lie in the same plane as the left.
 
 
At the same time two small out-pouchings develop from the atrial part of the heart and form the first indications of the two atria. As development progresses, these increase in size to form large pouches opening into a common atrial canal (Fig. 139) which is directly continuous with the left ventricle, and as the enlargement of the pouches continues their openings into the canal enlarge,
until finally the pouches become continuous with one another, forming a single large sac, and the atrial canal becomes reduced to a short tube which is slightly invaginated into the ventricle (Fig. 140).
 
 
In the meantime the sinus venosus, which was originally an oval sac and opened into the atrial canal, has elongated transversely until it has assumed the form of a crescent whose convexity is in contact with the walls of the atria, and its opening into the heart has verged toward the right, until it is situated entirely within the area of the right atrium. As the enlargement of the atria continues, the right horn and median portion of the crescent are gradually taken up into their walls, so that the various veins which originally opened into the sinus now open directly into the right atrium by a single opening, guarded by a projecting fold which is continued upon the roof of the atrium as a muscular ridge known as the septum spurium (Fig. 140, sp). The left horn of the crescent is not taken up into the atrial wall, but remains upon its posterior surface as an elongated sac forming the coronary sinus.
 
 
The division of the now practically single atrial cavity into the
 
 
 
Fig. 139.  -  Heart of Embryo of 5 mm., Seen from in Front and slightly from Above.  -  (His).
 
 
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
 
 
233
 
 
permanent right and left atria begins with the formation of a falciform ridge running dorso-ventrally across the roof of the cavity. This is the atrial septum or septum primum (Fig. 140, ss), and it rapidly increases in size and thickens upon its free margin, which reaches almost to the upper border of the short atrial canal (Fig. 142). The continuity of the two atria is thus almost dissolved, but is soon re-established by the formation in the dorsal part of the septum of an opening which soon reaches a considerable size and is known as
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 140.  -  Inner Surface of the Heart of an Embryo of 10 mm.
 
 
al, Atrio-ventricular thickening; sp, septum spurium; ss, septum primum; sv, septum
ventriculi; ve, Eustachian valve.  -  (His.)
the foramen ovale (Fig. 141, fo). Close to the atrial septum, and parallel with it, a second ridge appears in the roof and ventral wall of the right atrium. This septum secundum (Fig. 141, S 2 ) is of relatively slight development in the human embryo, and its free edge, arching around the ventral edge and floor of the foramen ovale, becomes continuous with the left lip of the fold which guards the opening of the sinus venosus and with this forms the annulus of Vieussens of the adult heart.
 
 
 
 
234
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
 
 
Si Sz
 
 
 
When the absorption of the sinus venosus into the wall of the right atrium has proceeded so far that the veins communicate directly with the atrium, the vena cava superior opens into it at the upper part of the dorsal wall, the vena cava inferior more laterally, and below this is the smaller opening of the coronary sinus. The
upper portion of the right lip of the fold which originally surrounded the opening of the sinus venosus, together with the septum spurium, gradually disappears; the lower portion persists, however, and forms (i) the Eustachian valve (Fig. 141, Ve), guarding the opening of the inferior cava and directing the blood entering by it toward the foramen ovale, and (2) the Thebesian valve, which guards the opening of the coronary sinus. At first no Fig. 141. -  Heart of Embryo veins communicate with the left atrium,
OF I0.2 CM. FROM WHICH HALF , 111 c t i 1
of the Right Auricle has but on the development of the lungs and been Removed. the establishment of their vessels, the
fo, Foramen ovale; pa, pul- , . .,,
monary artery; S u septum pri- pulmonary veins make connection with
mum; S 2 ,_ septum secundum; j t TwQ ye j ns arise from eac h l ung an( J ba, systemic aorta; V, right ven- °
tricle; vd and vcs, inferior and as they pass toward the heart they unite
superior venae cavae; Ve, Eusta- ,-, i r „ j •
chfan valve. . in pairs, the two vessels so formed again
uniting to form a single short trunk which opens into the upper part of the atrium (Fig. 142, Vep). As is the case with the right atrium and the sinus venosus, the expansion of the left atrium brings about the absorption of the short single trunk into its walls, and, the expansion continuing, the two vessels are also absorbed, so that eventually the four primary veins open independently into the atrium.
 
 
While the atrial septa have been developing there has appeared on the dorsal wall of the atrial canal a tubercle-like thickening of the endocardium, and a similar thickening also forms on the ventral wall. These endocardial cushions increase in size and finally unite together by their tips, forming a complete partition, dividing the
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
 
 
2 35
 
 
atrial canal into a right and left half (Fig. 142). With the upper edge of this partition the thickened lower edge of the atrial septum unites, so that the separation of the atria would be complete were it not for the foramen ovale.
 
 
 
 
 
SM
 
 
En.s
 
 
Fig. 142.  -  Section through a Reconstruction of the Heart of a Rabbit
Embryo of 10. i mm. Ad and Ad u Right and As, left atrium; Bw x and Bw 2 , lower ends of the ridges which divide the aortic bulb; En, endocardial cushion; En.r and En.s, thickenings of the cushion; la, interatrial and Iv, interventricular communication; S v septum primum; Sd, right and Ss, left horn of the sinus venosus; S.iv, ventricular septum; SM, opening of the sinus venosus into the atrium; Vd, right and Vs, left ventricle; Vej, jugular vein; Vep, pulmonary vein; Vvd and Vvs, right and left limbs of the valve guarding the opening of the sinus venosus.  -  (Born.)
While these changes have been taking place in the atrial portion of the heart, the separation of the right and left ventricles has also been progressing, and in this two distinct septa take part. From the floor of the ventricular cavity along the line of junction of the
 
 
236 THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
right and left portions a ridge, composed largely of muscular tissue, arises (Figs. 140 and 142), and, growing more rapidly in its dorsal than its ventral portion, it comes into contact and fuses with the dorsal part of the partition of the atrial canal. Ventrally, however, the ridge, known as the ventricular septum, fails to reach the ventral part of the partition , so that an oval foramen, situated just below the point where the aortic bulb arises, still remains between the two ventricles. This opening is finally closed by what it termed the aortic septum. This makes its appearance in the aortic bulb just at the point where the first lateral branches which give origin to the pulmonary arteries (see p. 243) arise, and is formed by the fusion of the free edges of two endocardial ridges which develop on opposite sides of the bulb. From its point of origin it gradually extends down the bulb until it reaches the ventricle, where it fuses with the free edge of the ventricular septum and so completes the separation of the two ventricles (Fig. 143). The bulb now consists of two vessels lying side by side, and owing to the position of the partition at its anterior end, one of these vessels, that which opens into the right ventricle, is continuous with the pulmonary arteries, while the other, which opens into the left ventricle, is continuous with the rest of the vessels which arise from the forward continuation of the bulb. As soon as the development of the partition is completed, two grooves, corresponding in position to the lines of attachment of the partition on the inside of the bulb, make their appearance on the outside and gradually deepen until they finally meet and divide the bulb into two separate vessels, one of which is the pulmonary aorta and the other the systemic aorta.
 
 
In the early stages of the heart's development the muscle bundles which compose the wall of the ventricle are very loosely arranged, so that the ventricle is a somewhat spongy mass of muscular tissue with a relatively small cavity. As development proceeds the bundles nearest the outer surface come closer together and form a compact layer, those on the inner surface, however, retaining their loose arrangement for a longer time (Fig. 142). The lower edge of the atrial canal becomes prolonged on the left side into one, and on the
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
 
 
237
 
 
right side into two, flaps which project downward into the ventricular cavity, and an additional flap arises on each side from the lower
 
 
 
S.ur
 
 
Eav.d
 
 
 
Sivr
 
 
Fig. 143.  -  Diagrams of Sections through the Heart of Embryo Rabbits to Show the Mode of Division of the Ventricles and of the Atrio-ventricular Orifice.
 
 
Ao, Aorta; Ar. p, pulmonary artery; B, aortic bulb; Bw 2 and *, one of the ridges which divide the bulb; Eo, and Eu, upper and lower thickenings of the margins of the atrio-ventricular orifice; F.av.c, the original atrio-ventricular orifice; F.av.d and F.av.s, right and left atrio-ventricular orifices; Oi, interventricular communication; S.iv, ventricular septum; Vd and Vs, right and left ventricles.  -  (Born.)
edge of the partition of the atrial canal, so that three flaps occur in the right atrio-ventricular opening and two in the left. To the
 
 
2 3 8
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART
 
 
under surfaces of these flaps the loosely arranged muscular trabecular of the ventricle are attached, and muscular tissue also occurs in the flaps. This condition is transitory, however; the muscular tissue of the flaps degenerates to form a dense layer of connective tissue, and at the same time the muscular trabecular undergo a condensation. Some of them separate from the flaps, which represent the atrio-ventricular valves, and form muscle bundles which may fuse throughout their entire length with the more compact portions of the ventricular walls, or else may be attached only by their ends, forming loops; these two varieties of muscle bundles constitute the trabecule carnece of the adult heart. Other bundles
 
 
 
 
Fig. 144.  -  Diagrams showing the Development of the Atjriculo-ventricular
Valves.
 
 
b, Muscular trabecule; cht, chordae tendinae; mk and vtk 1 , valve; pm, musculus papillaris;
tc, trabeculse carneae; v, ventricle.  -  (From Hertwig, after Gegenbaur.)
 
 
may retain a transverse direction, passing across the ventricular cavity and forming the so-called moderator bands; while others, again, retaining their attachment to the valves, condense only at their lower ends to form the musculi papillares, their upper portions undergoing conversion into strong though slender fibrous cords, the chorda tendinece (Fig. 144).
 
 
The endocardial lining of the ventricles is at first a simple sac separated by a distinct interval from the myocardium, but when the condensation of the muscle trabecular occurs the endocardium applies itself closely to the irregular surface so formed, dipping into all the crevices between the trabeculse carneae and wrapping itself around
 
 
 
THE FORMATION OF THE HEART 239
the musculi papillares and chordae tendineae so as to form a complete
lining of the inner surface of the myocardium.
 
 
The aortic and pulmonary semilunar valves make their appearance,
before the aortic bulb undergoes its longitudinal splitting, as four
tubercle-like thickenings of connective tissue situated on the inner
wall of the bulb just where it arises from the ventricle. When the
division of the bulb occurs, two of the thickenings, situated on
opposite sides, are divided, so that both the
pulmonary and systemic aorta? receive three
thickenings (Fig. 145). Later the thickenings
become hollowed out on the surfaces directed
away from the ventricles and are so converted
into the pouch-like valves of the adult.
 
 
Changes in the Heart after Birth.  -  The T FlG - 145- -  Diagrams
/ . Illustrating the For
heart when first formed lies far forward in the mation of the Semi
neck region of the embryo, between the head £toarValves.-(G^«»and the anterior surface of the yolk-sac, and from this position it gradually recedes until it reaches its final position in the thorax. And not only does it thus change its relative position, but the direction of its axes also changes. For at an early stage the ventricles lie directly in front of (i. e., ventrad to) the atria and not below them as in the adult heart, and this primitive condition is retained until the diaphragm has reached its final position (see p. 322).
 
 
In addition to these changes in position, which are antenatal, important changes also occur in the atrial septum after birth. Throughout the entire period of fetal life the foramen ovale persists, permitting the blood returning from the placenta and entering the right atrium to pass directly across to the left atrium, thence to the left ventricle, and so out to the body through the systemic aorta (see p. 267). At birth the lungs begin to function and the placental circulation is cut off, so that the right atrium receives only venous blood and the left only arterial; a persistence of the foramen ovale beyond this period would be injurious, since it would permit of a mixture of the arterial and venous bloods, and, consequently, it
 
 
240 DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
closes completely soon after birth. The closure is made possible by the fact that during the growth of the heart in size the portion of the atrial septum which is between the edge of the foramen ovale and the dorsal wall of the atrium increases in width, so that the foramen is carried further and further away from the dorsal wall of the atrium and comes to be almost completely overlapped by the annulus of Vieussens (Fig. 141). This process continuing, the dorsal portion of the atrial septum finally overlaps the free edge of the annulus, and after birth the fusion of the.overlapping surfaces takes place and the foramen is completely closed.
 
 
In a large percentage (25 to 30 per cent.) of individuals the fusion of the surfaces of the septum and annulus is not complete, so that a slit-like opening persists between the two atria. This, however, does not allow of any mingling of the blood in the two cavities, since when the atria contract the pressure of the blood on both sides will force the overlapping folds together and so practically close the opening. Occasionally the growth of the dorsal portion of the septum is imperfect or is inhibited, in which case closure of the foramen ovale is impossible.
 
 
The Development of the Arterial System.-  -  It has been seen (p. 221) that the formation of the blood-vessels begins in the extraembryonic splanchnic mesoderm surrounding the yolk-sac and extends thence toward the embryo. Furthermore, it has been seen that the vessels appear as capillary networks from which definite stems are later elaborated. This seems also to be the method of formation of the vessels developed within the body of the embryo, the arterial and venous stems being first represented by a number of anastomosing capillaries, from which, by the enlargement of some and the disappearance of the others, the definite stems are formed.
 
 
The earliest known embryo that shows a blood circulation is that described by Eternod (Fig. 43). From the plexus of vessels on the yolk-sack two veins arise which unite with two other veins returniDg from the chorion by the belly-stalk and passing forward to the heart as the two umbilical veins (Fig. 146, Vu). There is as yet no vitelline vein, the chorionic circulation in the human embryo apparently taking precedence over the vitelline. From the heart a short arterial stem arises, which soon divides so as to form three
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
 
 
241
 
 
branches* passing dorsally on either side of the pharynx. The branches of each side then unite to form a paired dorsal aorta (dAr, dAs) which extends caudally and is continued into the belly-stalk and so to the chorion as the umbilical arteries (Au). There is as yet no sign of vitelline arteries passing to the yolk-sack, again an indication of the subservience of the vitelline to the chorionic circulation in the human embryo.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 146.  -  Diagram showing the Arrangement of the Blood-vessels in an
Embryo 1.3 mm. in Length.
 
 
Au, Umbilical artery; All, allantois; Ch, chorionic villus; dAr and dAs, right and left
dorsal aortae; Vu, umbilical veins; Ys, yolk-sack.  -  (From Kollmann after Eternod.)
In later stages when the branchial arches have appeared the dorsally directed arteries are seen to lie in these, forming what are termed the branchial arch vessels, and later also the two dorsal
 
 
* Evans (Keibel-Mall, Human Embryology, Vol. 11, 1912) considers two of these branches to be probably plexus formations rather than definite stems, since there is evidence to indicate that only one such stem exists at such an early stage of development. 16
 
 
242
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
 
 
aortae fuse as far forward as the region of the eighth cervical segment to form a single trunk from which segmental branches arise.
 
 
It will be convenient to consider first the history of the vessels which pass dorsally in the branchial arches. Altogether, six of these vessels are developed, the fifth being rudimentary and transitory, and when fully formed they have an arrangement which may be understood from the diagram (Fig. 147). This arrangement represents a condition which is permanent in the lower vertebrates. In the fishes the respiration is performed by means of gills developed upon the branchial arches, and the heart is an organ which receives venous blood from the body and pumps it to the gills, in which it becomes arterialized and is then collected into the dorsal aortae, which distribute it to the body. But in terrestrial animals, with the loss of the gills and the development of the lungs as respiratory organs, the capillaries of the gills disappear and the afferent and efferent branchial vessels become continuous, the condition represented in the diagram resulting. But this condition is merely temporary in the mammalia and numerous changes occur in the arrangement of the vessels before the adult plan is realized. The first change is a disappearance of the vessel of the first arch, the ventral stem from which it arose being continued forward to form the temporal arteries, giving off near the point where the branchial vessel originally arose a branch which represents the internal maxillary artery in part, and possibly also a
 
 
 
Fig. 147.  -  Diagram Illustrating the Primary Arrangement of the Branchial Arch Vessels.
 
 
a, aorta; db, aortic bulb; ec, external carotid; ic, internal carotid; sc, subclavian; I-VI, branchial arch vessels.
 
 
 
 
' DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM 243
second branch which represents the external maxillary (His). A little later the second branchial vessel also degenerates (Fig. 148), a branch arising from the ventral trunk near its former origin, possibly representing the future lingual artery (His), and then the portion of the dorsal trunk which intervenes between the third and fourth branchial vessels vanishes, so that the dorsal trunk anterior to the third branchial arch is cut off from its connection with the dorsal aorta and forms, together with the vessel of the third arch, the internal carotid, while the ventral trunk, anterior to the point of
 
 
Fig. 148.  -  Arteriat, System of an Embryo of 10 mm.
 
 
Ic, Internal carotid; P, pulmonary artery; Ve, vertebral artery; III to VI, persistent
branchial vessels.  -  (His.)
origin of the third vessel, becomes the external carotid, and the portion which intervenes between the third and fourth vessels becomes the common carotid (Fig. 149).
 
 
The rudimentary fifth vessel, like the first and second, disappears, but the fourth persists to form the aortic arch, there being at this stage of development two complete aortic arches. From the sixth vessel a branch arises which passes backward to the lungs, forming the pulmonary artery, and the portion of the vessel of the right side which intervenes between this and the aortic arch disappears, while the corresponding portion of the left side persists
 
 
244
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
 
 
until after birth, forming the ductus arteriosus (ductus Botalli) (Fig. 149). When the longitudinal division of the aortic bulb occurs (p. 236), the septum is so arranged as to place the sixth arch in communication with the right ventricle and the remaining vessels in connection with the left ventricle, the only direct communication
between the systemic and ec pulmonary vessels being by
way of the ductus arteriosus, whose significance will be explained later (p. 267).
 
 
One other change is still necessary before the vessels acquire the arrangement which they possess during fetal life, and this consists in the disappearance of the lower portion of the right aortic arch (Fig. 149), so that the left arch alone forms the connection between the heart and the dorsal aorta. The upper part of the right aortic arch persists to form the proximal part of the right subclavian artery, the portion of the ventral trunk which unites the arch with the aortic bulb becoming the innominate artery.
 
 
From the entire length of the thoracic aorta, and in the embryo from the aortic arches, lateral branches arise corresponding to each segment and accompanying the segmental nerves. The first of these branches arises just below the point of union of the vessel of the sixth arch with the dorsal trunk and accompanies the hypoglossal nerve (Fig. 150, h), and that which accompanies the seventh
 
 
 
Fig. 149.  -  Diagram Illustrating the changes in the branchial arch vessels.
 
 
a, Aorta; da, ductus arteriosus; ec, external carotid; ic, internal carotid; pa, pulmonary artery; sc, subclavian; I- VI, aortic arch vessels.
 
 
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
 
 
245
 
 
cervical nerve arises just above the point of union of the two aortic arches (Fig. 150, s), and extends out into the limb bud, forming the subclavian artery.*
Further down twelve pairs of lateral branches, arising from the thoracic portion of the aorta, represent the intercostal arteries, and still lower four pairs of lumbar arteries are formed, the fifth lumbars being represented by two large branches, the common iliacs, which seem from their size to be the continuations of the aorta rather than branches of it. The true continuation of the aorta is, however, the middle sacral artery, which represents in a degenerated form the caudal prolongation of the aorta of other mammals, and, like this, gives off lateral branches corresponding to the sacral segments.
 
 
In addition to the segmental FlG . I50 . -  diagram showing the Re
lateral branches arising from nations op the Lateral Branches to
the Aortic Arches.
 
 
the aorta, Visceral branches, EC> External carotid; h, lateral branch
Which have their origin rather cacompanying the hypoglossal nerve; IC,
° internal carotid; ICo, intercostal; IM, m
from the Ventral surface, also ternal mammary; s, subclavian; v, verte
^„„,,~ TV, ~™u„mr, ~t - mm bral; I to VIII, lateral cervical branches;
OCCUr. In embryos of 5 mm. I; 2) lateral thoracic branches.
 
 
these branches are arranged in
a segmental manner in threes, a median unpaired vessel passing to the digestive tract and a pair of more lateral branches passing to the mesonephros (see p. 339) corresponding to each of the paired branches passing to the body wall (Fig. 151). As
* It must be remembered that the right subclavian of the adult is more than equivalent to the left, since it represents the fourth branchial vessel + a portion of the dorsal longitudinal trunk + the lateral segmental branch (see Fig. 142).
 
 
 
 
 
246
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
 
 
development proceeds the great majority of these visceral branches disappear, certain of the lateral ones persisting, however, to form the renal, internal spermatic, and hypogastric arteries of the adult, while the unpaired branches are represented only by the c celiac artery and the superior and inferior mesenteries. The superior mesenteric artery is the adult representative of the vitelline artery of the embryo and arises from the aorta by two, three or more roots, which correspond to the fifth, fourth and higher thoracic
 
 
 
Fig. 151.  -  Diagram showing the Arrangement of the Segmental Branches
arising from the aorta. A, Aorta; B, lateral somatic branch; c, lateral visceral branch; D, median visceral
branch; E, peritoneum.
 
 
segments. Later, all but the lowest of the roots disappear and the persisting one undergoes a downward migration in accordance with the recession of the diaphragm and viscera (see p. 322), until in embryos of 17 mm. it lies opposite the first lumbar segment. Similarly the cceliac and inferior mesenteric arteries, which when first recognizable in embryos of 9 mm. correspond with the fourth and twelfth thoracic segments respectively, also undergo a secondary downward migration, the cceliac artery in embryos of 17 mm. arising
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
 
 
247
 
 
opposite the twelfth thoracic and the inferior mesenteric opposite the third lumbar segment.
 
 
The umbilical arteries of the embryo seem at first to be the direct continuations of the dorsal aortas (Fig. 146), but as development proceeds they come to arise from the aorta opposite the third lumbar segment, where they are in line with the lateral visceral segmental branches. They pass ventral to the Wolffian duct (see p. 339) and are continued out along with the allantois to the chorionic villi. Later this original stem is joined, not far from its origin, by what appears to be the lateral somatic branch of the fifth lumbar segment, whereupon the proximal part of the original umbilical vessel degenerates and the umbilical comes to arise from the somatic branch, which is the common iliac artery of adult anatomy (Fig. 152). Hence it is that this vessel in the adult gives origin both to branches such as the external iliac, the gluteal, the sciatic and the internal pudendal, which are distributed to the body walls
or their derivatives, and to others, such as the vesical, inferior haemorrhoidal and uterine, which are distributed to the pelvic viscera. At birth the portions of the umbilical arteries beyond the umbilicus are severed when the umbilical cord is cut, and their intra-embryonic portions, which have been called the hypogastric arteries, quickly undergo a reduction in size. Their proximal portions remain functional as the superior vesical arteries, carrying blood to the urinary bladder, but the portions which intervene between the
 
 
 
Fig. 152.  -  Diagram Illustrating the Development of the Umbilical Arteries.
 
 
A, Aorta; CIl, common iliac; Ell, external iliac; G, gluteal; III, internal iliac; IP, internal pudic; IV, inferior vesical; Sc, sciatic; U, umbilical; U', primary proximal portion of the umbilical; wd, Wolffian duct.
 
 
 
 
248 DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
bladder and the umbilicus become reduced to solid cords, forming the obliterated hypogastric arteries of adult anatomy. f~ In its general plan, accordingly, the arterial system may be regarded as consisting of a pair of longitudinal vessels which fuse together throughout the greater portion of their length to form the dorsal aorta, from which there arise segmentary arranged lateral somatic branches and ventral and lateral visceral branches. With the exception of the aortic trunks (together with their anterior continuations, the internal carotids) and the external carotids, no longitudinal arteries exist primarily. In the adult, however, several longitudinal vessels, such as the vertebrals, internal mammary, and epigastric arteries, exist. The formation of these secondary longitudinal trunks is the result of a development between adjacent vessels of anastomoses, which become larger and more important blood-channels than the original vessels.
 
 
At an early stage each of the lateral branches of the dorsal aorta gives off a twig which passes forward to anastomose with a backwardly directed twig from the next anterior lateral branch, so as to form a longitudinal chain of anastomoses along each side of the neck. In the earliest stage at present known the chain starts from the lateral branch corresponding to the first cervical (suboccipital) segment and extends forward into the skull through the foramen magnum, terminating by anastomosing with the internal carotid. To this original chain other links are added from each of the succeeding cervical lateral branches as far back as the seventh (Figs. 150 and 153). But in the meantime the recession of the heart toward the thorax has begun, with the result that the common carotid stems are elongated and the aortic arches are apparently shortened so that the subclavian arises on the left side almost opposite the point where the aorta was joined by the sixth branchial vessel. As this apparent shortening proceeds, the various lateral branches which give rise to the chain of anastomoses, with the exception of the seventh, disappear in their proximal portions and the chain becomes an independent stem, the vertebral artery, arising from the seventh lateral branch, which is the subclavian.
 
 
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE ARTERIAL SYSTEM
 
 
249
 
 
The recession of the heart is continued until it lies below the level of the upper intercostal arteries, and the upper two of these, together with the last cervical branch on each side, lose their connection with the dorsal aorta, and, sending off anteriorly and posteriorly
 
 
-A.VCK
 
 
 
Fig. 153.  -  The Development of the Vertebral Artery in a Rabbit Embryo
of Twelve Days.
 
 
IIIA.B to VIA.B, Branchial arch vessels; Ap, pulmonary artery. A.v.c.b and A.v.cv, cephalic and cervical portions of the vertebral artery; A.s, subclavian; C.d and C.v internal and external carotid ; ISp.G, spinal ganglion.  -  (Hochstetter.)
 
 
anastomosing twigs, develop a short longitudinal stem, the superior intercostal, which opens into the subclavian.
 
 
The intercostals and their abdominal representatives, the
 
 
250
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF ARTERIES OF LIMBS
 
 
lumbars and iliacs, also give rise to longitudinal anastomosing twigs near their ventral ends (Fig. 154), and these increasing in size give rise to the internal mammary and inferior epigastric arteries, which together form continuous stems extending from the subclavian to the external iliacs in the ventral abdominal walls. The superficial epigastrics and other secondary longitudinal vessels are formed in a similar manner.
 
 
The Development of the Arteries of the Limbs.  -  The earliest stages in the development of the limb arteries are unknown in man,
 
 
 
Fig. 154,
 
 
-Embryo of 13 mm. showing the Mode of Development of the Internal Mammary and Deep Epigastric Arteries.  -  (Mall.)
 
 
but it has been found that in the mouse the primary supply of the anterior limb bud is from five branches arising from the sides of the aorta. These anastomose to form a plexus from which later a single stem, the subclavian artery, is elaborated, occupying the position of the seventh cervical segmental vessel, the remaining branches of the plexus having disappeared. The common iliac artery similarly
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF ARTERIES OF LIMBS 25 1
represents the fifth lumbar segmental artery, but whether or not it also is elaborated from a plexus is as yet unknown.
 
 
The later history of the limb arteries is also but imperfectly known and one must rely largely upon the facts of comparative anatomy and on the anomalies that occur in the adult for indications of what the development is likely to be. The comparative evidence indicates the existence of several stages in the development of the limb vessels, and so far as embryological observations go they confirm the conclusions drawn from this source, although the various stages show apparently a great amount of overlapping owing to a concentration of the developmental stages. In the simplest arrangement the subclavian is continued as a single trunk along the axis of the limb as far as the carpus, where it divides into digital branches for the fingers. In its course through the forearm it lies in the interval between the radius and ulna, resting on the interosseous membrane, and in this part of its course it may be termed the arteria interossea. In the second stage a new artery accompanying the median nerve appears, arising from the main stem or brachial artery a little below the elbow-joint. This may be termed the arteria mediana, and as it develops the arteria interossea gradually diminishes in size, becoming finally the small volar interosseous artery of the adult (Fig. 155), and the median, uniting with its lower end, takes from it the digital branches and becomes the principal stem of the forearm.
 
 
A third stage is then ushered in by the appearance of a branch from the brachial which forms the arteria ulnaris, and this, passing down the ulnar side of the forearm, unites at the wrist with the median to form a superficial palmar arch from which the digital branches arise. A fourth stage is marked by the diminution of the median artery until it finally appears to be ,a small branch of the interosseous, and at the same time there develops from the brachial, at about the middle of the upper arm, what is known as the arteria radialis superficial (Fig. 155, rs). This extends down the radial side of the forearm, following the course of the radial nerve, and at the wrist passes upon the dorsal surface of the hand to form the
 
 
252
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF ARTERIES OP LIMBS
 
 
dorsal digital arteries of the thumb and index finger. At first this artery takes no part in the formation of the palmar arches, but later it gives rise to the superficial volar branch, which usually unites with the superficial arch, while from its dorsal portion a perforating branch develops which passes between the first and second meta
 
 
 
r
 
 
Fig. 155.  -  Diagrams showing an Early and a Late Stage in the Development
of the Arteries of the Arm.
 
 
b, Brachial; i, interosseous; m, median; r, radial; rs, superficial radial; u, ulnar.
 
 
 
 
carpal bones and unites with a deep branch of the ulnar to form the deep arch. The fifth or adult stage is reached by the development from the brachial below the elbow of a branch (Fig. 155, r) which passes downward and outward to unite with the superficial radial, whereupon the upper portion of that artery degenerates until it is
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF ARTERIES OF LIMBS 253
represented only by a branch to the biceps muscle (Schwalbe), while the lower portion persists as the adult radial.
 
 
The various anomalies seen in the arteries of the forearm are, as a rule, due to the more or less complete persistence of one or other of the stages described above, what is described, for instance, as the high branching of the brachial being the persistence of the superficial radial.
 
 
In the leg there is a noticeable difference in the arrangement of the arteries from what occurs in the arm, in that the principal artery of the thigh, the femoral, does not accompany the principal nerve, the sciatic. This difference is apparently secondary, but, as in the case of the upper limb, it is necessary to rely largely on the facts of comparative anatomy and on anomalies which occur in the human body for an idea of the probable development of the arteries of the lower limb. It has already been seen that the common iliac artery is to be regarded as a lateral branch of the dorsal aorta, and in the simplest condition of the limb arteries its continuation, the anterior division of the hypogastric, passes down the leg as a well-developed sciatic artery as far as the ankle (Fig. 156,5). At the knee it occupies the position of the popliteal of adult anatomy, and below the knee gives off a branch corresponding to the anterior tibial (at) which, passing forward to the extensor surface of the leg, quickly loses itself in the extensor muscles. The main artery continues downward on the interosseous membrane, and some distance above the ankle divides into a strong anterior and a weaker posterior branch; the former perforates the membrane and is continued down the extensor surface of the leg to form the lower part of the anterior tibial and the dorsalis pedis arteries, while the latter, passing upon the plantar surface of the foot, is lost in the plantar muscles. At this stage the external iliac is a secondary branch of the common iliac, being but poorly developed and not extending as far as the knee.
 
 
In the second stage the external iliac artery increases in size until it equals the sciatic, and it now penetrates the adductor magnus muscle and unites with the popliteal portion of the sciatic. Before doing this, however, it gives off a strong branch (sa) which accompanies the long saphenous nerve down the inner side of the leg, and,
 
 
254
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF ARTERIES OE LIMBS
 
 
passing behind the internal malleolus, extends upon the plantar surface of the foot, where it gives rise to the digital branches. From this arrangement the adult condition may be derived by the continued increase in size of the external iliac and its continuation, the femoral (/), accompanied by a reduction of the upper portion of the sciatic and its separation from its popliteal portion (p) to form the inferior gluteal artery of the adult. The continuation of the popli
 
 
n
 
 
i ,°
 
 
 
p
 
 
pe
 
 
 
f
 
 
at
 
 
\s
 
 
P
 
 
pe
 
 
t\
 
 
Pt
 
 
C
 
 
Fig. 156.  -  Diagrams Illustrating Stages in the Development of the Arteries
of the Leg.
 
 
at, Anterior tibial; dp, dorsalis pedis;/, femoral; p, popliteal; pe, peroneal pt, posterior
tibial; s, sciatic (inferior gluteal); sa, saphenous.
 
 
teal down the leg is the peroneal artery (pe) and the upper perforating branch of this unites with the lower one to form a continuous anterior tibial, the lower connection of which with the peroneal persists in part as the anterior peroneal artery. A new branch arises from the upper part of the peroneal and passes down the back of the leg
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM 255
to unite with the lower part of the arteria saphena, forming the posterior tibial artery (pt), and the upper part of the saphenous becomes much reduced, persisting as the superficial branch of the art. genu suprema and a rudimentary chain of anastomoses which accompany the long saphenous nerve.
 
 
The Development of the Venous System.  -  The earliest veins to develop are those which accompany the first-formed arteries, the umbilicals, but it will be more convenient to consider first the veins which carry the blood from the body of the embryo back to the heart. These make their appearance, while the heart is still in the pharyngeal region, as two pairs of longitudinal trunks, the anterior and posterior cardinal veins, into which lateral branches, arranged more or less segmentally, open. The anterior cardinals appear somewhat earlier than the posterior and form the internal jugular veins of adult anatomy. Each vein extends forward from the heart at the side of the notochord and is continued on the under surface of the brain, lying medial to the roots of the cranial nerves. Later sprouts arising from the vein form loops around the nerve roots and the portion of the loops formed by the original vein then disappear, so that the vessel now lies lateral to the nerve roots, except in the case of the trigeminus, where the original vessel persists to form the cavernous sinus. From the vena capitis lateralis so formed three veins, an anterior, a middle and a posterior cerebral, pass to the brain, the anterior cerebral together with the ophthalmic vein opening into the anterior end of the cavernous sinus, the middle cerebral into the posterior extremity of the same sinus and the posterior cerebral into the vena capitis lateralis behind the ear vesicle (Fig. 157). The branches of the anterior cerebral vein extending over the cerebral hemisphere unite with their fellows of the opposite side to form a longitudinal trunk, the superior sagittal sinus, lying between the two cerebral hemispheres. At first this sinus drains by way of the anterior cerebral vein (Fig. 158, A), but as the cerebral hemispheres increase in size it is gradually carried backward and makes connections first with the middle cerebral and later with the posterior cerebral vein (Fig. 158, B and C), each of these becoming in turn the principal
 
 
256
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM
 
 
drainage of the sinus. The connections which join the veins to the sinus become the proximal portion of the transverse sinus, the posterior cerebral vein itself becoming the distal portion, the middle cerebral vein becomes the superior petrosal sinus, while the anterior cerebral vein persists as the middle cerebral vein of adult anatomy
 
 
m vc i vcv
 
 
 
Fig. 157.  -  Reconstruction of the Head of a Human Embryo of 9 mm. showing
the Cerebral Veins. acv, Anterior cerebral vein; au, auditory vesicle; cs, cavernous sinus; fa, facial nerve; mcv, middle cerebral vein; pcv, posterior cerebral vein; tr, trigeminal nerve; vcl, lateral cerebral vein.  -  (Mall.)
 
 
(Fig. 158, C). Additional sprouts from the terminal portion of the superior sagittal sinus give rise to the straight and inferior sagittal sinuses, and, after the disappearacne of the vena capitis lateralis, a new stem develops between the cavernous and transverse sinuses, passing medial to the ear vesicle, and forms the inferior petrosal sinus (Fig. 158, C). This joins the transverse sinus at the jugular
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM
 
 
257
 
 
foramen and from this junction onward the anterior cardinal vein may now be termed the internal jugular vein.
 
 
Passing backward from the jugular foramen the internal jugular veins unite with the posterior cardinals to form on each side a common trunk, the ductus Cuvieri, and then passing transversely toward the median line open into the sides of the sinus venosus. So long as the heart retains its original position in the pharyngeal region the jugular
 
 
 
Fig. 158.  -  Diagrams showing the Arrangement of the Cerebral Veins in Embryos of (A) the Fifth Week, (B) the Beginning of the Third Month and in (C) an Older Fetus.
 
 
acv, Anterior cerebral vein; cs, cavernous sinus; Us, inferior sagittal sinus; Inf. Pet., inferior petrosal sinus; Is, transverse sinus; ov, ophthalmic vein; sis, superior sagittal sinus; sps, spheno-parietal sinus; sr, straight sinus; 55, middle cerebral vein (Sylvian); sup. pet, superior petrosal sinus; th, torcular Herophili; v, trigeminal nerve; vca, anterior cerebral vein; vol. lateral cerebral vein; vcm, middle cerebral vein; vcp, posterior cerebral vein; vg, vein of Galen; vj, internal jugular.  -  (Mall.)
is a short trunk receiving lateral veins only from the uppermost segments of the neck and from the occipital segments, the remaining segmental veins opening into the inferior cardinals. As the heart recedes, however, the jugulars become more and more elongated
17
 
 
2 5 8
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM
 
 
and the cervical lateral veins shift their communication from the cardinals to the jugulars, until, when the subclavians have thus shifted, the jugulars become much larger than the cardinals. When the sinus venosus is absorbed into the wall of the right auricle, the course of the left Cuvierian duct becomes a little longer than that of the right, and from the left jugular, at the point where it is joined by the left subclavian, a branch arises which extends obliquely across to join the right jugular, forming the left innominate vein. When this is established, the connection between the left jugular and Cuvierian duct is dissolved, the blood from the left side of the head and neck and from the left subclavian vein passing over to empty
 
 
 
Fig. 159.  -  Diagrams showing the Development of the Superior Vena Cava. a, Azygos vein; cs, coronary sinus; ej, external jugular; h, hepatic vein; ij, internal jugular; inr and inl, right and left innominate veins; s, subclavian; vci and vcs, inferior and superior venae cava?.
 
 
into the right jugular, whose lower end, togethei with the right Cuvierian duct, thus becomes the superior vena cava. The left Cuvierian duct persists, forming with the left horn of the sinus venosus the coronary sinus (Fig. 159).
 
 
The external jugular vein develops somewhat later than the internal. The facial vein, which primarily forms the principal affluent of this stem, passes at first into the skull along with the fifth nerve and communicates with the internal jugular system, but later
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM 259
this original communication is broken and the facial vein, uniting with other superficial veins, passes over the jaw and extends down the neck as the external jugular. Later still the facial anastomoses with the ophthalmic at the inner angle of the eye and also makes connections with the internal jugular just after it has crossed the jaw, and so the adult condition is acquired.
 
 
It is interesting to note that in many of the lower mammals the external jugular becomes of much greater importance than the internal, the latter in some forms, indeed, eventually disappearing and the blood from the interior of the skull emptying by means of anastomoses which have developed into the external jugular system. In man the primitive condition is retained, but indications of a transference of the intracranial blood to the external jugular are seen in the emissary veins.
 
 
The posterior cardinal veins, or, as they may more simply be termed, the cardinals, extend backward from their union with the jugulars along the sides of the vertebral column, receiving veins from the mesentery and also from the various lateral segmental veins of the neck and trunk regions, with the exception of that of the first cervical segment which opens into the jugular. Later, however, as already described (p. 258), the cervical veins shift to the jugulars, as do also the first and second thoracic (intercostal) veins, but the remaining intercostals, together with the lumbars and sacrals, continue to open into the cardinals. In addition, the cardinals receive in early stages the veins from the primitive kidneys (meson ephros), which are exceptionally large in the human embryo, but when they are replaced later on by the permanent kidneys (metanephros) their afferent veins undergo a reduction in number and size, and this, together with the shifting of the upper lateral veins, produces a marked diminution in the size of the cardinals. The changes by which they acquire their final arrangement are, however, so intimately associated with the development of the inferior vena cava that their description may be conveniently postponed until the history of the vitelline and umbilical veins has been presented.
 
 
The vitelline veins are two in number, a right and a left, and pass in along the yolk-stalk until they reach the embryonic intestine, along the sides of which they pass forward to unite with the corre
 
 
20O
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM
 
 
sponding umbilical veins. These are represented in the bellystalk by a single venous trunk which, when it reaches the body of the embryo, divides into two stems which pass forward, one on each side of the umbilicus, and thence on each side of the median line of the ventral abdominal wall, to form with the corresponding vitelline veins common trunks which open into the ductus Cuvieri. As the liver develops it comes into intimate relation with the vitelline veins, which receive numerous branches from its substance and, indeed, seem to break up into a network (Fig. 160, A) traversing the liver
 
 
DC,
 
 
DC,
 
 
 
DC
 
 
Vus
 
 
Vom.s
 
 
 
Vud.
 
 
 
 
DC
 
 
D.K4
 
 
^drus
 
 
Vorn.s.
 
 
 
 
 
Kl/J.
 
 
 
 
Vamd. Vb.7ns.
 
 
 
 
-Diagrams Illustrating the Transformations of the Vitelline and Umbilical Veins.
 
 
D.C, Ductus Cuvieri; D.V.A, ductus venosus; V.o.m.d and V.o.m.s, right and left vitelline veins; V.u.d and V.u.s, right and left umbilical veins.  -  (Hochstetter.)
 
 
substance and uniting again to form two stems which represent the original continuations of the vitellines. From the point where the common trunk formed by the right vitelline and umbilical veins opens into the Cuvierian duct a new vein develops, passing downward and to the left to unite with the left vitelline; this is the ductus venosus (Fig. 160, B, D.V.A). In the meantime three cross-connections have developed between the two vitelline veins, two of which pass ventral and the other dorsal to the intestine, so that the latter is
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM
 
 
26l
 
 
surrounded by two venous loops (Fig. 161, A), and a connection is developed between each umbilical vein and the corresponding vitelline (Fig. 160, B), that of the left side being the larger and uniting with the vitelline just where it is joined by the ductus venosus so as to seem to be the continuation of this vessel (Fig. 160, C). When these connections are complete, the upper portions of the umbilical veins degenerate (Fig. 161), and now the right side of the lower of the two vitelline loops which surround the intestine disappears, as does also that portion of the left side of the upper loop which intervenes
 
 
 
 
Fig. 161.  -  A, The Venous Trunks of an Embryo of 5 mm. seen from the Ventral Surface; B, Diagram Illustrating the Transformation to the Adult Condition.
 
 
Vcd and Vcs, Right and left superior venae cavae; Vj, jugular vein; V.om, vitelline vein; Vp, vena porta; Vu, umbilical vein (lower part); Vu', umbilical vein (upper part); Vud and Vus, right and left umbilical veins (lower parts).  -  (His.)
between the middle cross-connection and the ductus venosus, and so there is formed from the vitelline veins the vena porta.
 
 
While these changes have been progressing the right umbilical vein, originally the larger of the two (Fig. 160, A and B, V.u.d), has become very much reduced in size and, losing its connection with the left vein at the umbilicus, forms a vein of the ventral abdominal wall in which the blood now flows from above downward. The
 
 
262
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM
 
 
left umbilical now forms the only route for the return of blood from the placenta, and appears to be the direct continuation of the ductus venosus (Fig. 161, C), into which open the hepatic veins, returning the blood distributed by the portal vein to the substance of the liver. Returning now to the posterior cardinal veins, it has been found that in the rabbit the branches which come to them from the mesentery anastomose longitudinally to form a vessel lying parallel and slightly ventral to each cardinal. These may be termed the sub
 
 
 
A £
Fig. 162.  -  Diagrams Illustrating the Development or the Inferior Vena Cava. The cardinal veins and ductus venosus are black, the subcardinal system blue, and the supracardinal yellow, cs, coronary sinus; dv, ductus venosus; il, iliac vein; r, renal; s, internal spermatic; scl, subclavian; sr, suprarenal; va, azygos; vha, hemiazygos; vi, innominate; vj, internal jugular.
 
 
 
 
cardinal veins (Lewis), and in their earliest condition they open at either end into the corresponding cardinal, with which they are also united by numerous cross-branches. Later, in rabbits of 8.8 mm., these cross-branches begin to disappear and give place to a large cross-branch situated immediately below the origin of the superior
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM 263
mesenteric artery, and at the same point a cross-branch between the two subcardinals also develops. The portion of the right subcardial which is anterior to the cross-connection now rapidly enlarges and unites with the ductus venosus about where the hepatic veins open into that vessel (Fig. 162, A), and the portion of each posterior cardinal immediately above the entrance of the renal veins degenerates, so that all the blood received by the posterior portions of the cardinals is returned to the heart by way of the right subcardinal, its cross-connections, and the upper part of the ductus venosus.
 
 
When this is accomplished the lower portions of the subcardinals disappear, while the portions above the large cross-connection persist, greatly diminished in size, as the suprarenal veins (Fig. 162, B).
 
 
In the early stages the veins which drain the posterior abdominal walls empty into the posterior cardinals, and later they form, in the region of the kidney on each side, a longitudinal anastomosis which opens at either extremity into the posterior cardinal. The ureter thus becomes surrounded by a venous ring, the dorsal limb of which is formed by the new longitudinal anastomosis, which has been termed the supracardinal vein (McClure and Huntington), while the ventral limb is formed by a portion of the posterior cardinal (Fig. 162, B). Still later the ventral limb of the loop disappears and the dorsal supracardinal limb replaces a portion of the more primitive posterior cardinal. An anastomosis now develops between the right and left cardinals at the point where the iliac veins open into them (Fig. 162, B), and the portion of the left cardinal which intervenes between this anastomosis and the entrance of the internal spermatic vein disappears, the remainder of it, as far forward as the renal vein, persisting as the upper part of the left internal spermatic vein, which thus comes to open into the renal vein instead of into the vena cava as does the corresponding vein of the right side of the body (Fig. 162, C, s). The renal veins originally open into the cardinals at the point where these are joined by the large crossconnection, and when the lower part of the left cardinal disappears, this cross-connection forms the proximal part of the left renal vein, which consequently receives the left suprarenal (Fig. 162, C).
 
 
 
 
264 DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM
The observations upon which the above description is based have been made upon the rabbit, but it seems probable from the partial observations that have been made that similar changes occur also in the human embryo. It will be noted from what has been said that the inferior vena cava is a composite vessel, consisting of at least four elements: (1) the proximal part of the ductus venosus; (2) the anterior part of the right subcardinal; (3) the right supracardinal; and (4) the posterior part of the right cardinal.
 
 
The complicated development of the inferior vena cava naturally gives rise to numerous anomalies of the vein due to inhibitions of its development. These anomalies affect especially the post-renal portion, a persistence of both cardinals (interpreting the conditions in the terms of what occurs in the rabbit) giving rise to a double post-renal cava, or a persistence of the left cardinal and the disappearance of the right to a vena cava situated on the left side of the vertebral column and crossing to the right by way of the left renal vein. So, too, the occurrence of accessory renal veins passing dorsal to the ureter is explicable on the supposition that they represent portions of the supracardinal system of veins.
 
 
It has already been noted that the portions of the posterior cardinals immediately anterior to the entrance of the renal veins disappear. The upper part of the right vein persists, however, and becomes the vena azygos of the adult, while the upper portion of the left vein sends a cross-branch over to unite with the azygos and then separates from the coronary sinus to form the vena hemiazygos. At least this is what is described as occurring in the rabbit. In the cat, however, only the very uppermost portion of the right posterior cardinal persists and the greater portion of the azygos and perhaps the entire hemiazygos vein is formed from the prerenal portions of the supracardinal veins, the right one joining on to the small persisting upper portion of the right posterior cardinal, while the crossconnection between the hemiazygos and azygos represents one of the originally numerous cross-connections between the supracardinals.
 
 
The ascending lumbar veins, frequently described as the commencements of the azygos veins, are in reality secondary formations developed by the anastomoses of anteriorly and posteriorly directed branches of the lumbar veins,
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE VENOUS SYSTEM 26
 
 
The Development of the veins of the Limbs.  -  The development of the limb veins of the human embryo requires further investigation, but from a comparison of what is known with what has been observed in rabbit embryos it may be presumed that the changes which take place are somewhat as follows : In the anterior extremity the blood brought to the limb is collected by a vein which passes distally along the radial border of the limb bud, around its distal border, and proximally along its ulnar border to open into the anterior cardinal vein; this is the primary ulnar vein. Later a second vein grows out from the external jugular along the radial border of the limb, representing the cephalic vein of the adult, and on its appearance the digital veins, which were formed from the primary ulnar vein, become connected with it, and the distal portion of the primary ulnar vein disappears. Its proximal portion persists, however, to form the basilic vein, from which the brachial vein and its continuation, the ulnar vein, are developed, while the radial vein develops as an outgrowth from the cephalic, which at an early stage secures an opening into the axillary vein, its original communication with the external jugular forming the jugulo-cephalic vein.
 
 
In the lower limb a primary fibular vein, exactly comparable to the primary ulnar of the arm, surrounds the distal border of the limbbud and passes up its fibular border to open with the posterior cardinal vein. The further development in the lower limb differs considerably, however, from that of the upper limb. From the primary fibular vein an anterior tibial vein grows out, which receives the digital branches from the toes, and from the posterior cardinal, anterior to the point where the primary fibular opens into it, a vein grows down the tibial side of the leg, forming the long saphenous vein. From this the femoralvein is formed and from it the posterior tibial vein is continued down the leg. An anastomosis is formed between the femoral and the primary fibular veins at the level of the knee and the proximal portion of the latter vein then becomes greatly reduced, while its distal portion possibly persists as the small saphenous vein (Hochstetter).
 
 
The Pulmonary Veins.  -  The development of the pulmonary veins
 
 
266
 
 
THE FETAL CIRCULATION
 
 
has already been described in connection with the development of the heart (see p. 234).
 
 
The Fetal Circulation.  -  During fetal life while the placenta is the sole organ in which occur the changes in the blood on which the
 
 
 
Fig. 163.  -  The Fetal Circulation. ao, Aorta; a.pu., pulmonary artery; au, umbilical artery; da, ductus arteriosus; dv, ductus venosus; int, intestine; vci and vcs, inferior and superior vena cava; vh, hepatic vein; vp, vena portas; v.pu, pulmonary vein; vu, umbilical vein.  -  (From Kollmann.)
 
 
nutrition of the embryo depends, the course of the blood is necessarily somewhat different from what obtains in the child after birth. Taking the placenta as the starting-point, the blood passes along the
 
 
THE FETAL CIRCULATION 267
umbilical vein to enter the body of the fetus at the umbilicus, whence it passes forward in the free edge of the ventral mesentery (see p. 321) until it reaches the liver. Here, owing to the anastomoses between the umbilical and vitelline veins, a portion of the blood traverses the substance of the liver to open by the hepatic veins into the inferior vena cava, while the remainder passes on through the ductus venosus to the cava, the united streams opening into the right atrium. This blood, whose purity is only slightly reduced by mixture with the blood returning from the inferior vena cava, is prevented from passing into the right ventricle by the Eustachian valve, which directs it to the foramen ovale, and through this it passes into the left atrium, thence to the left ventricle, and so out by the systemic aorta.
 
 
The blood which has been sent to the head, neck, and upper extremities is returned by the superior vena cava also into the right atrium, but this descending stream opens into the atrium to the right of the annulus of Vieussens (see Fig. 141) and passes directly to the right ventricle without mingling to any great extent with the blood returning by way of the inferior cava. From the right ventricle this blood passes out by the pulmonary artery; but the lungs at this period are collapsed and in no condition to receive any great amount of blood, and so the stream passes by way of the ductus arteriosus into the systemic aorta, meeting there the placental blood just below the point where the left subclavian artery is given off. From this point onward the aorta contains only mixed blood, and this is distributed to the walls of the thorax and abdomen and to the lungs and abdominal viscera, the greater part of it, however, passing off in the hypogastric arteries and so out again to the placenta.
 
 
This is the generally accepted account of the fetal circulation and it is based upon the idea that the foramen ovale is practically a connection between the inferior vena cava and the left atrium. If it be correct the right ventricle receives only the blood returning to the heart by the vena cava superior, while the left receives all that returns by the inferior vena cava together with what returns by the pulmonary veins. One would, therefore, expect that the capacity and pressure of the right ventricle would in the fetus be less than those of the left. Pohlman, who has recently investigated the question in embryo pigs, finds, on the contrary, that the capacities and pressures of the two ventricles are equal and
 
 
268 DEVELOPMENT OF THE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM
maintains that the foramen ovale is actually a connection between the two atria. That is to say, he holds that there is an actual mingling of the blood from the two venae cava? in the right atrium, whence the mixed blood passes to the right ventricle, a certain amount of it, however, passing through the foramen ovale and so to the left ventricle to equalize the deficiency that would otherwise exist in that chamber owing to the small amount of blood returning by the pulmonary veins. According to this view there would be no difference in the quality of the blood distributed to different portions of the body, such as is provided for by the current theory; all the blood leaving the heart would be mixed blood and in favor of this view is the fact that starch granules injected into either the superior or the inferior vena cava in living pig embryos were in all cases recovered from both sides of the heart.
 
 
At birth the lungs at once assume their functions, and on the cutting of the umbilical cord all communication with the placenta ceases. Shortly after birth the foramen ovale closes more or less perfectly, and the ductus arteriosus diminishes in size as the pulmonary arteries increase and becomes eventually converted into a fibrous cord. The hypogastric arteries diminish greatly, and after they have passed the bladder are also reduced to fibrous cords, a fate likewise shared by the umbilical vein, which becomes converted into the round ligament of the liver.
 
 
The Development of the Lymphatic System.  -  Concerning the development of the lymphatic system two discordant views exist, one (Sabin, Lewis) regarding it in its entirety as a direct development from the venous system, while the other (Huntington, McClure) recognizes for it a dual origin, a portion being derived directly from the venous system and the rest from a series of mesenchymal spaces developing in relation to veins but quite unconnected with them.
 
 
The portion of the system concerning which harmony prevails is that which forms the connection with the venous system in the adult and constitutes what in the embryo is termed the jugular lymph sac. In the early stages of development a capillary network extends along the line of the jugular veins, communicating with them at various points. In embryos of 10 mm. a portion of this network, on either side of the body, becomes completely separated
 
 
bEVELOPMENT OF THE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM
 
 
269
 
 
from the jugular and gives rise to a number of closed cavities lined with endothelium and situated in the neighborhood of the junction of the primary ulnar and cephalic veins with the jugular. In
 
 
 
 
Fig. 164.  -  Diagrams showing the Arrangement of the Lymphatic Vessels in Pig Embryos of (4) 20 mm. and (B) 40 mm. ACV, Jugular vein; ADR, suprarenal body; ALU, jugular lymph sac; Ao, aorta Arm D, deep lymphatics to the arm; D, diaphragm; Du, branches to duodenum FV, femoral vein; H, branches to heart; K, kidney; LegD, deep lymphatics to leg Lu, branches to lung; MP, branches to mesenteric plexus; CE, branch to oesophagus PCV, cardinal vein: PLH, posterior lymph sac; RC, cisterna chyli; RLD, right lymphatic duct; ScV, subclavian vein; SV, sciatic vein; St, branches to stomach; TD, thoracic duct; WB. Wolffian body.  -  (Sdbin.)
later stages these cavities enlarge and unite to form a large sac, the jugular lymph sac (Fig. 164, ALU), and this, still later, makes a
 
 
270 DEVELOPMENT OF THE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM
new connection with the jugular, the opening being guarded by a valve. This communication becomes the adult communication of the thoracic duct or right lymphatic duct with the venous system, but the sac itself, as development proceeds, becomes divided into smaller portions and gives rise to a number of lymph nodes.
 
 
A similar pair of lymph sacs also develop in relation to the sciatic vein, but their exact mode of origin is uncertain. In embryos of 20 mm. venous plexuses, similar to the jugular plexuses of younger stages, are found accompanying the sciatic veins, and a little later there are found in the same region a pair of posterior or sciatic lymph sacs (Fig. 164, PLH), which, like the jugular sacs, later give rise to a series of lymph nodes. At about the same stage of development & retroperitoneal sac (Fig. 165, Lsr) is also formed in the root of the mesentery cranial to the origin of the superior mesenteric artery, and this, too, later gives rise to a plexus of lymphatic vessels in connection with which the mesenteric lymphatic nodes develop. This last sac is much more pronounced in the pig embryo than in man, and in that form it has been found to have its origin from a capillary network that separates from the renal veins (Baetjer).
 
 
There are thus formed five sacs, all of which are associated with the formation of groups of lymphatic nodes, and in the case of one pair at least it is agreed that they are directly developed from venous capillaries. It is in connection with the remaining sac and especially with the formation of the thoracic duct and the peripheral lymphatics that the want of harmony referred to above occurs. The first portion of the thoracic duct to appear is the cisterna chyli, which is found in embryos of 23 mm. in the region of the third and fourth lumbar segments, in close proximity to the vena cava (Fig. 165, Cc). After its appearance the rest of the thoracic duct develops quickly, it being completely formed in embryos of 30 mm., and it is interesting to note that at this stage the duct is paired in its caudal portion, two trunks passing forward from the cisterna chyli, the right one passing behind the aorta and uniting with the left after it has entered the thorax.
 
 
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM
 
 
271
 
 
The mode of origin of the duct has not yet been made out in human embryos. In the pig and rabbit isolated spaces lined with endothelium occur along the course of the duct, but without communicating with it, and the fact that some of these showed connection with the neighboring azygos veins gave basis for the view that they were the remains of a venous capillary plexus from which the duct had developed. It is possible, however, that the duct is formed
 
 
 
T Fig. 165.  -  Diagram of the Posterior Portion of the Body of a Human Embryo of 23 mm., showing the Relations of the Retroperitoneal Lymph Sac and the Cisterna Chyli to the Veins.
 
 
Am, Superior mesenteric artery; Ao, aorta; Cc, cisterna chyli; Isr, retroperitoneal lymph sac; S, suprarenal body; Va, vena azygos; Vci, vena cava inferior; vl u first lumbar vertebra; vs u first sacral vertebra.  -  (After Sabin.)
by the union of outgrowths from the cisterna chyli and jugular sac, in which case it would also be a derivative of the venous system, provided that the cisterna chyli is formed in the same way as the jugular sac. Huntington and McClure, however, maintain that it
 
 
272
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM
 
 
is formed by the fusion of spaces appearing in the mesenchyme immediately external to the intima of degenerating veins; hence the spaces are termed extraintimal spaces. These at first have no endothelial lining and they are never in connection with the lumina of the veins. They are perfectly independent structures and any connections they may«nake with the venous system are entirely secondary. This mode of origin from extraintimal spaces is not
confined to the thoracic duct, according to the authors mentioned, but is the method of development of all parts of the lymphatic system, with the exception of the jugular sacs. According to the supporters of the direct venous origin the peripheral lymphatic stems develop, like blood-vessels, as outgrowths from the stems already present.
 
 
Lymph nodes nave not been observed in human embryos until toward the end of the third month of development, but ' ! .<l'-V''\LY. they appear in pig embryos of 3 cm. X^Hi^. Their unit of structure is a blood-vessel, breaking up at its termination into a leash of capillaries, around which a condensation of lymphocytes occurs in the mesenchyme. A structure of this kind forms what is termed a lymphoid follicle and may exist, even in this simple condition, in the adult. More frequently, however, there are associated with the follicle lymphatic vessels, or rather the follicle develops in a network of lymphatic vessels, which, become an investment of the follicle and form with it a simple lymph node (Fig. 166). This condition is, however, in many cases but transitory, the artery branching and collections of lymphoid tissue forming around each of the branches, so that a series of follicles are formed, which, together with the surrounding lymphatic vessels, become enclosed by a connective-tissue capsule to
 
 
 
Fig. 166. -  Diagram of a Primary Lymph Node of an Embryo Pig of 8 cm. a, Artery; aid, afferent lymph duct; eld, efferent lymph duct; /, follicle.  -  (Sabin.)
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE LYMPHATIC SYSTEM
 
 
273
 
 
form a compound lymph node. Later trabecular of connective tissue extend from the capsule toward the center of the node, between the follicles, the lymphatic network gives rise to peripheral and central lymph sinuses, and the follicles, each with its arterial branch, constitute the peripheral nodules and the medullary cords, the portions of these immediately surrounding the leash of capillaries into which
 
 
 
 
 
 
tt- be
 
 
Fig. 167.  -  Developing H^emolymph Node.
 
 
be, central blood-vessel; bh, blood-vessel at hilus; ps, peripheral blood sinus.  -  (Sabin
from Morris' Human Anatomy.)
 
 
the artery dissolves, constituting the so-called germ centers in which multiplication of the lymphocytes occurs.
 
 
In various portions of the body, but especially along the root of
the mesentery, what are termed hcemolymph nodes occur. In these
the lymph sinus is replaced by a blood sinus, but with this exception
their structure resembles that of an ordinary lymph node, a simple
18
 
 
274 DEVELOPMENT OF THE SPLEEN
one consisting of a follicle, composed of adenoid tissue with a central blood-vessel, and a peripheral blood sinus (Fig. 167).
 
 
The Development of the Spleen.  -  Recent studies (Mall) have shown that the spleen may well be regarded as possessing a structure comparable to that of the lymph nodes, the pulp being more or less distinctly divided by trabecular into areas termed pulp cords, the axis of each of which is occupied by a twig of the splenic artery. The spleen, therefore, seems to fall into the same category of organs as the lymph and hsemolymph nodes, differing from these chiefly in the absence of sinuses. It has generally been regarded as a development of the mesenchyme situated between the two layers of the mesogastrium. To this view, however, recent observers have taken exception, holding that the ultimate origin of the organ is in part or entirely from the ccelomic epithelium of the left layer of the mesogastrium. The first indication of the spleen has been observed in embryos of the fifth week as a slight elevation on the left (dorsal) surface of the mesogastrium, due to a local thickening and vascularization of the mesenchyme, accompanied by a thickening of the ccelomic epithelium which covers the elevation. The mesenchyme thickening presents no differences from the neighboring mesenchyme, but the epithelium is not distinctly separated from it over its entire surface, as it is elsewhere in the mesentery. In later stages, which have been observed in detail in pig and other amniote embryos, cells separate from the deeper layers of the epithelium (Fig. 168) and pass into the mesenchyme thickening, whose tissue soon assumes a different appearance from the surrounding mesenchyme by its cells being much crowded. This migration soon' Ceases, however, and in embryos of forty-two days the ccelomic epithelium covering the thickening is reduced to a simple layer of cells.
 
 
The later stages of development consist of an enlargement of the thickening and its gradual constriction from the surface of the mesogastrium, until it is finally united to it only by a narrow band through which the large splenic vessels gain access to the organ The cells differentiate themselves into trabecular and pulp cords
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE SPLEEN
 
 
7d
 
 
special collections of lymphoid cells around the branches of the splenic artery forming the Malpighian corpuscles.
 
 
It has already been pointed out (p. 225) that during embryonic life the spleen is an important haematopoietic organ, both red and white corpuscles undergoing active formation within its substance. The Malpighian corpuscles are collections of lymphocytes in which multiplication takes place, and while nothing is as yet known as to the fate of the cells which are contributed to the spleen from the ccelomic epithelium, since they quickly come to resemble the mesenchyme cells with which they are associated, yet the growing number of observations indicating an epithelial origin for lymphocytes suggests the possibility that the cells in question may be responsible for the first leukocytes of the spleen.
 
 
 
 
" ' . .
 
 
 
 
ms
 
 
Fig. 168.  -  Section through the Left Layer of the Mesogastrium of a Chick
Embryo of Ninety-three Hours, Showing the Origin of the Spleen.
 
 
ep, Ccelomic epithelium; ms, mesenchyme.  -  (Tonkoff.)
The Coccygeal or Luschka's Ganglion.  -  In embryos of about 15 cm. there is to be found on the ventral surface of the apex of the coccyx a small oval group of polygonal cells, clearly separated from the surrounding tissue by a mesenchymal capsule. Later, connective-tissue trabecular make their way into the mass, which thus becomes divided into lobules, and, at the same time, a rich vascular supply, derived principally from branches of the middle sacral artery, penetrates the body, which thus assumes the adult condition in which it presents a general resemblance to a group of lymph follicles.
 
 
It has generally been supposed that the coccygeal ganglion was in part derived from the sympathetic nervous system and belonged to the same group of organs as the suprarenal bodies. The most recent
 
 
276 LITERATURE
work on its development (Stoerk) tends, however, to disprove this view, and the ganglion seems accordingly to find its place among the lymphoid organs.
 
 
LITERATURE.
 
 
W. A. Baetjer: "On the Origin of the Mesenteric Sac and the Thoracic Duct in the
Embryo Pig," Amer. Journ. Anat., vin, 1908. E. van Beneden and C. Julln: "Recherches sur la formation des annexes fcetales
chez les mammiferes," Archives de Biolog., v, 1884. A. C. Bernays: " Entwickehingsgeschichte der Atrioventricularklappen," Morphol.
 
 
Jahrbuch, 11, 1876. G. Born: "Beitrage zur Entwicklungsgeschichte des Saugethierherzens," Archiv
fiir mikrosk. Anat., xxxiii, 1889. J. L. Bremer: " On the Origin of the Pulmonary Arteries in Mammals," Anat. Record,
in, 1909. I. Broman: "Ueber die Entwicklung, Wanderung und Variation der Bauchaorten
zweige bei den Wirbeltiere," Ergeb. Anat. und Entwick., xvi, 1906. I. Broman: " Ueber die Entwicklung und "Wanderung" der Zweige der aorta abdom
inalis beim Menschen," Anat. Hefte, XXXVI, 1908. E. E. Butterfield: "Ueber die ungranulierte Vorstufen der Myelocyten und ihre
Bildung in Milz, Leber und Lymphdriisen," Deutsch. Arch. f. klin. Med., xcn,
1908.
 
 
E. R. Clark: " Observations on Living Growing Lymphatics in the Tail of the Frog
Larva," Anat. Record, in, 1909.
 
 
C. B. Coulter: "The Early Development of the Aortic Arches of the Cat, with
Especial Reference to the Presence of a Fifth Arch." Anat. Record, III, 1909.
 
 
D . M. Davis: " Studies on the Chief Veins in Early Pig Embryos and the Origin of the
Vena Cava Inferior," Amer. Journ. Anat., x, 1910. J. Disse: "Die Entstehung des B lutes und der ersten Gefasse im Huhnerei," Archiv
fiir mikrosk. Anat., xvi, 1879. A. C. F. Eternod: "Premiers stades de la circulation sanguine dans l'ceuf et Pembryon
humain," Anat. Anzeiger, xv, 1899. H. M. Evans: "On the Development of the Aortae, Cardinal and Umbilical Veins,
and the other Blood-vessels of Vertebrate Embryos from Capillaries," Anat.
 
 
Record, in, 1909. V. Federow: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Lungenvene," Anat. Hefte, xl, 1910. W. Felix: " Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Rumpfarterien des menschlichen Embryo,"
Morphol. Jahrb., xli, 1910. G. J. Heuer: "The Development of the Lymphatics in the Small Intestine of the
Pig," Amer. Journ. Anat., ix, 1909. W. His: "Anatomie menschlicher Embryonen," Leipzig, 1880-1882.
 
 
F. Hochstetter: "Ueber die ursprungliche Hauptschlagader der hinteren Gliedmasse
des Menschen und der Saugethiere, nebst Bemerkungen iiber die Entwicklung der Endaste der Aorta abdominalis," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xvi, 1890.
 
 
 
 
LITERATURE 277
F. Hochstetter: "Ueber die Entwicklung der A. vertebralis beim Kaninchen, nebst Bemerkungen uber die Entstehung der Ansa Vieusseni," Morphol. Jahrbuch, XVI, 1890.
 
 
F. Hochstetter: "Beitrage zur Entwicklungsgeschichte des Venensystems der
Amnioten." Morphol. Jahrbuch, xx, 1893. W. H. Howell: "The Life-history of the Formed Elements of the Blood, Especially
the Red Blood-corpuscles," Journ. of Morphol., iv, 1890. W. H. Howell: "Observations on the Occurrence, Structure, and Function of the
Giant-cells of the Marrow," Journ. of M or ph., rv, 1890.
 
 
G. S. Huntington: "The Genetic Principles of the Development of the Systemic
Lymphatic Vessels in the Mammalian Embryo," Anal. Record, iv, 1910. G. S. Huntington: "The Anatomy and Development of the Systemic Lymphatic
Vessels of the Domestic Cat," Memoirs of Wistar Institute, 1, 1912. G. S. Huntington and C. F. W. McClure: "Development of Post-cava and Tributaries in the Domestic Cat," Amer. Journ. Anat., vi, 1907. G. S. Huntington and C. F. W. McClure: "The Development of the Main Lymph
Channels of the Cat in their Relations to the Venous System," Amer. Journ
Anat., vi, 1907. G. S. Huntington and C. F. W. MtjClure: "The Anatomy and Development of
the Jugular Lymph Sacs in the Domestic Cat," Amer. Journ. Anat., x, 1910. H. E. Jordan: "A Microscopical Study of the Umbilical Vesical of a 13 mm. Human
Embryo, with Special Reference to the Entodermal Tubules and the Blood
Islands," Anat. Anzeiger, xxxvn, 1910. C. A. Kling: "Studien uber die Entwicklung der Lymphdriisen beim Menschen,"
Archiv.fiir mikrosk. Anal., lxiii, 1904. H. Lehmann: " On the Embryonic History of the Aortic Arches in Mammals," Anat.
 
 
Anzeiger, xxvi, 1905. F. T. Lewis: "The Development of the Vena Cava Inferior," Amer. Journ. of Anat.,
1, 1902. F. T. Lewis: "The Development of the Veins in the Limbs of Rabbit Embryos."
Amer. Journ. Anat., v, 1906. F. T. Lewis: "The Development of the Lymphatic System in Rabbits," Amer. Journ.
 
 
Anat., v, 1906. F. T. Lewis: "On the Cervical Veins and Lymphatics in Four Human Embryos,"
Amer. Journ. Anat., ix, 1909. F. T. Lewis: "The First Lymph Glands in Rabbit and Human Embryos," Anat.
 
 
Record, in, 1909. W. A. Locy: "The Fifth and Sixth Aortic Arches in Chick Embryos, with Comments
on the Condition of the same Vessels in other Vertebrates," Anat. Anzeiger
xxix, 1906. F. P. Mall: "Development of the Internal Mammary and Deep Epigastric Arteries
in Man," Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, 1898. F. P. Mall: "On the Developmennt of the Blood-vessels of the Brain in the Human
Embryo," Amer. Journ. Anat., iv, 1905. A. Maximow: " Untersuchungen liber Blut und Bindegewebe," Arch, fur mikr. Anat.,
Lxxni, 1909; lxxiv, 1909; lxxvi, 1910.
 
 
 
 
278 LITERATURE
C. F. W. McClure: "The Development of the Thoracic and Right Lymphatic Ducts
in the Domestic Cat (Felis Domestica)," Anat. Anzeiger, xxxii, 1908. C. F. W. McClure: " The Extra-intimal Theory of the Development of the Mesenteric
Lymphatics in the Domestic Cat," Verhandl. Anat. Gesellsch., xxiv, 1910. C. S. Minot: "On a Hitherto Unrecognized Form of Blood Circulation without
Capillaries in the Organs of Vertebrata," Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., xxix, 1900. S. Molleer: "Die Blutbildung in der Embryonalen Leber des Menschen und der
Saugetiere," Arch.filr mikrosk. Anat., Lxxrv, 1909. A. G. Pohlman: "The Course of the Blood through the Fetal Mammalian Heart,"
Anat. Record, n, 1908. F. Reagan: "The Fifth Aortic Arch of Mammalian Embryos." Amer. Journ. Anat...
 
 
xii, 1912.
 
 
E. Retterer: "Sur la part que prend 1' epithelium a la formation de la bourse de
Fabricius, des amygdales et des plaques de Peyer," Journ. de I' Anat. et de la
Physiol., xxix, 1893. R. Retzer: "Some Results of Recent Investigations on the Mammalian Heart,"
Anat. Record, 11, 1908. C. Rose: "Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte des Saugethierherzens," Morphol. Jahrbuch,
xv, 1889. Florence R. Sabln: "On the Origin of the Lymphatic System from the Veins and
the Development of the Lymph Hearts and Thoracic Duct in the Pig," Amer.
 
 
Journ. of Anat., I, 1902. Florence R. Sabin: "The Development of the Lymphatic Nodes in the Pig and
their Relation to the Lymph Hearts," Amer. Journ. Anat., rv, 1905. Florence R. Sabin: "Further Evidence on the Origin of the Lymphatic Endothelium
from the Endothelium of the Blood Vascular System," Anat. Record, 11, 1908. Florence R. Sabin: On the Development of the Lymphatic System in Human > Embryos with a Consideration of the Morphology of the System as a Whole,"
Amer. Journ. Anat., ix, 1909. Florence R. Sabin: "A Critical Study of the Evidence Presented in Several Recent
Articles on the Development of the Lymphatic System," Anat. Record, v, 1911.
 
 
F. Saxer: "Ueber die Entwicklung und der Bau normaler Lymphdrusen und die
Entsehung der roten und weissen Blutkorperchen," Anat. Hefte, vi, 1896. H. Schridde: "Die Entstehung der ersten embryonalen Blutzellen des Menschen,"
Folia hcematol, rv, 1907. P. Stohr: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Darmlymphknotchen und iiber die Riick
bildung von Darmdrusen," Archiv fur mikrosk. Anat., LI, 1898. O. van der Stricht: " Nouvelles recherches sur la genese des globules rouges et des
globules blancs du sang," Archives de Biolog., xn, 1892. O. van der Stricht: "De la premiere origine du sang et des capillaires sanguins dans
l'aire vasculaire du Lapin," Comptes Rendus de la Soc. de Biolog. Paris, -Ser. 10,
11, 1895. O. Stoerk: "Ueber die Chromreaktion der Glandula coccygea und die Beziehung,
dieser Druse zum Nervus sympathicus," Arch, fur mikroskop. Anat., lxix, 1906. J. Tandler: "Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Kopfarterien bei den Mammalia."
Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxx, 1902.
 
 
 
 
LITERATURE 279
J. Tandler: "Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der menschlichen Darmarterien," Anat.
 
 
Hefte, xxiii, 1903. J. Tandler: " Ueber die Varietaten der arteria coeliaca und deren Entwicklung," Anat.
 
 
Hefte, xxv, 1904. J. Tandler: " Ueber die Entwicklung des fiinften Aortenbogens und der fiinften
Schlundtasche beim Menschen," Anat. Hefte, xxxvin, 1909. W. Tonkoff: " Die Entwickelung der Milz bei den Amnioten," Arch, fiir mikrosk.
 
 
Anat., lvi, 1900. Bertha de Vriese: "Recherches sur revolution des vaissaux sanguins des membres
chez l'homme," Archives de Biolog., xvili, 1902. F. Weidenreich: "Die roten Blutkorperchen," Ergeb. Anat. und Entwick., xiii, 1903
xiv, 1904. F. Weidenreich: "Die Leucocyten und verwandte zellformen," Ergeb. Anat. und;
Entwick., xvi, 191 1. J. H. Wright: "The Histogenesis of the Blood Platelets," Journ. of Morph., xxr, 1910.
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER X.
 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE DIGESTIVE TRACT AND GLANDS.
 
 
The greatest portion of the digestive tract is formed by the constriction off of the dorsal portion of the yolk-sac, as shown in Fig. 52, the result being the formation of a cylinder, closed at either end, and composed of a layer of splanchnic mesoderm lined on its inner surface by endoderm. This cylinder is termed archenteron and has connected with it the yolk-stalk and the allantois, the latter communicating with its somewhat dilated terminal portion, which also receives the ducts of the primitive kidneys and is known as the cloaca (Fig. 170).
 
 
At a very early stage of development the anterior end of the embryo begins to project slightly in front of the yolk-sac, so that a shallow depression is formed between the two structures. As the constriction of the embryo from the sac proceeds, the anterior portion of the brain becomes bent ventrally and the heart makes its appearance immediately in front of the anterior surface of the yolk-sac, and so the depression mentioned above becomes deepened (Fig. 169) to form the oral sinus. The floor of this, lined by ectoderm, is immediately opposite the anterior end of the archenteron, and, since mesoderm does not develop in this region, the ectoderm of the sinus and the endoderm of the archenteron are directly in contact, forming a thin pharyngeal membrane separating the two cavities (Fig. 169, pm) In embryos of 2.15 mm. this membrane is still existent, but soon after it becomes perforated and finally disappears, so that the archenteron and oral sinus become continuous.
 
 
Toward its posterior end trr; archenteron comes into somewhat similar relations with the ectoderm, though a marked difference is noticeable in that the area over which the cloacal endoderm is in
280
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE DIGESTIVE TRACT
 
 
281
 
 
O-A
 
 
contact with the ectoderm to form the cloacal membrane (Fig. 170, cm) lies a little in front of the actual end of the archenteric cylinder, the portion of the latter which lies posterior to the membrane forming what has been termed the postanal gut (p. an). This diminishes in size during development and early disappears altogether, and the pouch-like fold seen in Fig. 170 between the intestinal portion of the archenteron and the allantoic stalk (al) deepening until its floor comes into contact with the cloacal membrane, the cloaca becomes divided into a ventral portion, with which the allantois and the primitive excretory ducts (w) are connected, and a dorsal portion which becomes the lower end of the rectum. This latter abuts upon the dorsal portion of the cloacal membrane, and this eventually ruptures, so that the posterior communication of the archenteron with the exterior becomes established. This rupture, however, does not occur until a comparatively late period of development, until after the embryo has reached the fetal stage; nor does the position of the membrane correspond with the adult anus, since later there is a considerable development of mesoderm around the mouth of the cloaca, bulging out, as it were, the surrounding ectoderm, more especially anteriorly where it forms the large genital tubercle (see Chapter XIII), and posteriorly where it produces the anal tubercle. This appears as a rounded elevation on each side of the median line, immediately behind the cloacal membrane and separated from the root of the caudal projection by a depression, the precaudal recess. Later the two elevations unite across the median line to form a transverse ridge, the ends of which curve
 
 
 
Fig. 169.  -  Reconstruction of the Anterior Portion of an Embryo of 2.15
MM.
 
 
ab. Aortic bulb; h, heart; 0, auditory capsule; op, optic evagination;/>?w, pharyngeal membrane.  -  (His.)
 
 
282
 
 
DIGESTIVE TRACT AND GLANDS
 
 
forward and eventually meet in front of the original anal orifice. From the mesoderm of the circular elevation thus produced the external sphincter ani muscle is formed, and it would seem that so much of the lower end of the rectum as corresponds to this muscle is formed by the inner surface of the elevation and is therefore ectodermal. The definitive anus being at the end of this terminal portion of the gut is therefore some distance away from the position of the original cloacal membrane.
 
 
 
 
 
nc
 
 
Fig. 170.  -  Reconstruction of the Hind End of an Embryo 6.5 mm. Long
al, Allantois; b, belly-stalk; cl, cloaca; cm, cloacal membrane; i, intestine; n, spinal cord; nc, notochord; p.an, postanal gut; ur, outgrowth to form ureter and metanephros; w, Wolffian duct.  -  (Keibel.)
 
 
It will be noticed that the digestive tract thus formed consists of three distinct portions, an anterior, short, ectodermal portion, an endodermal portion representing the original archenteron, and a posterior short portion which is also ectodermal. The differentiation of the tract into its various regions and the formation of the various organs found in relation with these may now be considered.
 
 
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE MOUTH REGIONS 283
The Development of the Mouth Region.  -  The deepening of the oral sinus by the development of the first branchial arch and its separation into the oral and nasal cavities by the development of the palate have already been described (p. 99), but, for the sake of continuity in description, the latter process may be briefly recalled. At first the nasal pits communicate with the oral sinus by grooves lying one on each side of the fronto-nasal process, but by the union of the latter, through its processus globularis, with the maxillary processes these communications are interrupted and the floors of the nasal pits are separated from the oral cavity by thin bucco-nasal membranes, formed of the nasal epithelium in contact with that of the oral cavity. In embryos of about 15 mm. these membranes break through and disappear, and the nasal and oral cavities are again in communication, but the communications are now behind the maxillary processes and constitute what are termed the primitive choance. The oral cavity at this stage does not, however, correspond with the adult mouth cavity, since there is as yet no palate, the roof of the oral cavity being the base of the skull. From the maxillopalatine portions of the upper jaw, shelf-like ridges begin to grow, being at first directed downward so that their surfaces are parallel with the sides of the tongue, which projects up between them. Later, however, they become bent upward to a horizontal position (Fig. 171) and eventually meet in the median line to form the palate, separating the nasal cavities from the mouth cavity. All that portion of the original oral cavity which lies behind the posterior edge of the palatal shelf is now known as the pharynx, the boundary between this and the mouth cavity being emphasized by the prolongation backward and downward of the posterior angles of the palatal shelf as ridges, which form the pharyn go -palatine arches (posterior pillars of the fauces) . The nasal cavities now communicate with the upper part of the pharynx (naso-pharynx) by the posterior choanae. The palatal processes are entirely derived from the maxillary processes, the premaxillary portion of the upper jaw, which is a derivative of the fronto-nasal processes, not taking part in their formation/ Consequently a gap exists between the palatal
 
 
284
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OE THE MOUTH REGIONS
 
 
shelves and the premaxillae for a time, by which the nasal and mouth cavities communicate; it places the organ of Jacobson (see p. 429) in communication with the mouth cavity and may persist until after birth. Later it becomes closed over by mucous membrane, but may be recognized in the dried skull as the foramen incisivum (anterior palatine canal).
 
 
Occasionally there is a failure of the union of the palatal plates, the condition known as cleft palate resulting. The inhibition of development which brings about this condition may take place at different stages, but frequently it occurs while the plates still have an almost vertical direction. Typically cleft palate is a deficiency in the median line of the roof of the
 
 
 
Fig. 171.  -  View of the Roof of the Oral Fossa of Embryo showing the Lipgroove and the Formation of the Palate.  -  (His.)
mouth, not affecting the upper jaw, but very frequently it is combined with the defect which produces hare-lip (see p. 100), in which case the cleft may be continued through the upper jaw between its maxillary and premaxillary portions on either or both sides, according to the extent of the defect.
 
 
At about the fifth week of development a downgrowth of epithelium into the substance of both the maxillary and fronto-nasal processes above and the mandibular process below takes place, and the surface of the downgrowth becomes marked by a deepening groove (Fig. 171), which separates an anterior fold, the Up, from the jaw proper (Fig. 172). Mention should also be made of the
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE TEETH 2S5
fact that at an early stage of development a pouch is formed in the median line of the roof of the oral sinus, just in front of the pharyngeal membrane, by an outgrowth of the epithelium. This pouch, known as Rathke's pouch, comes in contact above with a downgrowth from the floor of the brain and forms with it the pituitary body (seep. 399).
 
 
The Development of the Teeth.  -  When the epithelial downgrowth which gives rise to the lip groove is formed, a horizontal outgrowth develops from it which extends backward into the substance of the jaw, forming what is termed the dental shelf (Fig. 172, A). This at first is situated on the anterior surface of the jaw, but with the continued development of the lip fold it is gradually shifted until it comes to lie upon the free surface (Fig. 172, B), where its superficial edge is marked by a distinct groove, the dental groove (Fig. 171). At first the dental shelf of each jaw is a continuous plate of cells, uniform in thickness throughout its entire width, but later ten thickenings develop upon its deep edge, and beneath each of these the mesoderm condenses to form a dental papilla, over the surface of which the thickening moulds itself to form a cap, termed the enamel organ (Fig. 172, B). These ten papillae in each jaw, with their enamel caps, represent the teeth of the first dentition.
 
 
The papillae do not, however, project into the very edge of the dental shelf, but obliquely into what, in the lower jaw, was originally its under surface (Fig. 172, B), so that the edge of the shelf is free to grow still deeper into the surface of the jaw. This it does, and upon the extension so formed there is developed in each jaw a second set of thickenings, beneath each of which a dental papilla again appears. These tooth-germs represent the incisors, canines, and premolars of the permanent dentition. The lateral edges of the dental shelf being continued outward toward the articulations of the jaws as prolongations which are not connected with the surface epithelium, opportunity is afforded for the development of three additional thickenings on each side in each jaw, and, papillae developing beneath these, twelve additional tooth-germs are formed. These represent the permanent molars; their formation is much
 
 
286
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE TEETH
 
 
later than that of the other teeth, the germ of the second molar not appearing until about the sixth week after birth, while that of the third is delayed until about the fifth year.
 
 
As the tooth-germs increase in size, they approach nearer and nearer to the surface of the jaw, and at the same time the enamel organs separate from the dental shelf until their connection with it is a mere neck of epithelial cells. In the meantime the dental shelf itself has been undergoing degeneration and is reduced to a reticulum
 
 
 
 
 
W'- : ^^^^^0^ :i '
 
 
Mill
 
 
3
 
 
Fig. 172.  -  Transverse Sections through the Lower Jaw showing the Formation of the Dental Shelf in Embryos of (A) 17 mm. and (B) 40 mm.  -  (Rose.)
which eventually completely disappears, though fragments of it may occasionally persist and give rise to various malformations. With the disappearance of the last remains of the shelf, the various toothgerms naturally lose all connection with one another.
 
 
It will be seen, from what has been said, that each tooth-germ consists of two portions, one of which, the enamel organ, is derived from the ectoderm, while the other, the dental papilla, is mesen
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE TEETH 287
chymatous. Each of these gives rise to a definite portion of the fully formed tooth, the enamel organ, as its name indicates, producing the enamel, while from the dental papilla the dentine and pulp are formed.
 
 
The cells of the enamel organ which are in contact with the surface of the papilla, at an early stage assume a cylindrical form and become arranged in a definite layer, the enamel membrane (Fig. 173, SEi), while the remaining cells (SEa) apparently degenerate eventually, though they persist for a time to form what has been termed the enamel pulp. The formation of the enamel seems to be due to the direct transformation of the enamel cells, the process beginning at the basal portion of each cell, and as a result, the enamel consists of a series of prisms, each of which represents one of the cells of the enamel membrane. The transformation proceeds until the cells have become completely converted into enamel prisms, except at their very tips, which form a thin membrane, the enamel cuticle, which is shed soon after the eruption of the teeth.
 
 
The dental papillae are at first composed of a closely packed mass of mesenchyme cells, which later become differentiated into connective tissue into which blood-vessels and nerves penetrate. The superficial cells form a more or less definite layer (Fig. 173, od), and are termed odontoblasts, having the function of manufacturing the dentine. This they accomplish in the same manner as that in which the periosteal osteoblasts produce bone, depositing the dentine between their surfaces and the adjacent surface of the enamel. The outer surface of each odontoblast is drawn out into a number of exceedingly fine processes which extend into the dentine to occupy the minute dentinal tubules, just as processes of the osteoblasts occupy the canaliculi of bone.
 
 
At an early stage the enamel membrane forms an almost complete investment for the dental papilla (Fig. 173), but as the ossification of the tooth proceeds, it recedes from the lower part, until finally it is confined entirely to the crown. The dentine forming the roots of the tooth then becomes enclosed in a layer of cement, which is true bone and serves to unite the tooth firmly to the walls of its
 
 
288
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE TEETH
 
 
socket. As the tooth increases in size, its extremity is brought nearer to the surface of the gum and eventually breaks through, the eruption of the first teeth usually taking place during the last half of the first year after birth. The growth of the permanent teeth
 
 
-£p.
 
 
 
 
 
-Od.
 
 
 
 
Fig. 173.  -  Section through the First Molar Tooth of a Rat, Twelve Days Old. Ap, Periosteum; E, dentine; Ep, epidermis; Od, odontoblasts; S, enamel; SEa and SEi, outer and inner layers of the enamel organ; SE, portion of the enamel organ which does not produce enamel.  -  (von Brunn.)
 
 
proceeds slowly at first, but later it becomes more rapid and produces pressure upon the roots of the primary teeth. These roots then undergo partial absorption, and the teeth are thus loosened
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE TONGUE 289
in their sockets and are readily- pushed out by the further growth of the permanent teeth.
 
 
The dates and order of the eruption of the teeth are subject to considerable variation, but the usual sequence is somewhat as follows:
Primary Dentition.
 
 
Median incisors 6th to 8th month.
 
 
Lateral incisors 8th to 12 month.
 
 
First molars Beginning of 2d year.
 
 
Canines i£ years.
 
 
Second molars 3 to 3^ years.
 
 
The teeth of the lower jaw generally precede those of the upper.
 
 
Permanent Dentition.
 
 
First molars 7th year.
 
 
Middle incisors 8th year.
 
 
Lateral incisors 9th year.
 
 
First premolars 10th year.
 
 
Second premolars nth year.
 
 
Canines
 
 
13th to 14th years.
 
 
Second molars J
Third molars 17th to 40th years.
 
 
In a considerable percentage of individuals the third molars (wisdom teeth) never break through the gums, and frequently when they do so they fail to reach the level of the other teeth, and so are only partly functional. These and other peculiarities of a structural nature shown by these teeth indicate that they are undergoing a retrogressive evolution.
 
 
The Development of the Tongue.  -  Strictly speaking, the tongue is largely a development of the pharyngeal region of the digestive tract and only secondarily grows forward into the floor of the mouth. In embryos of about 3 mm. there may be seen in the median line of the floor of the mouth, between the ventral ends of the first and second branchial arches, a small rounded elevation which has been termed the tuberculum impar (Fig. 174, Ti). It was at one time believed that this gave rise to the anterior portion of the tongue, but recent observations seem to show that it reaches its greatest development in embryos of about 8 mm., after which it becomes less prominent and finally unrecognizable. But before 19
 
 
290
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE TONGUE
 
 
this occurs a swelling appears in the anterior part of the mouth on each side of the median line (Fig. 174, t), and these gradually increase
 
 
n
 
 
X-'
 
 
 
x
 
 
 
 
 
-Cap
 
 
/
 
 
/
 
 
/<â– 
 
 
Fig. 174.  -  Floor of the Mouth and Pharynx of an Embryo of 7.5 mm., from
a Reconstruction.
 
 
Cop, Copula; /, furcula; t, swelling that gives rise to the body of the tongue; Ti,
tuberculum impar; I-III, branchial arches.
 
 
in size and eventually unite in the median line to form the main mass of the body of the tongue. They are separated from the
neighboring portions of the first branchial arch by a deep groove, the alveolo-lingual groove, and posteriorly are separated from the second arch by a groove which later becomes distinctly V-shaped (Fig. 175), a deep depression, which gives rise to the thyreoid body lying at the apex of the V. Behind the thyreoid pouch the ventral ends of the second and third branchial arches unite to form an elevation, the copula (Fig. 174, cop), and from this and the adjacent portions of the second and third arches the posterior portion of the tongue develops. The tongue then consists of two distinct portions, which even
 
 
 
Fig. 175.  -  The Floor of the Pharynx of an Embryo of about 20 MM.
 
 
ep, Epiglottis; fc, foramen caecum; t 1 and t 2 median and lateral portions of the tongue.  -  (His.)
 
 
THE SALIVARY GLANDS 2 9 1
tually fuse together, but the groove which originally separated them remains more or less clearly distinguishable (Fig. 175), the vallate papillae (see p. 430) developing immediately anterior to it.
 
 
The tongue is essentially a muscular organ, being formed of a central mass of muscular tissue, enclosed at the sides and dorsally by mucous membrane derived from the floor of the mouth and pharynx. The muscular tissue consists partly of fibers limited to the substance of the tongue and forming the m. lingualis, and also of a number of extrinsic muscles, the hyoglossi, genioglossi, styloglossi, glos so palatini, and chondroglossi. The last two muscles are innervated by the vagus nerve, and the remaining extrinsic muscles receive fibers from the hypoglossal, while the lingualis is supplied partly by the hypoglossal and partly, apparently, by the facial through the chorda tympani. That the facial should take part in the supply is what might be expected from the mode of development of the tongue, but the hypoglossal has been seen to correspond to certain primarily postcranial metameres (p. 169), and its relation to structures taking part in the formation of an organ belonging to the anterior part of the pharynx seems somewhat anomalous. It may be supposed that in the evolution of the tongue the extrinsic muscles, together with a certain amount of the lingualis, have grown into the tongue thickenings from regions situated much further back, for the most part from behind the last branchial arch.
 
 
Such an invasion of the tongue by muscles from posterior segments would explain the distribution of its sensory nerves (Fig. 176). The anterior portion, from its position, would naturally be supplied by branches from the fifth and seventh nerves, while the posterior portion might be expected to be supplied by the seventh. There seems, however, to have been a dislocation forward, if it may be so expressed, of the mucous membrane, the sensory distribution of the ninth nerve extending forward upon the posterior part of the anterior portion of the tongue, while a considerable amount of the posterior portion is supplied by the tenth nerve. The distribution of the sensory fibers of the facial is probably confined entirely to the anterior portion, though further information is needed to determine the exact distribution of both the motor and sensory fibers of this nerve in the tongue.
 
 
The Development of the Salivary Glands.  -  In embryos of about 8 mm. a slight furrow may be observed in the floor of the groove which connects the lip grooves of the upper and lower jaws at the angle of the mouth and may be known as the cheek groove. In later stages this furrow deepens and eventually becomes closed in to form a hollow tubular structure, which in embryos of 17 mm.
 
 
 
 
292
 
 
THE SALIVARY GLANDS
 
 
has separated from the epithelium of the floor of the cheek groove except at its anterior end and has become embedded in the connective tissue of the cheek. This tube is readily recognizable as the parotid gland and duct, and from the latter as it passes across the masseter muscle a pouch-like outgrowth is early formed which probably represents the soda parotidis.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 176.  -  Diagram of the Distribution of the Sensory Nerves of the Tongue. The area supplied by the fifth (and seventh) nerve is indicated by the transverse lines; that of the ninth by the oblique lines; and that of the tenth by the small circles.  -  (Zander.)
The submaxillary gland and duct appear in embryos of about 13 mm. as a longitudinal ridge-like thickening of the epithelium of the floor of the alveolo-lingual groove (see p. 290). This ridge
 
 
THE SALIVARY GLANDS
 
 
2 93
 
 
gradually separates from behind forward from the floor of the groove and sinks into the subjacent connective tissue, retaining, however, its connection with the epithelium at its anterior end, which indicates the position of the opening of the duct. In the vicinity of this there appear in embryos of 24.4 mm. five small bud-like downgrowths of the epithelium (Fig. 177, SL), which later increase considerably in number as well as in size, and constitute a group of glands which are generally spoken of as the sublingual gland.
 
 
As these representatives of the various glands increase in length,
 
 
ZAl\
 
 
 
Man.
 
 
 
 
Fig. 177.  -  Transverse Section of the Lower Jaw and Tongue of an Embryo
of about 20 mm. D, Digastric muscle; GGl., genioglossus, GH.\ geniohyoid; T.Al, inferior alveolar nerve; Man, mandible; MK, Meckel's cartilage; My, mylohyoid; SL, sublingual gland; S.Mx, submaxillary duct; T, tongue.
 
 
they become lobed at their deeper ends, and the lobes later give rise to secondary outgrowths which branch repeatedly, the terminal branches becoming the alveoli of the glands. A lumen early appears in the duct portions of the structures, the alveoli remaining solid for a longer time, although they eventually also become hollow.
 
 
It is to be noted that each parotid and submaxillary consists of a single primary outgrowth, and is therefore a single structure and not a union of a number of originally separate parts. The sublingual glands of adult
 
 
294 THE PHARYNX
anatomy are usually described as opening upon the floor of the mouth by a number of separate ducts. This arises from the fact that the majority of the glands which form in the vicinity of the opening of Wharton's duct remain quite small, only one of them on each side giving rise to the sublingual gland proper. The small glands have been termed the alveolo-lingual glands, and each one of them is equivalent to a parotid or submaxillary gland. In other words, there are in reality not three pairs of salivary glands, but from fourteen to sixteen pairs, there being usually from eleven to thirteen alveolo-lingual glands on each side.
 
 
The Development of the Pharynx.  -  The pharynx represents the most anterior part of the archenteron, that portion in which the branchial arches develop, and in the embryo it is relatively much longer than in the adult, the diminution being brought about by the folding in of the posterior arches and the formation of the sinus prsecervicalis already described (p. 97). Between the various branchial arches, grooves occur, representing the endodermal portions of the grooves which separate the arches. During development the first of these becomes converted into the tympanic cavity of the ear and the Eustachian tube (see Chapter XV) ; the second disappears in its upper part, the lower persisting as the fossa in which the tonsil is situated; while the lower parts of the remaining two are represented by the sinus piriformis of the larynx (His), and also leave traces of their existence in detached portions of their epithelium which form what are termed the branchial epithelial bodies , and take part in the formation of the thyreoid and thymus glands.
 
 
In the floor of the pharynx behind the thickenings which produce the tongue there is to be found in early stages a pair of thickenings passing horizontally backward and uniting in front so that they resemble an inverted U (Fig. 178, /). These ridges, which form what is termed the furcula (His), are concerned in the formation of parts of the larynx (see p. 334). In the part of the roof of the pharynx which comes to lie between the openings of the Eustachian tubes, a collection cf lymphatic tissue takes place beneath the mucous membrane, forming the pharyngeal tonsil, and immediately behind this there is formed in the median line an upwardly projecting pouch, the pharyngeal bursa, first certainly noticeable in embryos 6.5 mm. in length.
 
 
 
 
THE BRANCHIAL EPITHELIAL BODIES
 
 
295
 
 
This bursa has very generally been regarded as the persistent remains of Rathke's pouch (p. 285), especially since it is much more pronounced in fetal than in adult life. It has been shown, however, that it is formed quite independently of and posterior to the true Rathke's pouch (Killian), though what its significance may be is still uncertain.
 
 
The tonsils are formed from the epithelium of the second branchial groove. At about the fourth month solid buds begin to grow from the epithelium into the subjacent mesenchyme, and depressions appear on the surface of this region. Later the buds become hollow by a cornification of their central cells, and open upon the floor of the depressions which represent the crypts of the tonsil. In the meantime lymphocytes, concerning whose origin there is a difference of opinion, collect in the subjacent mesenchyme and eventually aggregate to form lymphatic follicles in close relation with the buds. Whether the lymphocytes wander out from the blood into the mesenchyme or are derived directly from the epithelium or the mesenchyme cells is the question at issue.
 
 
The tonsil may grow to a size sufficient to fill up completely the groove in which it forms, but not infrequently a marked depression, the fossa supratonsillaris, exists above it and represents a portion of the original second branchial furrow.
 
 
The groove of Rosenmuller, which was at one time thought to be also a remnant of the second furrow, is a secondary depression which appears in embryos of 11.5 cm. behind the opening of the Eustachian tube, in about the region of the third branchial furrow.
 
 
The Development of the Branchial Epithelial Bodies.  -  These are structures which arise either as thickenings or as outpouchings of the epithelium lining the lower portions of the inner branchial furrows. Five pairs of these structures are developed and, in addition, there is a single unpaired median body. This last makes its appearance in embryos of about 3 mm., and gives rise to the major por
 
 
 
Fig. 178.  -  The Floor of the Pharynx of an Embryo of 2.15 MM.
 
 
/. Furcula; t, tuberculum impair.  -  (His.)
 
 
296
 
 
THE BRANCHIAL EPITHELIAL BODIES
 
 
tion of the thyreoid body. It is situated immediately behind the anterior portion of the tongue, at the apex of the groove between this and the posterior portion, and is first a slight pouch -like depression. As it deepens, its extremity becomes bilobed, and after the embryo has reached a length of 6 mm. it becomes completely separated from the floor of the pharynx. The point of its original origin is, however, permanently marked by a circular depression, the foramen cacum (Fig. 175, fc). Later the bilobed body migrates down the neck and becomes a solid transversely elongated mass (Fig. 179, th), into the substance of which trabecule of connective tissue extend, dividing it into a network of anastomosing cords which
 
 
 
Fig. 179.  -  Reconstructions of the Branchial Epithelial Bodies of Embryos.
 
 
of (a) 14 mm. and (b) 26 mm.
 
 
ao, Aorta; Ith, lateral thyreoid; ph, pharynx; pth 1 and pth 2 , parathyreoids; th, thyreoid;
thy, thymus; vc, vena cava superior.  -  (Tourneux and Verdun.)
later divide transversely to form follicles. When the embryo has reached a length of 2.6 cm., a cylindrical outgrowth arises from the anterior surface of the mass, usually a little to the left of the median line, and extends up the neck a varying distance, forming, when it persists until adult life, the so-called pyramid of the thyreoid body.
 
 
This account of the pyramid follows the statements made by recent workers on the question (Tourneux and Verdun) ; His has claimed that it is the remains of the stalk connecting the thyreoid with the floor of the pharynx, and which he terms the thyreo- glossal duct.
 
 
Two other pairs of bodies enter into intimate relations with the
 
 
THE BRANCHIAL EPITHELIAL BODIES
 
 
297
 
 
thm IV
 
 
thyreoid, forming what have been termed the parathyreoid bodies (Fig. 179, pth 1 and pth 2 ). One of these pairs arises as a thickening of the dorsal portion of the fourth branchial groove and the other comes from the corresponding portion of the third groove. The members of the former pair, after separating from their pthm IV points of origin, come to lie on
the dorsal surface of the lateral sd ^v^B  -  pthm ill
portions of the thyreoid body (Fig. 180, pthm IV) in close proximity to the lateral thyreoids, while those of the other pair, passing further backward, come to rest behind the lower border of the thyreoid (Fig. 180, pthm III). The cells of these bodies do not become divided into cords by the ingrowth of connective tissue to the same extent as those of the thyreoids, nor do they become separated into follicles, so that the bodies are readily distinguishable by their structure from the thyreoid.
 
 
From the ventral portion of the third branchial groove a pair of evaginations develop, similar to those which produce the lateral thyreoids. These elongate greatly, and growing downward ventrally to the thyreoid and separating from their points of origin, come to lie below the thyreoids, forming the thymus gland (Fig. 179, thy). As development proceeds they pass further backward and come eventually to rest upon the anterior surface of the peri
 
 
 
thm HI
 
 
Fig. 180.  -  Thyreoid, Tyhmtjs and Epithelial Bodies of a New-born Child.
 
 
pthm 111 and pthm IV, Para thyreoids; sd, thyreoid; thm III, thymus; thm 7T", lateral thyreoid.  -  (Groschuff.)
 
 
298
 
 
THE BRANCHIAL EPITHELIAL BODIES
 
 
cardium. The cavity which they at first contain is early obliterated and the glands assume a lobed appearance and become traversed by trabecular of connective tissue. Lymphocytes, derived, according to some recent observations, directly from the epithelium of the glands, make their appearance and gradually increase in number until the original epithelial cells are represented only by a number of peculiar spherical structures, consisting of cells arranged in concentric layers and known as Hassall's corpuscles.
 
 
The glands increase in size until about the fifteenth year, after
 
 
 
Fig. 181.  -  Diagram showing the Origin of the Various Branchial Epithelial
Bodies.
 
 
Ith, Lateral thyreoids; pp, ultimobranchial bodies; pht 1 and phi 2 , parathyreoids; th, median thyreoid; thy, thymus; I to IV, branchial grooves.  -  (Kohn.)
which they gradually undergo degeneration into a mass of fibrous and adipose tissue.
 
 
A pair of evaginations very similar to those that give rise to the thymus are also formed from the ventral portion of the fourth branchial groove (Figs. 179, A and 181, lih). As a rule they completely disappear in later stages of development, but occasionally
 
 
THE (ESOPHAGUS 299
they undergo differentiation into small masses of thymus-like tissue, which remain associated with the parathyreoids from the same arch (Fig. 180, thm IV). They have been termed lateral thyreoids, but the term is a misnomer, since they take no essential part in the formation of the thyreoid body.
 
 
Finally, a pair of outgrowths arise from the floor of the pharynx just behind the fifth branchial arch, in the region where the fifth groove, if developed, would occur. These ultimo-branchial bodies, as they have been called, usually undergo degeneration at an early stage and disappear completely, though occasionally they persist as cystic structures embedded in the substance of the thyreoid.
 
 
The relation of these various structures to the branchial grooves is shown by the annexed diagram (Fig. 181), and from it, it will be seen that the bodies derived from the third and fourth grooves are serially equivalent. Comparative embryology makes this fact still more evident, since, in the lower vertebrates, each branchial groove contributes to the formation of the thymus gland. The terminology used above for the various bodies is that generally applied to the mammalian organs, but it would be better, for the sake of comparison with other vertebrates, to adopt the nomenclature proposed by Groschuff, who terms each lateral thyreoid a thymus IV, while each thymus lobe is a thymus III. Similarly the parathyreoids are termed parathymus III and IV, the term thyreoid being limited to the median thyreoid.
 
 
The Musculature of the Pharynx.  -  The pharynx differs from other portions of the archenteron in the fact that its walls are furnished with voluntary muscles, the principal of which are the constrictors and the stylo-pharyngeus. This peculiarity arises from the relations of the pharynx to the branchial arches. It has been seen that in the higher mammalia the dorsal ends of the third, fourth, and fifth branchial cartilages disappear; the muscles originally associated with these structures persist, however, and give rise to the muscles of the pharynx, which consequently are innervated by the ninth and tenth nerves.
 
 
The Development of the (Esophagus.  -  From the ventral side of the lower portion of the pharynx an evagination develops at an early stage which is destined to give rise to the organs of
 
 
3°°
 
 
THE STOMACH
 
 
respiration; the development of this may, however, be convenientlypostponed to a later chapter (Chapter XII) .
 
 
The oesophagus is at first a very short portion of the archenteron (Fig. 182, A), but as the heart and diaphragm recede into the thorax, it elongates (Fig. 182, B) until it eventually forms a considerable portion of the digestive tract. Its endodermal lining, like that of the rest of the digestive tract except the pharynx, is surrounded
 
 
 
Fig. 182.  -  Reconstructions of the Digestive Tract of Embryos of (^4) 4.2 mm.
 
 
and (2?) 5 MM.
 
 
all, Allantois; cl, cloaca; I, lung; li, liver; Rp, Rathke's pouch; 5, stomach; t, tongue; th>
thyreoid body; Wd, Wolffian duct; y, yolk-stalk.  -  (His.)
by splanchnic mesoderm whose cells become converted into nonstriated muscular tissue, which, by the fourth month, has separated into an inner circular and an outer longitudinal layer.
 
 
The Development of the Stomach and Intestines.  -  By the time the embryo has reached a length of about 5 mm. its constriction
 
 
THE INTESTINE 30I
from the yolk-sac has proceeded so far that a portion of the digestive tract anterior to the yolk-sac can be recognized as the stomach and a portion posterior as the intestine. As first the stomach is a simple, spindle-shaped enlargement (Fig. 182) and the intestine a tube without any coils or bends, but since in later stages the intestine grows much more rapidly in length than the abdominal cavity, a coiling of the intestine becomes necessary.
 
 
The elongation of the stomach early produces changes in its position, its lower end bending over toward the right, while its upper end, owing to the development of the liver, is forced somewhat toward the left. At the same time the entire organ undergoes a rotation about its longitudinal axis through nearly ninety degrees, so that, as the result of the combination of these two changes, what was originally its ventral border becomes its lesser curvature and what was originally its left surface becomes its ventral surface.
 
 
Hence it is that the left vagus nerve passes over the ventral and the right over the dorsal surface of the stomach in the adult.
 
 
In the meantime the elongation of the oesophagus has carried the stomach further away from the lower end of the pharynx, and from being spindle-shaped it has become more pyriform, as in the adult. The fundus, it may be noted, is not due to a general enlargement of the organ but to a local outpouching of the upper dorsal portion of its wall.
 
 
The growth of the intestine results in its being thrown into a loop opposite the point where the yolk-stalk is still connected with it, the loop projecting ventrally into the portion of the ccelomic cavity which is contained within the umbilical cord, and being placed so that its upper limb lies to the right of the lower one. Upon the latter a slight pouch-like lateral outgrowth appears which is the beginning of the cacum and marks the line of union of the future small and large intestine. The small intestine, continuing to lengthen more rapidly than the large, assumes a sinuous course (Fig. 183), in which it is possible to recognize six primary coils which continue to be recognizable until advanced stages of development and even in the adult (Mall). The first of these is at first indistinguishable from the
 
 
302
 
 
THE INTESTINE
 
 
pyloric portion of the stomach and can be recognized as the duodenum only by the fact that it has connected with it the ducts of the liver and pancreas; as development proceeds, however, its caliber diminishes and it assumes the appearance of a portion of the intestine.
 
 
The remaining coils elongate rapidly and are thrown into numerous secondary coils, all of which are still contained within the
 
 
 
Fig. 183. -  Reconstruction of Embryo of 20 mm. C, Caecum; K, kidney; L, liver; S, stomach; SC, suprarenal bodies; W, mesonephros.  - 
(Mall.)
ccelom of theumbilical cord (Fig. 184). When the embryo has reached a length of about 40 mm. the coils rather suddenly return to the abdominal cavity, and now the caecum is thrown over toward the right, so that it comes to lie immediately beneath the liver on the right side of the abdominal cavity, a position which it retains until about the fourth month after birth (Treves). The portion of the large intestine which formerly projected into the umbilical ccelom now
 
 
THE INTESTINE 303
lies transversely across the upper part of the abdomen, crossing in front of the duodenum and having the remaining portion of the small intestine below it. The elongation continuing, the secondary coils of the small intestine become more numerous and the lower portion of the large intestine is thrown into a loop which extends transversely across the lower part of the abdominal cavity and represents the sigmoid flexure of the colon. At the time of birth this portion of the large intestine is relatively much longer than in the adult, amounting to nearly half the entire length of the colon (Treves), but after the fourth month after birth a readjustment of the relative
 
 
 
 
Fig. 184.  -  Reconstruction of the Intestine of an Embryo of 19 mm. The Figures on the Intestine Indicate the Primary Coils.  -  (Mall.)
lengths of the parts of the colon occurs, the sigmoid flexure becoming shorter and the rest of the colon proportionally longer, whereby the caecum is pushed downward until it lies in the right iliac fossa, the ascending colon being thus established.
 
 
When this condition has been reached, the duodenum, after passing downward for a short distance so as to pass dorsally to the transverse colon, bends toward the left and the secondary coils derived from the second and third primary coils come to occupy the left upper portion of the abdominal cavity. Those from the fourth primary coil pass across the middle line and occupy the right
 
 
3°4
 
 
THE INTESTINE
 
 
upper part of the abdomen, those from the fifth cross back again to the left lumbar and iliac regions, and those of the sixth take possession of the false pelvis and the right iliac region (Fig. 185).
 
 
Slight variations from this arrangement are not infrequent, but it occurs with sufficient frequency to be regarded as the normal. A failure
 
 
 
Fig. 185.  -  Representation of the Coilings of the Intestine in the Adult Condition. The Numbers indicate the Primary Coils.  -  (Mall.)
in the readjustment of the relative lengths of the different parts of the colon may also occasionally occur, in which case the caecum will retain its embryonic position beneath the liver.
 
 
The yolk-stalk is continuous with the intestine at the extremity of the loop which extends out into the umbilical coelom, and when the
 
 
THE INTESTINE 305
primary coils become apparent its point of attachment lies in the region of the sixth coil. As a rule, the caliber of the stalk does not increase proportionally with that of the intestine, and eventually its embryomic portion disappears completely. Occasionally, however, this portion of it does partake of the increase in size which occurs in the intestine, and it forms a blind pouch of varying length, known as Meckel's diverticulum (see p. 113).
 
 
The ccecum has been seen to arise as a lateral outgrowth at a time when the intestine is first drawn out into the umbilicus. During subsequent development it continues to increase in size until it forms a conical pouch arising from the colon just where it is joined by the small intestine (Fig. 186). The enlargement of its terminal portion does not keep pace, however, with that of the portion nearest the intestine, but it becomes gradually more and more marked off from it by its lesser caliber and gives rise to the vermiform appendix. At birth the original conical form Fig. 186. -  caecum of of the entire outgrowth is still quite evident, B „ . *°' 3
^ c, Colon; 1, ileum.
 
 
though it is more properly described as funnelshaped, but later the proximal part, continuing to increase in diameter at the same rate as the colon, becomes sharply separated from the appendix, forming the caecum of adult anatomy.
 
 
Up to the time when the embryo has reached a length of 14 mm., the inner surface of the intestine is quite smooth, but when a length of 19 mm. has been reached, the mucous membrane of the upper portion becomes thrown into longitudinal folds, and later these make their appearance throughout its entire length (Fig. 187). Later, in embryos of 60 mm., these folds break up into numbers of conical processes, the villi, which increase in number with the development of the intestine, the new villi appearing in the intervals between those already present. Villi are formed as well in the large as in the small intestine, but in the former they decrease in size as development proceeds and practically disappear toward the end of fetal life.
 
 
 
 
 
3° 6
 
 
THE LIVER
 
 
In the early stages the endodermal lining of the digestive tract assumes a considerable thickness, the lumen of the oesophagus and upper part of the small intestine being reduced to a very small caliber. In later stages a rapid increase in the size of the lumen occurs, apparently associated with the formation of cavities or vacuoles in the endodermal epithelium. These increase in size, the neighboring cells arrange themselves in an epithelial layer around their walls and they eventually break through into the general lumen. They are sometimes sufficiently large to give the appearance of diverticula of the gut, but later they flatten out, their cavities becoming portions of the general lumen.
 
 
In the case of the duodenum the thickening of the endodermal lining proceeds to such an, extent that in embryos of from 12.5 mm. to 14.5 mm. the lumen is completely obliterated immediately below the opening of the hepatic and pancreatic ducts. This condition is interesting in connection with the occasional occurrence in new-born children of an atresia of the duodenum. Under normal conditions, however, the lumen is restored by the process of vacuolization described above.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 187.  -  Reconstruction of a Portion of the Intestine of an Embryo of 28
mm. showing the longitudinal folds from which the villi are formed.
 
 
(Berry.)
The Development of the Liver.  -  The liver makes its appearance in embryos of about 3 mm. as a longitudinal groove upon the ventral surface of the archenteron just below the stomach and between it and the umbilicus. The endodermal cells lining the anterior portion of the groove early undergo a rapid proliferation, and form a solid mass which projects ventrally into the substance
 
 
THE LIVER
 
 
3°7
 
 
of a horizontal shelf, the septum transversum (see p. 318), attached to the ventral wall of the body. This solid mass (Fig. 188, L) forms the beginning of the liver proper, while the lower portion of the groove, which remains hollow, represents the future gall-bladder (Fig. 188, B). Constrictions appearing between the intestine and both the hepatic and cystic portions of the organ gradually separate these from the intestine, until they are united to it only by a stalk which represents the ductus choledochus (Fig. 188).
 
 
The further development of the liver, so far as its external
 
 
. SS 2
 
 
 
£---'*
 
 
 
' r
 
 
Fig. 188.  -  Reconstruction of the Liver Outgrowths of Rabbit Embryos of
(a) 5 mm. and (b) of 8 mm.
 
 
B, Gall-bladder; d, duodenum; DV, ductus venosus;L, liver; p, dorsal pancreas; pm,
ventral pancreas; rL, right lobe of the liver; S, stomach.  -  (Hammar.)
 
 
form is concerned, consists in the rapid enlargement of the hepatic portion until it occupies the greater part of the upper half of the abdominal cavity, its ventral edge extending as far down as the umbilicus. In the rabbit its substance becomes divided into four lobes corresponding to the four veins, umbilical and vitelline, which traverse it, and the same condition occurs in the human embryo, although the lobes are not so clearly indicated upon' the surface as in the rabbit. The two vitelline lobes are in close apposition and may
 
 
3 o8
 
 
THE LIVER
 
 
almost be regarded as one, a median ventral lobe which embraces the ductus venosus (Fig. 188, B, DV), while the umbilical lobes are more lateral and dorsal and represent the right (rL) and left lobes of the adult liver. The remaining definite lobes, the caudate (Spigelian) and quadrate, are of later formation, standing in relation to the vessels which cross the lower surface of the liver.
 
 
The ductus choledochus is at first wide and short, and near its proximal end gives rise to a small outgrowth on each side, one of which becomes the ventral pancreas (Fig. 188, B, pm). Later the duct elongates and becomes more slender, and the gall-bladder is
 
 
 
Fig. 189.  -  Transverse Section through the Liver oe an Embryo of Four
Months. in, Intestine; I, liver; W, Wolffian body.  -  (Toldt and Zuckerkandl.)
constricted off from it, the connecting stalk becoming the cystic duct. The hepatic ducts are apparently developed from the liver substance and are relatively late in appearing.
 
 
Shortly after the hepatic portion has been differentiated its substance becomes permeated by numerous blood-vessels (sinusoids) and so divided into anastomosing trabeculae (Fig. 189). These are at first irregular in size and shape, but later they become more slender and more regularly cylindrical, forming what have been termed the
 
 
THE LIVER
 
 
3°9
 
 
hepatic cylinders. In the center of each cylinder, where the cells which form it meet together, a fine canal appears, the beginning of a bile capillary, the cylinders thus becoming converted into tubes with fine lumina. This occurs at about the fourth week of development and at this time a cross-section of a cylinder shows it to be composed of about three or four hepatic cells (Fig. 190, A), among which are to be seen groups of smaller cells (e) which are erythrocytes, the liver having assumed by this time its haematopoietic function (see p. 225). This condition of affairs persists until birth, but
 
 
 
Fig. 190.-  -  Transverse Sections of Portions of the Liver of (.4) a Fetus of Six
Months and (B) a Child of Four Years.
 
 
be, Bile capillary; e, erythrocyte; he, hepatic cylinder.  -  (Toldt and Zuckerkandl.)
 
 
later the cylinders undergo an elongation, the cells of which they are composed slipping over one another apparently, so that the cylinders become thinner as well as longer and show for the most part only two cells in a transverse section (Fig. 190, B); and in still later periods the two cells, instead of lying opposite one another, may alternate, so that the cylinders become even more slender.
 
 
The bile capillaries seem to make their appearance first in cylinders which lie in close relation to branches of the portal vein (Fig. 191) ,
 
 
3io
 
 
THE LIVER
 
 
and thence extend throughout the neighboring cylinders, anastomosing with capillaries developing in relation to neighboring portal branches. As the extension so proceeds the older capillaries continue to enlarge and later become transformed into bile-ducts (Fig. 191, C), the cells of the cylinders in which these capillaries were situated becoming converted into the epithelial lining of the ducts.
 
 
The lobules, which form so characteristic a feature of the adult liver, are late in appearing, not being fully developed until some time after birth. They depend upon the relative arrangement of the branches of the portal and hepatic veins; these at first occupy distinct territories of the liver substance, being separated from one another by practically the entire thickness of the liver, although of
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 191.  -  Injected Bile Capillaries of Pig Embryos of (A) 8 cm., (B) 16 cm., and (C) of Adult Pig.  -  (Hendrickson.)
course connected by the sinusoidal capillaries which lie between the hepatic cylinders. During development the two sets of branches extend more deeply into the liver substance, each invading the territory of the other, but they can readily be distinguished from one another by the fact that the portal branches are enclosed within a sheath of connective tissue (Glisson's capsule) which is lacking to the hepatic vessels. At about the time of birth the branches of the hepatic veins give off at intervals bunches of terminal vessels, around which branches of the portal vein arrange themselves, the liver tissue becoming divided up into a number of areas which may be termed
 
 
THE PANCREAS 3II
hepatic islands, each of which is surrounded by a number of portal branches and contains numerous dichotomously branching hepatic terminals. Later the portal branches sink into the substance of the islands, which thus become lobed, and finally the sinking in extends so far that the original island becomes separated into a number of smaller areas or lobules, each containing, as a rule, a single hepatic terminal (the intralobular vein) and being surrounded by a number of portal terminals (interlobular veins) , the two systems being united by the capillaries which separate the cylinders contained within the area. The lobules are at first very small, but later they increase in size by the extension of the hepatic cylinders.
 
 
Frequently in the human liver lobules are to be found containing two intralobular veins, a condition with results from an imperfect subdivision of a lobe of the original hepatic island.
 
 
The liver early assumes a relatively large size, its weight at one time being equal to that of the rest of the body, and though in later embryonic stages its relative size diminishes, yet at birth it is still a voluminous organ, occupying the greater portion of the upper half of the abdominal cavity and extending far over into the left hypochondrium. Just after birth there is, however, a cessation of growth, and the subsequent increase proceeds at a much slower rate than that of the rest of the body, so that its relative size bcomes still more diminished (see Chap. XVII). The cessation of growth affects principally the left lobe and is accompanied by an actual degeneration of portions of the liver tissue, the cells disappearing completely, while the ducts and blood-vessels originally present persist, the former constituting the vasa aberrantia of adult anatomy. These are usually especially noticeable at the left edge of the liver, between the folds of the left lateral ligament, but they may also be found along the line of the vena cava, around the gall-bladder, and in the region of the left longitudinal fissure.
 
 
The Development of the Pancreas.  -  The pancreas arises a little later than the liver, as two or three separate outgrowths, one from the dorsal surface of the duodenum (Fig. 192, DP) usually a little above the liver outgrowth, and one or two from the lower part
 
 
312
 
 
THE PANCREAS
 
 
of the common bile-duct. Of the latter outgrowths, that upon the left side (Vps) may be wanting and, if formed, early disappears, while that of the right side (Vpd) continues its development to form what has been termed the ventral pancreas. Both this and the dorsal pancreas continue to elongate, the latter lying to the left of ^^ the portal vein, while the former,
at first situated to the right of the vein, later grows across its ventral surface so as to come into contact with the dorsal gland, with which it fuses so intimately that no separation line can be distinguished. The body and tail of the adult pancreas represent the original dorsal outgrowth, while the right ventral pancreas becomes the head.
 
 
Both the dorsal and ventral outgrowths early become lobed, and the lobes becoming secondarily lobed and this lobation repeating itself several times, the compound tubular structure of the adult gland is acquired, the very numerous terminal lobules becoming the secreting acini, while the remaining portions become the ducts. Of the principal ducts, there are at first two; that of the dorsal pancreas, the duct of Santorini, opens into the duodenum on its dorsal surface, while that of the ventral outgrowth, the duct of Wirsung, opens into the ductus choledochus. When the fusion of the two portions of the gland occurs, an anastomosis of branches of the two ducts develops and the proximal portion of the duct of Santorini may
 
 
 
Fig. iq2.  -  Reconstruction of the Pancreatic Outgrowths of an Embryo of 7.5 MM.
 
 
D, Duodenum; Dc, ductus communis choledochus; DP, dorsal pancreas; Vpd, and Vps, right and left ventral pancreas.  - (Helly.)
 
 
LITERATURE 313
degenerate, so that the secretion of the entire gland empties into the common bile-duct through the duct of Wirsung.
 
 
In the connective tissue which separates the lobules of the gland, groups of cells occur, which have no connection with the ducts of the gland, and form what are termed the areas ofLangerhans. They arise by a differentiation of the cells which form the original pancreatic outgrowths, and have been distinguished in the dorsal pancreas of the guinea-pig while it is still a solid outgrowth. They gradually separate from the remaining cells of the outgrowth and come to lie in the mesenchyme of the gland in groups into which, finally, bloodvessels penetrate.
 
 
LITERATURE.
 
 
E. T. Bell: "The Development of the Thymus," Amer. Journ. of Anat., v, 1906. J. M. Berry: "On the Development of the Villi of the Human Intestine," Anat.
 
 
Anzeiger, xvi, 1900. L. Bolk: "Die Entwicklungsgeschichte der menschlichen Lippen," Anat. Hefte.
 
 
xliv, 1908. L. Bolk: "Ueber die Gaumenentwicklung und die Bedeutung der oberen Zahn
leiste beim Menschen," Zeit.fiir Morphol. und Anthropol., xiv, 191 1. J. Bracket: "Recherches sur le developpement du pancreas et du foie," Journ. de
I' Anat. et de la Physiol., xxxii, 1896. O. C. Bradley: "A Contribution to the Morphology and Development of the Mammalian Liver," Journ. Anat. and Physiol., xliii, 1908. H. M. de Burlet: "Die ausseren Formverhaltnisse der Leber beim menschlichen
Embryo," Morphol. Jahrb., XLII, 1910. R. V. Chamberldst: "On the Mode of Disappearance of the Villi from the Colon of
Mammals," Anat. Record, in, 1909. J. H. Chievitz: "Beitrage zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Speicheldrusen," Archiv
fiir Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1885. H. Fox: "The Pharyngeal Pouches and Their Derivatives in the Mammalia," Amer.
 
 
Journ. Anat., vin, 1908. K. Groschtjff: " Ueber das Vorkommen eines Thymussegmentes der vierten Kiemen
tasche beim Menschen," Anat. Anzeiger, xvn, 1900. O. Grosser: "Zur Kenntnis des ultimobranchialen Korpers beim Menschen," Anat.
 
 
Anzeiger, xxxvn, 19 10. L. Grunwald: "Ein Beitrag zur Entstehung und Bedeutung der Gaumenmandeln,"
Anat. Anzeiger, xxxvn, 1910. J. A. Hammar: "Einige Plattenmodelle zur Beleuchtung der friiheren embryonal
Leberentwicklung," Arch.f. Anat. undPhys., Anat. Abth., 1893.
 
 
 
 
314 LITERATURE
J. A. Hammar: "Notiz iiber die Entwicklung der Zunge und der Mundspeicheldrtisen
beim Menschen," Anat. Anzeiger, xix, 1901. J. A. Hammar: "Studien iiber die Entwicklung des Vorderdarms und einiger angren
zender Organe," Arch./, mikrosk. Anat., lix and lx, 1902. K. Helly: "Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Pancreasanlagen und Duodenalpapillen
des Menschen," Archivfiir mikrosk. Anat., lvi, 1900. K. Helly: "Studien iiber Langerhanssche Inseln," Arch, filr mikrosk. Anat.,fXMU,
1907. W. F. Hendrickson: "The Development of the Bile-capillaries as revealed by Golgi's
Method," Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, 1898. W. His: "Anatomie menschlicher Embryonen," Leipzig, 1882-1886. F. Hochstetter: "Ueber die Bildung der primitiven Choanen beim Menschen,"
Anat. Anzeiger, vii, 1892. N. W. Ingalls : " A Contribution to the Embryology of the Liver and Vascular System
in Man," Anat. Record, II, 1908. C. M. Jackson: " On the Development and Topography of the Thoracic and Abdominal
Viscera," Anat. Record, in, 1909. F. P. Johnson: "The Development of the Mucous Membrane of the (Esophagus,
Stomach and Small Intestine in the Human Embryo," Amer. J own. Anat., x,
1910.
 
 
E. Kallius: "Beitrage zur Entwicklung der Zunge, 3teTh. Saugetiere. I. Sus scrofa,"
Anat. Hefte, xli, 1910.
 
 
F. Keibel: "Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des menschlichen Urogenital-apparatus,"
Archivfiir Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1896.
 
 
G. Killian: "Ueber die Bursa und Tonsilla pharyngea," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xiv,
1888. A. Kohn: "Die Epithelkorperchen," Ergebnisse der Anat. und Entwicklungsgesch., ix,
1899. H. Kuster: "Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte der Langerhans'schen Inseln im Pancreas
beim menschlichen Embryo," Arch, filr mikrosk., Anat., lxiv, 1904. F. T. Lewis and F. W. Thyng: "The Regular Occurrence of Intestinal Diverticula
in Embryos of the Pig, Rabbit and Man," Amer. Journ. Anat., vii, 1908. F. P. Mall: "Ueber die Entwickelung des menschlichen Darmes und seiner Lage
beim Erwachsenen," Archivfiir Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., Supplement, 1897. F. P. Mall: "A Study of the Structural Unit of the Liver," Amer. Journ. of Anat., V,
1906. R. Mayer: " Ueber die Bildung des Recessus pharyngeus medius s. Bursa pharyngis in
zusammenhang mit der Chorda bei menschlichen Embryonen," Anat. Anzeiger,
xxxvii, 1910. J. F. Meckel: " Bildungsgeschichte des Darmkanals der Saugethiere und namentlich
des Menschen," Archivfiir Anat. und Physiol., in, 1817. T. Mironescu: " Ueber die Entwicklung der Langerhans' schen Inseln bei menschlichen Embryonen," Arch, fur mikrosk. Anat., lxxvi, 1911. W. J. Otis: " Die Morphogenese und Histogenese des Analhockers nebst Bemerkungen
iiber die Entwicklung der Sphincter ani externus beim Menschen," Anat. Hefte,
xxx, 1906.
 
 
 
 
LITERATURE 315
R. M. Pearce: "The Development of the Islands of Langerhans in the Human
Embryo," Amer. Journ. of Anal., 11, 1902. C. Rose: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Zahne des Menschen," Archiv fur mikrosk.
 
 
Anat., xxxviii, 1891. G. Schorr: " Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des secundaren Gaumens," Anat. Hefte,
xxxvi, 1908. G. Schorr: "Ueber Wolfsrachen von Standpunkt der Embryologie und pathologischen
Anatomie," Arch, fur palholog. Anal., cxcvn, 1909. A, Swaen: "Recherches sur le developement du foie, du tube digestif, de l'arriere
cavite du peritoine et du mesentere," Journ. de I' Anal, et de la Physiol., xxxii,
1896, and xxxiii, 1897. J. Tandler: "Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des menschlichen Duodenum in frtihen
Embryonalstadien," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxix, 1900. P. Thompson: "A Note on the Development of the Septum Transversum and the
Liver," Journ. Anat. and Phys., xlii, 1908. F. W. Thyng: "Models of the Pancreas in Embryos of the Pig, Rabbit, Cat and
Man," Amer, Journ. Anat., vn, 1908. C. Toldt and E. Zuckerkandl: "Ueber die Form und Texturveranderungen der
menschlichen Leber wahrend des Wachsthums," Sitzungsber. der kais. Akad.
 
 
Wissensch. Wien., M ath.-N aturwiss . Classe, lxxii, 1875. F. Tourneux and P. Verdun: "Sur les premiers developpements de la Thyroide, du
Thymus et des glandes parathyroidiennes chez l'homme," Journ. de I' Anat. et
de la Physiol., xxxiii, 1897. F. Treves: "Lectures on the Anatomy of the Intestinal Canal and Peritoneum in
Man," British Medical Journal, 1, 1885.
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XI
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE PERICARDIUM, THE PLEURO-PERITONEUM AND THE DIAPHRAGM.
 
 
It has been seen (p. 229) that the heart makes its appearance at a stage when the greater portion of the ventral surface of the intestine is still open to the yolk-sac. "The ventral mesoderm splits to form the somatic and splanchnic layers and the heart develops as a fold in the latter on each side of the median line, projecting into the ccelomic cavity enclosed by the two layers (Fig. 136, A). As the constriction of the anterior part of the embryo proceeds the two heart folds are brought nearer together and later meet, so that the heart becomes a cylindrical structure lying in the median line of the body and is suspended in the ccelom by a ventral band, the ventral tnesocardium, composed of two layers of splanchnic mesoderm which extend to it from the ventral wall of the body, and by a similar band, the dorsal tnesocardium, which unites it with the splanchnic mesoderm surrounding the digestive tract. The ventral mesocardium soon disappears (Fig. 136 C) and the dorsal one also vanishes somewhat later, so that the heart comes to lie freely in the ccelomic cavity, except for the connections which it makes with the body-walls by the vessels which enter and arise from it.
 
 
The ccelomic cavity of the embryo does not at first communicate with the extra-embryonic ccelom, which is formed at a very early period (see p. 67), but later when the splitting of the embryonic mesoderm takes place the two cavities become continuous behind the heart, but not anteriorly, since the ventral wall of the body is formed in the heart region before the union can take place. It is possible, therefore, to recognize two portions in the embryonic ccelom, an anterior one, the parietal cavity (His), which is never connected laterally with the extra-embryonic cavity, and a posterior one, the trunk cavity, which is so connected.^The heart is situated
316
 
 
THE PERICARDIUM AND PLEURO-PERITONEUM
 
 
3*7
 
 
in the parietal cavity, a considerable portion of which is destined to become the pericardial cavity.
 
 
Since the parietal cavity lies immediately anterior to the still wide yolk-stalk, as may be seen from the position of the heart in the embryo shown in Fig. 53, it is bounded posteriorly by the yolkstalk. This boundary is complete, however, only in the median line, the cavity being continuous on either side of the yolkstalk with the trunk-cavity by passages which have been termed the recessus parietales (Fig. 193, Bp and Rca). Passing forward toward the heart in the splanchnic mesoderm which surrounds the yolkstalk are the large vitelline veins, one on either side, and these shortly become so large as to bring the splanchnic mesoderm in which they lie in contact with the somatic mesoderm which forms the lateral wall of each recess. Fusion of the two layers of mesoderm along the course of the veins now takes place, and each recess thus becomes divided into two parallel passages, which have been termed the dorsal (Fig. 194, rpd) and ventral irpv) parietal recesses. Later the two veins fuse in the upper portion of their course to form the beginning of the sinus venosus, with the result that the ventral recesses become closed below and their continuity with the trunkcavity is interrupted, so that they form two blind pouches extending downward a short distance from the ventral portion of the floor of the parietal cavity. The dorsal recesses, however, retain their continuity with the trunk-cavity until a much later period.
 
 
 
 
 
Om
 
 
Rca
 
 
Fig. 1 93 .  -  Reconstruction of a Rabbit Embryo of Eight Days, with the Pericardial Cavity Laid Open.
 
 
A, Auricle; Aob, aortic bulb; A. V., atrio- ventricular communication; Bp, ventral parietal recess; Om, vitelline vein; Pc, pericardial cavity; Rca, dorsal parietal recess; Sv, sinus venosus; V, ventricle.  -  (His.)
 
 
3^
 
 
THE PERICARDIUM AND PLEURO-PERITONEUM
 
 
By the fusion of the vitelline veins mentioned above, there is formed a thick semilunar fold which projects horizontally into the ccelom from the ventral wall of the body and forms the floor of the ventral part of the parietal recess. This is known as the septum transversum, and besides containing the anterior portions of the vitelline veins, it also furnishes a passage by which the ductus Cuvieri, formed by the union of the jugular and cardinal veins, reach the heart. Its dorsal edge is continuous in the median line with the mesoderm surrounding the digestive tract just opposite the region where the liver outgrowth will form, but laterally this edge is free and forms the ventral walls of the dorsal parietal recess. An idea of the relations of the septum at this stage may be obtained
 
 
 
 
V0771
 
 
rpv
 
 
Fig. 194.  -  Transverse Sections of a Rabbit Embryo showing the Division of
the Parietal Recesses by the Vitelline Veins.
 
 
am, Amnion; rp, parietal recess; rpd and rpv, dorsal and ventral divisions of the parietal
recess; vom, vitelline vein.  -  (Ravn.)
from Fig 195, which represents the anterior surface of the septum, together with the related parts, in a rabbit embryo of nine days.
 
 
The Separation of the Pericardial Cavity.  -  The septum transversum is at first almost horizontal, but later it becomes decidedly oblique in position, a change associated with the backward movement of the heart. As the closure of the ventral wall of the body extends posteriorly the ventral edge of the septum gradually slips downward upon it, while the dorsal edge is held in its former position by its attachment to the wall of the digestive tract and the ductus Cuvieri. The anterior surface of the septum thus comes to
 
 
THE PERICARDIUM AND PLEURO-PERITONEUM
 
 
3 J 9
 
 
look ventrally as well as forward, and the parietal cavity, having taken up into itself the blind pouches which represented the ventral recesses, comes to lie to a large extent ventral to the posterior recesses. As may be seen from Fig. 195, the ductus Cuvieri, as they bend from the lateral walls of the body into the free edges of the septum, form a marked projection which diminishes considerably the opening of the dorsal recesses into the parietal cavity. In later stages
 
 
 
am
 
 
Fig. 195.  -  Reconstruction from a Rabbit Embryo of Nine Days showing the
Septum Transversum from Above.
 
 
am, Amnion; at, atrium; dc, ductus Cuvieri; rpd, dorsal parietal recess.  -  (Ravn.)
this projection increases and from its dorsal edge a fold, which may be regarded as a continuation of the free edge of the septum, projects into the upper portions of the recesses and eventually fuses with the median portion of the septum attached to the wall of the gut. In this way the parietal cavity becomes a completely closed sac, and is henceforward known as the pericardial cavity, the original ccelom
 
 
3 2 °
 
 
THE DIAPHRAGM
 
 
being now divided into two portions, (i) the pericardial, and (2) the pleuro -peritoneal cavities, the latter consisting of the abdominal ccelom together with the two dorsal parietal recesses which have been separated from the pericardial (parietal) cavity and are destined to be converted into the pleural cavities.
 
 
The Formation of the Diaphragm.  -  It is to be remembered that the attachment of the transverse septum to the ventral wall of the digestive tract is opposite the point where the liver outgrowth develops. When, therefore, the outgrowth appears, it pushes its
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 196,  -  Diagrams of (A) a Sagittal Section of an Embryo showing the Liver Enclosed within the Septum Transversum; (B) a Frontal Section of the Same; (C) a Frontal Section of a Later Stage when the Liver has Separated from the Diaphragm.
 
 
All, Allantois; CI, cloaca; D, diaphragm ;Li, liver;Ls, falciform ligament of the liver; M, mesentery; Mg, mesogastrium; Pc, pericardium; S, stomach;5T, septum transversum; U, umbilicus.
 
 
way into the substance of the septum, which thus acquires a very considerable thickness, especially toward its dorsal edge, and it furthermore becomes differentiated into two layers, an upper one, which forms the floor of the ventral portion of the pericardial cavity and encloses the Cuvierian ducts, and a lower one which contains the liver. The upper layer is comparatively thin, while the lower forms the greater part of the thickness of the septum, its posterior surface meeting the ventral wall of the abdomen at the level of the anterior margin of the umbilicus (Fig. 196, A).
 
 
 
 
THE DIAPHRAGM 32 1
In later stages of development the layer containing the liver becomes separated from the upper layer by two grooves which, appearing at the sides and ventrally immediately over the liver (Fig. 196, B), gradually deepen toward the median line and dorsally. These grooves do not, however, quite reach the median line, a portion of the lower layer of the septum being left in this region as a fold, situated in the sagittal plane of the body and attached above to the posterior surface of the upper layer and below to the anterior surface of the liver, beyond which it is continued down the ventral wall of the abdomen to the umbilicus (Fig. 196, C,Ls). This is the falciform ligament of the liver of adult anatomy, and in the free edge of its prolongation down the ventral wall of the abdomen the umbilical vein passes to the under surface of the liver, while the free edge of that portion which lies between the liver and the digestive tract contains the vitelline (portal) vein, the common bile-duct, and the hepatic artery. The diagram given in Fig. 196 will, it is hoped, make clear the mode of formation and the relation of this fold, which, in its entirety, constitutes what is sometimes termed the ventral mesentery.
 
 
And not only do the grooves fail to unite in the median line, but they also fail to completely separate the liver from the upper layer of the septum dorsally, the portion of the lower layer which persists in this region forming the coronary ligament of the liver. The portion of the lower layer which forms the roof of the grooves becomes the layer of peritoneum covering the posterior surface of the upper layer (which represents the diaphragm), while the portion which remains connected with the liver constitutes its peritoneal investment.
 
 
I In the meantime changes have been taking place in the upper layer of the septum. As the rotation of the heart occurs, so that its atrial portion comes to lie anterior to the ventricle, the Cuvierian ducts are drawn away from the septum and penetrate the posterior wall of the pericardium, the separation being assisted by the continued descent of the attachment of the edge of the septum to the ventral wall of the body. During the descent, when the upper
 
 
3 22
 
 
THE PLEURAE
 
 
layer of the septum has reached the level of the fourth cervical segment, portions of the myotomes of that segment become prolonged into it and the layer assumes the characteristics of the diaphragm, the supply of whose musculature from the fourth cervical nerves is thus explained.
 
 
The Pleurce.  -  The diaphragm is as yet, however, incomplete dors ally, where the dorsal parietal recesses are still in continuity with the trunk-cavity. With the increase in thickness of the septum transversum, these recesses have acquired a considerable length antero-posteriorly, and into their upper portions the outgrowths from the lower part of the pharynx which form the lungs (see page 331) begin to project. The recesses thus become transformed into the pleural cavities, and as the diaphragm continues to descend, slipping down the ventral wall of the body and drawing with it the pericardial cavity, the latter comes to lie entirely ventral to the pleural cavities. The free borders of the diaphragm, which now form the ventral boundaries of the openings by which the pleural and peritoneal cavities communicate, begin to approach the dorsal wall of the body, with which they finally unite and so complete the separation of the cavities. The pleural cavities continue to enlarge after their separation and, extending laterally, pass between the pericardium and the lateral walls of the body until they finally almost completely surround the pericardium. The intervals between the two pleurae form what are termed the mediastina.
 
 
The downward movement of the septum transversum extends through a very considerable interval, which may be appreciated from the diagram shown in Fig. 197. From this it may be seen that in early embryos the septum is situated just in front of the first cervical segment and that it lies very obliquely, its free edge being decidedly posterior to its ventral attachment. When the downward displacement occurs, the ventral edge at first moves more rapidly than the dorsal, and soon comes to lie at a much lower level. The backward movement continues throughout the entire length of the cervical and thoracic regions, and when the level of the tenth thoracic segment is reached the separation of the pleural and peritoneal
 
 
THE PERITONEUM
 
 
3 2 3
 
 
'atxJidbJb
 
 
1 Cuw%ea£
 
 
1 SaUai
 
 
cavities is completed, and then the dorsal edge begins to descend more rapidly than the ventral, so that the diaphragm again becomes oblique in the same sense as in the beginning, a position which it retains in the adult.
 
 
The Development of the Peritoneum.  -  The peritoneal cavity is developed from the trunk-cavity of early stages and is at first in free communication on all sides of theyolk-stalk with the extra-embryonic ccelom. As the ventral wall of the body develops the two cavities become more and more separated, and with the formation of the umbilical cord the separation is complete. Along the middorsal line of the body the archenteron forms a projection into the cavity and later moves further out from the body-wall into the cavity, pushing in front of it the peritoneum, which thus comes to surround the intestine, forming its serous coat, and from it is continued back to the dorsal body- wall forming the mesentery.
 
 
It has already been seen that on the separation of the liver from the septum transversum, the tissue of the latter gives rise to the peritoneal covering of the liver and of the posterior surface of the diaphragm, and also to the ventral mesentery. When the separation is taking place, the rotation of the stomach already described (p. 301) occurs, with the result that the portion of the ventral mesentery which stretches between the lesser curvature of the stomach and the liver shares in the rotation and comes to lie in a plane practically at right angles with that of the suspensory ligament, its surfaces looking dorsally and ventrally and its free edge being directed toward the right. This portion of the ventral mesentery forms
 
 
 
Fig. 197. -  Diagram showing the Position of the Diaphragm in Embryos of Different Ages.  - (M all.)
 
 
324 THE PERITONEUM
what is termed the lesser omentum, and between it and the dorsal surface of the stomach as the ventral boundaries, and the dorsal wall of the abdominal cavity dorsally, there is a cavity, whose floor is formed by the dorsal mesentery of the stomach, the mesogastrium, the roof by the under surface of the left half of the liver, while to the right it communicates with the general peritoneal cavity dorsal to the free edge of the lesser omentum. This cavity is known as the bursa omentalis (lesser sac of the peritoneum), and the opening into it from the general cavity or greater sac is termed the epiploic foramen (foramen of Winslow). Later, the floor of the lesser sac is drawn downward to form a broad sheet of peritoneum lying ventral to the coils of the small intestine and consisting of four layers; this represents the great omentum of adult anatomy (Fig. 201).
 
 
Although the form assumed by the bursa omentalis is associated with the rotation of the stomach, it seems probable that its real origin is independent of that process (Broman). The subserous tissue of the transverse septum is at first thick and includes not only the liver, but also the pancreas and the portion of the digestive tract which becomes the stomach and the upper part of the duodenum (Fig. 196, A). The shrinkage of this tissue by which these organs become separated from the septum cannot take place evenly on account of the relations which the organs bear to one another, so that on the right side certain peritoneal recesses are formed, one between the right lung and the stomach, a second between the liver and the stomach, and a third between the pancreas and the same structure. In man these three recesses communicate with one another to form the primary bursa omentalis, and open by a common epiploic foramen into the general peritoneal cavity. The rotation of the stomach, which takes place later, merely serves to modify the original bursa.
 
 
In the human embryo a small recess also forms upon the left side between the left lung and the stomach. Later it separates from the rest of the bursa omentalis and passes up along the side of the oesophagus, coming to lie on its right side between it and the diaphragm. It gives rise to a small serous sac that lies beneath the infracardial lobe of the right
 
 
THE PERITONEUM
 
 
3 2 5
 
 
lung, when this is present, and hence has been termed the infracardial bursa.
 
 
Below the level of the upper part of the duodenum the ventral mensentery is wanting; only the dorsal mesentery occurs. So long as the intestine is a straight tube the length of the intestinal edge of this mesentery is practically equal to that of its dorsal attached edge. The intestine, however, increasing in length much more rapidly than the abdominal walls, the intestinal edge of the mesentery soon becomes very much longer than the attached edge, and when the intestine grows out into the umbilical ccelom the mesentery accompanies it (Fig. 198). As the coils of the intestine develop, the intestinal edge of the mesentery is thrown, into corresponding folds, and on the return of the intestine to the abdominal cavity the mesentery is thrown into a somewhat funnel-like form by the twisting of the intestine to form its primary loop (Fig. 199). All that portion of the mesentery which is attached to the part of the intestine which will later become the jejunum, ileum, ascending and transverse colon, is attached to the body-wall at the apex of the funnel, at a point which bryo of Six Weeks. lies to the left of the duodenum. S p%^-VoMn° m ^''
Up to this stage or to about the middle of the fourth month the mesentery has retained its attachment to the median line of the dorsal wall of the abdomen throughout its entire length, but later fusions of certain portions occur, whereby the original condition is greatly modified. One of the earliest of these fusions takes place at the apex of the funnel, where the portion of the mesentery which passes to the tranverse colon and arches over the duodenum fuses with the ventral surface of the latter portion of the intestine and also with the peritoneum covering the dorsal wall of the abdomen both to the right and to the left of the duodenum. In this
 
 
 
Fig. 198.  -  Diagram showing the arrangement of the Mesentery and Visceral Branches of the Abdominal Aorta in an Em
 
 
326
 
 
THE PERITONEUM
 
 
way the attachment of the transverse mesocolon takes the form of a transverse line instead of a point, and this portion of the mesenterydivides the abdominal cavity into two portions, the upper (anterior) of which contains the liver and stomach, while the lower contains the remainder of the digestive tract with the exception of the duodenum. By passing across the ventral surface of the duodenum and fusing with it, the transverse mesocolon forces that portion of the intestine against the dorsal wall of the abdomen and fixes it in that position, and its mesentery thereupon degenerates, becoming
 
 
 
 
md'
 
 
Fig. 199.
 
 
-Diagrams Illustrating the Development of the Great Omentum
and the Transverse Mesocolon.
 
 
bid, Caecum; dd, small intestine; dg, yolk-stalk; di, colon; du, duodenum; gc, greater
curvature of stomach; gg, bile duct; gn, mesogastrium; k, point where the loops of the
intestine cross; mc, mesocolon; md, rectum; mes, mesentery; wf, vermiform appendix.
 
 
-  (Hertwig.)
subserous areolar tissue, the duodenum assuming the retroperitoneal position which characterizes it in the adult.
 
 
The descending colon, which on account of the width of its mesentery is at first freely movable, lies well over to the left side of the abdominal cavity, and in consequence the left layer of its mesentery lies in contact with the parietal layer of the peritoneum. A fusion of these two layers, beginning near the middle line and thence extending outward, takes place, the fused layers becoming converted into
 
 
THE PERITONEUM
 
 
3 2 7
 
 
connective tissue, and this portion of the colon thus loses its mesentery and becomes fixed to the abdominal wall. The process by which the fixation is accomplished may be understood from the diagrams which constitute Fig. 200. When the ascending colon is formed, its mesentery undergoes a similar fusion, and it also becomes fixed to the abdominal wall.
 
 
The fusion of the mesentery of the ascending and descending colon remains incomplete in a considerable number of cases (one-fourth to onethird of all cases examined), and in these the colons are not perfectly fixed to the abdominal wall. It may also be pointed out that the caecum and appendix, being primarily a lateral outpouching of the intestine, do
 
 
 
 
Fig. 200 -  Diagrams Illustrating the Manner in Which the Fixation of the Descending Colon (C) takes Place.
 
 
not possess any true mesentery, but are completely enclosed by peritoneum. Usually a falciform fold of peritoneum may be found extending along one surface of the appendix to become continuous with the left layer of the mesentery of the ileum. This, however, is not a true mesentery, and is better spoken of as a mesenteriole.
 
 
One other fusion is still necessary before the adult condition of the mesentery is acquired. The great omentum consists of two folds of peritoneum which start from the greater curvature of the stomach and pass downward to be reflected up again to the dorsal wall of the abdomen, which they reach just anterior to (above) the line of attachment of the transverse mesocolon (Fig. 201, A). At
 
 
328
 
 
THE PERITONEUM
 
 
first the attachment of the omentum is vertical, since it represents the mesogastrium, but later, by fusion with the parietal peritoneum, it assumes a transverse direction, while at the same time the pancreas, which originally lay between the two folds of the mesogastrium, is carried dorsally and comes to have a retroperitoneal position in the line of attachment of the omentum. By this change the lower layer of the omentum is brought in contact with the upper layer of the
 
 
 
 
Fig. 201.  -  Diagrams showing the Development of the Great Omentum and its Fusion with the Transverse Mesocolon.
 
 
B, Bladder; c, transverse colon; d, duodenum; Li, liver; p, pancreas; R, rectum; S, stomach; U, uterus.  -  (After Allen Thomson.)
transverse mesocolon and a fusion and degeneration of the two results (Fig. 201 B), a condition which brings it about that the omentum seems to be attached to the transverse colon and that the pancreas seems to lie in the line of attachment of the transverse mesocolon. This mesentery, as is occurs in the adult, really consists partly of a portion of the original transverse mesocolon and partly of a layer of the great omentum.
 
 
 
 
LITERATURE 329
By these various changes the line of attachment of the mesentery to the dorsal wall of the body has become somewhat complicated and has departed to a very considerable extent from its original simple vertical arrangement. If all the viscera be removed from the body of an adult and the mesentery be cut close to the line of its attachment, the course of the latter will be seen to be as follows: Descending from the under surface of the diaphragm are the lines of attachment of the suspensory ligament, which on reaching the liver spread out to become the coronary and lateral ligaments of that organ. At about the mid-dorsal line these lines become continuous with those of the mesogastriumr which curve downward toward the left and are continued into the transverse lines of the transverse mesocolon. Between these last, in a slight prolongation, there may be seen to the right the cut end of the first portion of the duodenum as it passes back to the dorsal wall of the abdomen, and at about the mid-dorsal line the cut ends of its last part become visible as it passes ventrally again to become the jejunum. From the transverse mesocolon three lines of attachment pass downward; the two lateral broad ones represent the lines of fixation of the ascending and descending colons, while the narrower median one, which curves to the right, represents the attachment of the mesentery of the small intestine other than the duodenum. Finally, from the lower end of the fixation line of the descending colon the mesentery of the sigmoid is continued downward.
 
 
The special developments of the peritoneum in connection with the genito-urinary apparatuus will be considered in Chapter XIII.
 
 
LITERATURE.
 
 
I. Broman: "Ueber die Entwicklung und Bedeutung der Mesenterial und der
Korperhohlen bei den Wirbeltieren," Ergebn. der Anat. u. Entw., XV, 1906. A. Bracket: "Die Entwickelung der grossen Korperhohlen und ihre Trennung von
Einander," Ergebnisse der Anat. und Eniwickelungsgesch., vn, 1898. W. His: " Mittheilungen zur Embryologie der Saugethiere und des Menschen,"
Archiv fur Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1881. F. P. Mall: "Development of the Human Ccelom," Journal of Morphol., xii, 1897. F. P. Mall: "On the Development of the Human Diaphragm," Johns Hopkins
Hospital Bull., xii, 1901.
 
 
 
 
330 LITERATURE
E. Ravn: "Ueber die Bildung der Scheidewand zwischen Brust- und Bauchhohle in
Saugethierembryonen," Archiv fur Anat. und Physiol., Anat, Abth., 1889. A. Swaen: "Recherches sur le developpement du foie, du tube digestif, de l'arriere
cavite du peritoine et du mesentere," Journ. de I' Anat. et de la Physiol., xxxii,
1896; xxxni, 1897. C. Toldt: "Bau und Wachstumsveranderungen der Gekrose des menschlichen
Darmkanals," Denkschr. der kais. Akad. Wissensch. Wien, Math.-Naturwiss.
 
 
Classe, xli, 1879. C. Toldt: "Die Darmgekrose und Netze im gesetzmassigen und gesetzwidrigen
Zustand," Denkschr. der kais. Akad. Wissensch. Wien. Math.-Naturwiss. Classe,
lvt, 1889.
 
 
F. Treves: "Lectures on the Anatomy of the Intestinal Canal and Peritoneum,"
British Medical Journal, I, 1885.
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XII.
 
 
 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE ORGANS OF RESPIRATION.
 
 
 
 
The Development of the Lungs.  -  The first indication of the lungs and trachea is found in embryos of about 3.2 mm. in the form of a groove on the ventral surface of the oesophagus, at first extending almost the entire length of that portion of the digestive tract. As the oesophagus lengthens the lung groove remains connected with its upper portion (Fig. 182, A), and furrows which appear along the line of junction of the groove and the oesophagus gradually deepen and separate the two structures (Fig. 182, B). The separation takes place earliest at the lower end of the groove and thence extends upward, so that the groove is transformed into a cylindrical pouch lying ventral to the oesophagus and dorsal to the heart and opening with the oesophagus into the terminal portion of the pharynx.
 
 
Soon after the separation of the groove from the oesophagus its lower end becomes enlarged and bilobed, and since this lower end lies, with the oesophagus, in
the median attached portion of the dorsal edge of the septum transversum, the lobes, as they enlarge, project into the dorsal parietal recesses (Fig. 202), and so become enclosed within the peritoneal lining of the recesses which later become the pleural cavities.
 
 
The lobes, which represent the lungs, do not long remain simple,
33i
 
 
 
RP
 
 
Fig. 202.  -  Portion of a Section
THROUGH AN EMBRYO OF THE FOURTH
Week.
 
 
A, Aorta; DC, ductus Cuvieri; L, lung; O, oesophagus; RP, parietal recess; VOm, vitelline vein.  -  (Toldt.)
 
 
33 2
 
 
THE LUNGS
 
 
but bud-like processes arise from their cavities, three appearing in the right lobe and two in the left (Fig. 203, A), and as these increase in size and give rise to additional outgrowths, the structure of the lobes rapidly becomes complicated (Fig. 203, B and C).
 
 
The lower primary process on each side may be regarded as a prolongation of the bronchus, while the remaining process or processes represent lateral outgrowths from it. Considerable difference of opinion has existed as to the nature of the further branching of the bronchi, some authors regarding it as a succession of dichotomies, one branch of each of these placing itself so as to be in the line of the
 
 
 
/\
 
 
 
Vp
\
 
 
V
 
 
c
 
 
Fig. 203.  -  Reconstruction of the Lung Outgrowths of Embryos of (/I) 4.3,
(5) 8.5, and (C) 10.5 MM.
 
 
Ap, Pulmonary artery; Ep, eparterial bronchus; Vp, pulmonary vein; 7, second lateral
bronchus; II, main bronchi.  -  (His.)
original main bronchus, while the other comes to resemble a lateral outgrowth, and other observers have held that the main bronchus has an uninterrupted growth, all other branches being lateral outgrowths from it, and the branching therefore a monopodial process. The recent thorough study by Flint of the development of the lung of the pig shows that, in that form at least, the branching is a monopodial one, and that from the main bronchus as it elongates four sets of secondary outgrowths develop, namely, a strong lateral, a dorsal, a ventral, and a weak and variable medial set.
 
 
 
 
THE LUNGS
 
 
333
 
 
There is a general tendency for the individual branches of the various sets to be arranged in regular succession and for their development to be symmetrical in the two lungs. But on account of the necessity under which the lungs are placed of adapting themselves to the neighboring structures and at the same time affording a respiratory surface as large as possible, an amount of asymmetry supervenes. Thus, it has already been noted that in the earliest branching a single lateral bronchus is formed in the left lung and two in the right. The uppermost of these latter, the first lateral bronchus, is unrepresented in the left lung, and is peculiar in that it lies behind the right pulmonary artery (Fig. 203, C), or in the adult, after the recession of the heart, above it, whence it is termed the eparterial bronchus. Its absence on the left side is perhaps due to its suppression to permit the normal recession of the aortic arch (Flint).
 
 
So, too, the inclination of the heart causes a suppression of the second ventral bronchus in the left lung, but at the same time it affords opportunity for an excessive development of the corresponding bronchus of the right lung, which pushes its way between the heart and the diaphragm and is known as the infra-cardiac bronchus.
 
 
As soon as the unpaired first lateral bronchus and the paired second lateral bronchi are formed mesenchyme begins to collect around each of them and also around the main bronchi, the lobes of the adult lung, three in the right lung and two in the left, being thus outlined. A development of mesenchyme also takes place around the excessively developed right second ventral bronchus, and sometimes produces a well-marked infra-cardiac lobe in the right lung.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 204.  -  Diagram of the Final Branches of the Mammalian Bronchi.
 
 
A, Atrium; B, bronchus; S, air-sac.  -  (Miller.)
 
 
334
 
 
THE LARYNX
 
 
In later stages the various bronchi of each lobe give rise to additional branches and these again to others, and the mesenchyme of each lobe grows in between the various branches. At first the amount of mesenchyme separating the branches is comparatively great, but as the branches continue, the growth of the mesenchyme fails to keep pace with it, so that in later stages the terminal enlargements are separated from one another by only very thin partitions of mesenchyme, in which the pulmonary vessels form a dense network. The final branching of each ultimate bronchus or bronchiole results in the formation at its extremity of from three to five enlargements, the atria (Fig. 204, A), from which arise a number of air-sacs (S) whose walls are pouched out into slight diverticula, the air-cells or alveoli. Such a combination of atria, air-sacs, and air-cells
constitutes a lobule, and each lung is composed of a large number of such units.
 
 
The greater part of the original pulmonary groove becomes converted into the trachea, and in the mesenchyme surrounding it the incomplete cartilaginous rings develop at about the eighth or ninth week. The cells of the epithelial lining of the trachea and bronchi remain columnar or cubical in form and become ciliated at about the fourth month, but those of the epithelium of the airsacs become greatly flattened and constitute an exceedingly thin layer of pavement epithelium. The Development of the Larynx.  -  The opening of the upper end of the pulmonary groove into the pharynx is situated at first just behind the fourth branchial furrow and is surrounded anteriorly and laterally by the PI -shaped ridge already described (p. 294) as
 
 
 
Fig. 205.  -  Reconstruction of the Opening into the Larynx in an Embryo of Twenty-eight Days, Seen from Behind and Above, the Dorsal Wall of the Pharynx being Cut Away.
 
 
co, Cornicular, and cu, cuneiform tubercle; Ep, epiglottis; T, unpaired portion of the tongue.  -  (Kallius.)
 
 
THE LARYNX 335
the furcula, this separating it from the posterior portion of the tongue (Fig. 178). The anterior portion of this ridge, which is apparently derived from the ventral portions of the third branchial arch, gradually increases in height and forms the epiglottis, while the lateral portions, which pass posteriorly into the margins of the pulmonary groove, form the ary epiglottic folds. When the pulmonary groove separates from the oesophagus, the opening of the trachea into the pharynx is somewhat slit-like and is bounded laterally by the aryepiglottic folds, whose margins present two elevations which may be termed the comicular and cuneiform tubercles (Fig. 205, co and cu, and Fig. 175). The opening is, however, for a time almost obliterated by a thickening of the epithelium covering the ridges,
 
 
Fig. 206. -  Reconstruction of the Mesenchyme Condensations which Represent
the Hyoid and Thyreoid Carthages in an Embryo of Forty Days.
 
 
The darkly shaded areas represent centers of chondrification. c.ma, Greater cornu of
hyoid; c.mi, lesser cornu; Th, thyreoid cartilage.  -  (Kallius.)
and it is not until the tenth or eleventh week of development that it is re-established. Later than this, at the middle of the fourth month, a linear depression makes its appearance on the mesial surface of each ary-epiglottic fold, forming the beginning of the ventricle, and although at first the depression lies horizontally, its lateral edge later bends anteriorly, so that its surfaces look outward and inward. The lips which bound the opening of the ventricle into the laryngeal cavity give rise to the ventricular and vocal folds. The cartilages of the larynx can be distinguished during the seventh week as condensations of mesenchyme which are but indistinctly separated from one another. The thyreoid cartilage is represented at this stage by two lateral plates of mesenchyme,
 
 
336 THE LARYNX
separated from one another both ventrally and dorsally, and each of these plates undergoes chondrification from two separate centers (Fig. 206) . These, as they increase in size, unite together and send prolongations ventrally which meet in the mid-ventral line with the corresponding prolongations of the plates of the opposite side, so as to enclose an area of mesenchyme into which the chondrification only extends at a later period, and occasionally fails to so extend, producing what is termed a foramen thyreoideum.
 
 
The mesenchymal condensations which represent the cricoid and arytenoid cartilages are continuous, but each arytenoid has a distinct center of chondrification, while the cartilage of the cricoid appears as a single ring which is at first open dorsally and only later becomes complete. The epiglottis cartilage resembles the thyreoid in being formed by the fusion of two originally distinct cartilages, from each of which a portion separates to form the cuneiform cartilages (cartilages of Wrisberg) which produce the tubercles of the same name on the ary-epiglottic fold, while the corniculate cartilages (cartilages of Santorini) are formed by the separation of a small portion of cartilage from each arytenoid.
 
 
The formation of the thyreoid cartilage by the fusion of two pairs of lateral elements finds an explanation from the study of the comparative anatomy of the larynx. In the lowest group of the mammalia, the Monotremata, the four cartilages do not fuse together and are very evidently serially homologous with the cartilages which form the cornua of the hyoid. In other words, the thyreoid results from the fusion of the fourth and fifth branchial cartilages. The cricoid, in its development, presents such striking similarities to the cartilaginous rings of the trachea that it is probably to be regarded as the uppermost cartilage of that series, but the epiglottis seems to be a secondary chondrification in the glossolaryngeal fold (Schaffer). The arytenoids possibly represent an additional pair of branchial cartilages, such as occur in the lower vertebrates (Gegenbaur).
 
 
These last arches have undergone almost complete reduction in the mammalia, the cartilages being their only representatives, but,
 
 
LITERATURE 337
in addition to the cartilages, the fourth and fifth arches have also preserved a portion of their musculature, part of which becomes transformed into the muscles of the larynx. Since the nerve which corresponds to these arches is the vagus, the supply of the larynx is derived from that nerve, the superior laryngeal nerve probably corresponding to the fourth arch, while the inferior (recurrent) answers to the fifth.
 
 
The course of the recurrent nerve finds its explanation in the relation of the nerve to the fourth branchial artery. When the heart occupies its primary position ventral to the floor of the pharynx, the inferior laryngeal nerve passes transversely inward to the larynx beneath the fourth branchial artery. As the heart recedes the nerve is caught by the vessel and is carried back with it, the portion of the vagus between it and the superior laryngeal nerve elongating until the origins of the two laryngeal nerves are separated by the entire length of the neck. Hence it is that the right recurrent nerve bends upward behind the right subclavian artery, while the left curves beneath the arch of the aorta (see Fig. 149).
 
 
LITERATURE.
 
 
J. M. Flint: "The Development of the Lungs," Amer. Journ. Anal., vi, 1906.
 
 
J. E. Frazer: "The Development of the Larynx," Journ. Anat. and Phys., xliv, 1910.
 
 
E. Goppert: "Ueber die Herkunft der Wrisbergschen Knorpels," Morphol. Jahrbuch,
xxi, 1894. W. His: "Zur Bildungsgeschichte des Lungen beim menschlichen Embryo," Archiv
fiir Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1887. E. Kallius: "Beitrage zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des Kehlkopfes," Anat. Hefle,
ix, 1897. E. Kallius: "Die Entwickelung des menschlichen Kehlkopfes," Verhandl. der Anat.
 
 
Gesellsch., xii, 1898. A. Lisser: "Studies on the Development of the Human Larynx," Amer. Journ.
 
 
Anat., xii, 191 1. A. Narath: "Der Bronchialbaum der Saugethiere und des Menschen," Bibliotheca
Medica, Abth. A, Heft 3, 1901. J. Schaffer: "Zur Histologie Histogenese und phylogenetischen Bedeutung der
Epiglottis," Anat. Hefte, xxxin, 1907. A. Sotjlie! and E. Bardier: "Recherches sur le developpement du larynx chez
l'homme," Journ. de V Anat. et de la Physiol., xxiii, 1907.
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XIII.
 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE URINOGENITAL SYSTEM.
 
 
The excretory and reproductive systems of organs are so closely related in^their development that they must be considered together. They both owe their origin to the mesoderm which constitutes, the intermediate cell-mass (p. 77), this, at an early period of development, becoming thickened so as to form a ridge projecting into the dorsal portion of the ccelom and forming what is known as the Wolffian ridge (Fig. 207, wr). The greater portion of the substance
 
 
,nc
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
6 y L m y 7
 
 
otr wr
 
 
Fig. 207.  -  Transverse Section through the Abdominal Region of a Rabbit
Embryo of 12 mm.
 
 
a, Aorta; gl., glomerulus; gr, genital ridge; m, mesentery; nc, notochord; t, tubule of
mesonephros; wd, Wolffian duct; wr, Wolffian ridge.  -  (Mihalkovicz.)
of this ridge is concerned in the development of the primary and secondary excretory organs, but on its mesial surface a second ridge appears which is destined to give rise to the ovary or testis, and hence is termed the genital ridge (gr).
 
 
The development of the excretory organs is remarkable in that three sets of organs appear in succession. The first of these, the pronephros, exists only in a rudimentary condition in the human
338
 
 
THE PRONEPHROS
 
 
339
 
 
embryo, although its duct, the pronephric or Wolffian duct, undergoes complete development and plays an important part in the development of the succeeding organs of excretion and also in that of the reproductive organs. The second set, the mesonephros or Wolffian body, reaches a considerable development during embryonic life, but later, on the development of the final set, the definite kidney or metanephros, undergoes degeneration, portions only persisting as rudimentary structures associated for the most part with the reproductive organs.
 
 
The Development of the Pronephros and the Pronephric
Duct.  -  The first portions of thppjrrejl? r y system to make their appearance are the pronephric orWolffian ducts, which develop as
 
 
 
1/71
 
 
nc
 
 
en
 
 
Fig.^2o8.  -  Transverse Section through Chick Embryo of about Thirty-six
Hours.
 
 
en, Endoderm; im, intermediate cell mass; ms, mesodermic somite; nc, notochord; so,
somatic, and sp, splanchnic mesoderm; wd, Wolffian duct.  -  (Waldeyer.)
outgrowths of the dorsal wallsof_t he intermedi atecejljnasses ; At first ThT outgrowths are solid cords of cells (Fig. 208, wd), but" later a lumen appears in the center of each and the canal so formed from each intermediate cell mass, bending backward at its free end, comes into contact and fuses with the canal from the next succeeding segment. Two longitudinal canals, the pronephric or Wolffian ducts, are thus formed, with which the cavities of the intermediate cell masses communicate. The formation of the ducts begins in the anterior segments before the segmentation of the posterior portions of the mesoderm has taken place, and the further backward extension of the ducts takes place independently of the formation of excretory tubules, apparently by a process of terminal growth. The free end
 
 
340 THE PRONEPHROS
of each duct comes into intimate relation with the ectoderm above it, so much so that its posterior portion has been held^by some observers to be formed from that layer, but it seems more probable that the relation to the ectoderm is a secondary process and that the ducts are entirely of mesodermal origin. They reach the cloaca in embryos of a little over 4 mm., and later they unite with that organ, so that their lumina open into its cavity.
 
 
The pronephric tubules make their appearance in embryos of about 1.7 mm., while as yet there are only nine or ten mesodermic somites, and they are formed from the intermediate cell masses of the seventh to the fourteenth segment, and perhaps from those situated
 
 
 
En Ao
 
 
Fig. 209.  -  Diagram showing the Structure of a Fully Developed Pronephric tubule. Ao, Aorta; Coe, ccelom; ec, Ectoderm; eg, external glomerulus; en, endoderm; Ms, mesodermic somite; iV, nervous system; n, nephrostome; nc, notochord; pc, pronephric chamber; Wd, Wolffian duct.  -  (Modified from Felix.)
still more anteriorly. The entire series, however, is never in existence at any one time, for before the more posterior tubules are formed, those of the anterior segments have undergone degeneration. Each pronephric tubule, when fully formed, consists of a portion which unites it to the Wolffian duct, and opens at its other end into an enlargement, the pronephric chamber, (Fig. 209, pc), which, on its part opens mto the ccelomic cavity by means of a nephrostome canal. In the neighborhood of the ccelomic opening, or nephrostome, an outgrowth of the ccelomic epithelium is formed, and a branch from the aorta penetrates into this to form a stalked external glomerulus lying free in the coelomic cavity (Fig. 209, e.g.). Internal
 
 
THE MESONEPHROS
 
 
341
 
 
glomeruli, such as occur in connection with the mesonephric tubules do not occur in the pronephros of the human embryo, and this fact, together with the presence of external glomeruli and the participation of the tubules in the formation of the Wolffian duct, serve to distinguish the pronephros from the mesonephros.
 
 
The pronephric tubules, are, as has been stated, transitory structures and by the time the embryo has reached a length of about 5 mm. they have all disappeared. Before their disappearance is complete, however, a second series of tubules has commenced to develop, forming what is termed the mesonephros or Wolffian body.
 
 
The Development of the Mesonephros.  -  The pronephric duct does not disappear with the degeneration of the pronephric tubules, but persists to serve as the duct for the mesonephros and to play an important part in the development of the metanephros also. In the Wolffian ridge there appear in embryos of between 3 and 4 mm. a number of coiled tubules, which arise by some of the cells of the ridge aggregating to form solid cords, at first entirely unconnected with either the coelomic epithelium or the Wolffian duct. Later the cords become connected with the ccelomic epithelium and acquire a lumen, and near the coelomic end
of the tubule, at a region corresponding to the chamber of a pronephric tubule, a condensation of the mesenchyme of the Wolffian ridge occurs to form a glomerulus into which a branch extends from the neighboring aorta. The tubules finally acquire connection with the Wolffian duct and at the same time lose their connections with the coelomic epithelium, their nephrostomes being accordingly but transitory structures. The tubules rapidly increase in length and
 
 
 
Fig. 210.  -  Transverse Section of the Wolffian Ridge of a Chick Embryo of Three Days.
 
 
ao, Aorta; gl, glomerulus; gr, genital ridge; mes, mesentery; ml, mesonephric tubule; vc, cardinal vein; Wd, Wolffian duct.  -  (Mihalkovicz.)
 
 
342
 
 
THE MESONEPHROS
 
 
become coiled, and the glomeruli project into their cavities, pushing in front of them the wall of the tubule so that it has the appearance represented in Fig. 210.
 
 
In its anterior portion the Wolffian ridge is formed by distinct intermediate cell masses, but posterior to the tenth segment it becomes distinguishable from the rest of the mesoderm before this has become segmented, and, failing to undergo transverse division into segments, it forms a continuous column of cells, known as the nephrogenic cord. The anterior tubules of the mesonephros make their appearance in the intermediate cell masses belonging to the sixth cervical segment, its tubules thus overlapping those of the pronephros, and from this level they appear in all succeeding segments and in the nephrogenic cord as far back as the region of the third or fourth lumbar segment, where the cord is partially interrupted. This interruption marks the dividing line between the mesonephric and metanephric portions of the cord, the portions posterior to it being destined to give rise to the metanephros. But, as is the case with the pronephros, the entire series of mesonephric tubules is never in existence at any one time, a degeneration of the anterior ones supervening even before the posterior ones have differentiated, and the degeneration proceeds to such an extent that in an embryo of about 21 mm. all the tubules of the cervical and thoracic segments have disappeared, only those of the lumbar segments persisting.
 
 
This does not mean, however, that the number of persisting tubules corresponds with that of the segments in which they occur, for the tubules are not segmental in their arrangement, but are much more numerous than such an arrangement would allow. Two, three, or even as many as nine may correspond with the extent of a mesodermic somite and when the reduction is complete in an embryo of 21 mm., where only the tubules corresponding with four or five segments remain, they may number twenty-six in each mesonephros (Felix). This arrangement of the tubules together with the size which they assume when fully developed brings it about that the Wolffian ridges become somewhat voluminous structures in their mesonephric portions, projecting markedly into the ccelomic cavity
 
 
THE METANEPHROS
 
 
343
 
 
(Fig. 211). Each is attached to the dorsal wall of the body by a distinct mesentery and has in its lateral portion, embedded in its substance, the Wolffian duct, while on its mesial surface anteriorly is the but slightly developed genital ridge (/). This condition is reached in the human embryo at about the sixth or seventh week of development, and after that period the mesonephros again begins to undergo rapid degeneration, so that at about the sixteenth week
 
 
 
Fig. 211.  -  Urinogenital Apparatus of a Male Pig Embryo of 6 cm.
 
 
ao, Aorta; b, bladder; gh, gubernaculum testis; k, kidney; md, Mullerian duct; sr,
suprarenal body; t, testis; w, Wolffian body; wd, Wolffian duct.  -  (Mihalkovicz.)
 
 
nothing remains of it except the duct and a few small rudiments whose history will be given later.
 
 
The Development of the Metanephros.  -  The first indication of the metanephros or permanent kidney is a tubular outgrowth from the dorsal surface of the Wolffian duct shortly before its entrance into the cloaca (Fig. 170). When first formed this outgrowth lies lateral to the posterior portion of the Wolffian ridge,
 
 
344
 
 
THE METANEPHROS
 
 
 
which, as has already been noted (p. 342), is separated from the portion that gives rise to the mesonephros. This terminal portion of the ridge forms what is termed the metanephric blastema and in embryos of 7 mm. it has come into relation with the outgrowth from the Wolffian duct and covers its free extremity as a cap. Since both the blastema and the outgrowth from the Wolffian duct take
part in the formation of the uriniferous tubules, these have a double origin.
 
 
The outgrowth from the Wolffian duct as it continues to elongate comes to lie dorsal to the mesonephros, carrying the cap of blastema with it, and it soon assumes a somewhat club-shaped form, its terminal enlargement or ampulla forming what may be termed the primary renal pelvis, while the remainder represents theureter. The primary renal pelvis then gives rise to from three to six, usually four, tubular outgrowths, which may be termed primary collecting tubules, and with their formation the original cap of metanephric blastema undergoes a division into as many portions as there are tubules, so that each of the latter has its own cap of blastema. As soon as each tubule has reached a certain length it begins to enlarge at its free extremity to form an ampulla, just as did the primary renal pelvis, and from this ampulla there grow out from two to four secondary collecting tubules, a further corresponding division of the metanephric blastema taking place. In their turn these secondary tubules similarly enlarge at their extremities to form ampullae (Fig. 212, A) from which tertiary collecting tubules are budded out, accompanied by a third fragmentation of the blastema and so the process goes on until about the fifth fetal month, the number of generations of collecting tubules formed being between
 
 
Fig. 212.  -  Diagrams of Early Stages in the Development of the Metanephric Tubules.
 
 
t, Urinary tubule; Ur, ureter; v, renal ampulla.  -  (Haycrqft.)
 
 
THE METANEPHROS
 
 
34
 
 
eleven and thirteen, each tubule of the final generation having its cap of blastema.
 
 
In this way there is formed a complicated branching system of tubules all of which ultimately communicate with the primary renal pelvis, and all of which have, in the last analysis, had their origin from the Wolffian duct. They represent, however, only the collecting portions of the uriniferous tubules, their excreting por
 
 
 
Fig. 213.  -  Four Stages in the Development of a Uriniferous Tubule of a Cat. A, Arched collecting tubule, C, distal convoluted tubule; C, proximal convoluted tubule; H, loop of Henle; M, glomerulus; T, renal vesicle; V, ampulla (drawn from reconstructions prepared by G. C. Huber).
 
 
tions having yet to form, and these take their origin from the metanephric blastema.
 
 
When the terminal collecting tubules have been formed the blastemic cap in connection with each one condenses to form a renal vesicle (Fig. 213, A, T), which is at first solid, but later becomes hollow and proceeds to elongate to an S-shaped tubule, one end of which becomes continuous with the neighboring ampulla (Figs. 212, B, and 213, B), and in the space enclosed by_what may be termed the lower loop of the S a collection of mesenchyme cells
 
 
346 THE METANEPHROS
appears, into which branches penetrate at an early stage from the renal artery to form a glomerulus, the neighboring walls of the tubule becoming exceedingly thin and being transformed into a capsule of Bowman. The upper loop of the S now begins to elongate (Fig. 213, C), growing toward the hilus of the kidney, parallel to the branch of the outgrowth from the Wolffian duct to which it is attached and between this and the glomerulus, and forms a loop of Henle. From the portion of the horizontal limb of the S which lies between the glomerulus and the descending limb of the loop of Henle the proximal convoluted tubule (C) arises, while the distal convoluted and the arched collecting tubules (C and A) are formed from the uppermost portion of the upper loop (Fig. 213, D). The entire length of each uriniferous tubule from Bowman's capsule to the arched collecting tubule inclusive is thus derived from a renal vesicle, that is to say, from the metanephric blastema.
 
 
Since the tubules of the kidney are formed by the union of two originally distinct structures it is conceivable that in the cases of certain tubules there may be a failure of the union. The blastemic portion of the tubules would, nevertheless, continue their development and become functional and, since there would be not means of escape for the secretion, the result would be a cystic kidney. Occasionally the two blastemata of opposite sides fuse across the middle line, the result being the formation of a single transverse or horse-shoe shaped kidney, or, what is much rarer, the blastema of one side may cross the middle line to fuse with that of the other, the result being an apparently single kidney with two ureters which open normally into the bladder.
 
 
The primary renal pelvis is the first formed ampulla and does not exactly represent the definitive pelvis. This is produced partly by the enlargement of the primary pelvis and partly by the enlargement of the collecting tubules of the first four generations, those of the third and fourth generations later being taken up or absorbed into those of the second generation, so that the tubules of the fifth generation appear to open directly into those of the second, which form the calices minores, while those of the first constitute the calices majores. In some kidneys the process of reduction of the earlier formed collecting tubules proceeds a step further, those of the first generation
 
 
THE MULLERIAN DUCT 347
being taken up into the primary renal pelvis, the secondaries then forming a series of short calices arising from a single pelvic cavity.
 
 
At about the tenth week of development the surface of the human kidney becomes marked by shallow depressions into lobes, of which there are about eighteen, one corresponding to each of the groups of tubules which arise from the same renal vesicle. This lobation persists until after birth and then disappears completely, the surface of the kidney becoming smooth.
 
 
The Development of the Mullerian Duct and of the Genital Ridge.  -  At the time when the Wolffian body has almost reached its greatest development the Wolffian ridge is distinctly divided into three portions (Fig. 214), a median or mesonephric portion attached to the body wall, a lateral or tubal portion containing the Wolffian duct and attached to the mesonephric portion, and a genital portion, formed by the genital ridge and also attached to the mesonephric portion, but to its medial surface. In the tubal portion a second longitudinal duct, known as the Mullerian duct (Fig. 214, Md), makes its appearance. Near the anterior end of each Wolffian ridge there is formed on the free edge of the tubal portion an invagination of the peritoneal covering, and by the proliferation of the cells at its tip this invagination gradually extends backward in the substance of the tubal portion and reaches the cloaca in embryos of about 22 mm. The primary peritoneal invagination becomes the abdominal ostium of the Mullerian duct, the backward prolongation forming the duct itself.
 
 
In Fig. 214 it will be seen that the tubal portion of the left Wolffian ridge is somewhat bent inward toward the median line and in the lower parts of their extent this becomes more pronounced in both tubal portions until finally their free edges come in contact and fuse in the median line, while at the same time their lower edges fuse with the floor of the ccelomic cavity. In this way a transverse partition is formed across what will eventually be the pelvis of the adult, this cavity being thus divided into two compartments, a posterior one containing the lower portion of the intestine and an anterior one containing the bladder. With the formation of this trans
 
 
348
 
 
THE GENITAL RIDGE
 
 
N
 
 
M
 
 
â– sg
 
 
M
 
 
M
 
 
S
 
 
V s>
 
 
Ao
 
 
 
V
 
 
-r
 
 
M
 
 
Ur
 
 
Wd
 
 
Md M
 
 
(B
 
 
I
!
UA
 
 
RA
 
 
Fig. 214.  -  Transverse Section through the Abdominal Region oe an Embryo
of 25 MM. _ Ao, Aorta; B, bladder; I, intestine; L, liver; M, muscle; Md, Miillerian duct; N, spinal cord; Ov, ovary; RA, rectus abdominis; Sg, spinal ganglion; UA, umbilical artery; Ur, ureter; V, vertebra; W, Wolffian body; Wd, Wolffian duct.  -  (Keibel.)
 
 
THE GENITAL RIDGE 349
verse fold, which is represented by the broad ligament in the female, the Miillerian ducts of opposite sides are brought into contact and finally fuse in the lower portions of their course to form an unpaired utero-vaginal canal.
 
 
Upon the lateral surface of the mesonephric portion of the Wolffian ridge a longitudinal elevation is formed at about this time. It is the inguinal fold and on the union of the transverse fold with the floor of the ccelomic cavity it comes into contact and fuses with the lower part of the anterior abdominal wall, just lateral to the lateral border of the rectus abdominis muscle. In the substance of the fold the mesenchyme condenses to form a ligament-like cord, the inguinal ligament, whose further history will be considered later on.
 
 
The genital ridge makes its apearance as a band-like thickening of the epithelium covering the mesial surface of the Wolffian ridge (Fig. 207, gr). Later columns of cells grow down from the thickening into the substance of the Wolffian ridge, displacing the mesonephric tubules to a greater or less extent. These columns are composed of two kinds of cells: (i) smaller epithelial cells with a relatively small amount of cytoplasm and (2) large, spherical cells with more abundant and clear cytoplasm known as sex-cells. The growth of the cell-columns down into the substance of the Wolffian body does not take place, however, to an equal extent in all portions of the length of the genital ridge. Indeed, three regions may be recognized in the ridge; an anterior one in which a relatively small number of cell-columns, extending deeply into the stroma, is formed; a middle one in which numerous columns are formed; and a posterior one in which practically none are formed. The first region has been termed the rete region and its cell-columns the retecords, the second region the sex-gland region and its columns the sex-cords, and the posterior region is the mesenteric region and plays no part in the actual formation of the ovary or testis.
 
 
In the human embryo all the sex-cells seem to have their origin from the epithelium of the genital ridge, but in the lower vertebrates and also in mammals (Allen, Rubaschkin) they have been found to make their appearance in the endoderm of the digestive tract. Thence they wander
 
 
35°
 
 
THE TESTIS
 
 
into the mesentery and some of them eventually into the peritoneum covering the mesial surface of the Wolffian ridge, where they give rise to the sex-cells found in the epithelium of the genital ridge. This origin of the sex-cells has not yet been observed in the human embryo.
 
 
The various steps in the differentiation of the reproductive organs so far described occur in all embryos, no matter what their future sex may be. The later stages, however, differ according to sex, and consequently it will be necessary to follow the further development first of the testis and then of the ovary, the changes
 
 
 
Fig. 215.  -  Section through the Testis and the Broad Ligament of the Testis of an Embryo of 5.5 mm.
 
 
ep, Epithelium; md, Miillerian duct; mo, mesorchium; re, rete-cords; sc, sex-cords; wd, Wolffian duct.  -  (Mihalkovicz.)
that take place in the ducts and other accessory structures being reserved for a special section.
 
 
The Development of the Testis.  -  At about the fourth or fifth week there appears in the sex-gland region of the genital ridge a structure which serves to characterize the region as a testis. This is a layer of somewhat dense connective tissue which grows in between the epithelial and stroma layers of the sex-gland region and gradually extends around almost the entire sex-gland to form the tunica albuginea. By its development the sex-cords are separated from the
 
 
THE TESTIS
 
 
351
 
 
epithelium, which later becomes much flattened and eventually almost disappears. Shortly after the appearance of the albuginea the sex-cords unite to from a complicated network and the rete-cords grow backward along the line of attachment of the testis to the mesonephric portion of the Wolffian ridge, coming to lie in the hilus
 
 
 
Mc  - 
 
 
ep
 
 
â– - R
 
 
-  Mn
 
 
Fig. 216.  -  Longitudinal Section of the Ovary of an Embryo Cat of 9.4 cm. cor, Cortical layer; ep, epoophoron; Mc, medullary cords; Mn, mesonephros; pf, peritoneal fold containing Fallopian tube; R, rete; T, Fallopian tube.  -  (Coert, from Bilhler.)
of the testis (Fig. 215). They then develop a lumen and send off branches which connect with the sex-cord reticulum and they also make connection with the glomerular portions of the tubules belonging to the anterior part of the mesonephros. Since like the sexcords, they have by this time separated from the epithelium that
 
 
352 THE OVARY
gave rise to them, they now extend between the sex-cord reticulum and the anterior mesonephric tubules. Certain portions of the sex-cords now begin to break down leaving other portions to form convoluted stems which eventually become the seminiferous tubules, while from the rete-cords are formed the tubuli recti and rete testis, by which the spermatozoa are transmitted to the mesonephric tubules and so to the Wolffian duct (see p. 355).
 
 
The development of the seminiferous tubules is not, however, completed until puberty. The stems derived from the sex-cords form cylindrical cords, between which lie stroma cells and interstitial cells derived from the stroma; but until puberty these cords remain solid, a lumen developing only at that period. The cords contain the same forms of cells as were described as occurring in the epithelium of the germinal ridge, and while in the early stages transitional forms seem to occur, in later periods the two varieties of cells are quite distinct, the sex-cells becoming spermatogonia (see p. 14) and being the mother cells of the spermatozoa, while the remaining epithelial cells perhaps become transformed into the connective-tissue walls of the tubules.
 
 
The Development of the Ovary.  -  In the case of the ovary, after the formation of the sex-cords, connective tissue grows in between these and the epithelium, forming a layer equivalent to the tunica albuginea of the testis. It is, however, a much looser tissue than its homologue in the male, and, indeed, does not completely isolate the sex-cords from the epithelium, although the majority of the cords are separated and sink into the deeper portions of the ovary where they form what have been termed the medullary cords. In the meantime the germinal epithelium has continued to bud off cords which unite to form a cortical layer of cells lying below the epithelium and separated from the medullary cords by the tunica albuginea (Fig. 216).
 
 
Later the cortical layer becomes broken up by the ingrowth of stroma tissue into spherical or cord-like masses, consisting of sexcells and epithelial cells (Fig. 217). The invasion of the stroma continuing, these spheres or cords (Pfluger's cords) become divided
 
 
THE OVARY
 
 
353
 
 
into smaller masses, the primary ovarian follicles, each of which consists as a rule of a single sex-cell surrounded by a number of epithelial cells, the whole being enclosed by a- zone of condensed stroma tissue, which eventually becomes richly vascularized and forms a theca folliculi (Fig. 10). The epithelial cells in each follicle are at first comparatively few in number and closely surround the sex-cell (Fig. 217,/), which is destined to become an ovum, but in certain of the follicles they undergo an increase by mitosis, becoming extremely numerous, and later secrete a fluid, the liquor folliculi, which collects at one side of the follicle and eventually forms a considerable portion of its contents. The follicular cells are differentiated by its appearance into the stratum granulosum, which surrounds the wall of the follicle, and the discus froligerus, in which the ovum is embedded (Fig. 10, dp), and the cells which immediately surround the ovum, becoming cylindrical in shape, give rise to the corona radiata (Fig. 11, cr).
 
 
A somewhat similar fate is shared by the medullary cords, these also breaking up into a number of follicles, but sooner or later these follicles undergo degeneration so that shortly after birth practically no traces of the cords remain. It must be noted that degeneration of the follicles formed from the cortical layer also takes place even during fetal life and continues to occur throughout the entire periods of growth and functional activity, numerous atretic follicles being found in the ovary at all times. Indeed it would seem that degeneration is the fate of the great majority of the follicles and sex-cells of the ovary, but few ova coming to maturity during the life-time of any individual. 23
 
 
 
Fig. 217.  -  Section of the Ovary of a New-born Child.
 
 
a, Ovarial epithelium; b, proximal part of a Pfl tiger's cord; c, sex-cell in epithelium; d and e, spherical masses; /, primary follicle; g, blood-vessel.  -  (From Gegenbaur, after Waldeyer.)
 
 
354 THE GENITAL DUCTS
Rete-cords developed from the rete portion of the germinal ridge occur in connection with the ovary as well as with the. testis and form a rete ovarii (Fig. 216, R). They do not, however, extend so deeply into the ovary, remaining in the neighborhood of the mesovarium, and they do not become tubular, but resemble closely the medullary cords with which they are serially homologous. They separate from the epithelium and make connections with the glomeruli of the anterior portion of the mesonephros, on the one hand, and on the other with medullary cords, and in later stages show a tendency to break up into primary follicles, which early degenerate and disappear like those of the medullary cords.
 
 
The Transformation of the Mesonephros and the Ducts.  -  At one period of development there are present, as representatives of the urinogenital apparatus, the Wolffian body (mesonephros) and duct, the Miillerian duct, and the developing ovary or testis. Such a condition forms an indifferent stage from which the development proceeds in one of two directions according as the genital ridge becomes a testis or an ovary, the Wolffian body in part undergoing degeneration and in part persisting to form organs which for the most part are rudimentary, while in the female the Wolffian duct also degenerates except for certain rudiments and in the male the Miillerian duct behaves similarly.
 
 
In the Male.  -  It has been seen that the Wolffian body, through the rete cords, enters into very intimate relations with the testis, and it may be regarded as divided into two portions, an upper genital and a lower excretory. In the male the genital portion persists in its entirety, serving as the efferent ducts of the testis, which, beginning in the spaces of the rete testis, already shown to be connected with the capsules of Bowman, open into the upper part of the Wolffian duct and form the globus major of the epididymis. The excretory portion undergoes extensive degeneration, a portion of it persisting as a mass of coiled tubules ending blindly at both ends, situated near the head of the epididymis and known as the paradidymis or organ of Giraldes, while a single elongated tubule, arising from the portion of the Wolffian duct which forms the
 
 
THE GENITAL DUCTS 355
globus minor of the epididymis, represents another portion of it and is known as the vas aberrans.
 
 
The Wolffian duct is retained complete, the portion of it nearest the testis becoming greatly elongated and thrown into numerous coils, forming the body and globus minor of the epididymis, while the remainder of it is converted into the vas deferens and the ductus ejaculatorius. A lateral outpouching of the wall of the duct to form a longitudinal fold appears at about the third month and gives rise to the vesicula seminalis, the lateral position of the outgrowth explaining the adult position of the vesiculse lateral to the vasa deferentia.
 
 
With the Mullerian ducts the case is very different, since they disappear completely throughout the greater part of their course, only their upper and lower ends persisting, the former giving rise to a small sac-like body, the sessile hydatid of Morgagni, attached to the upper end of each testis near the epididymis. It has been seen (p. 349) that the lower ends of the Mullerian ducts, in the male as well as the female, fuse to form the utero-vaginal canal, and the lower portion of this also persists to form what is termed the uterus masculinus, although it corresponds to the vagina of the female rather than to the uterus. It is a short cylindrical pouch of varying length, that opens into the urethra at the bottom of a depression known as the utriculus prostaticus (sinus pocularis).
 
 
The transverse pelvic partition, produced by the union of the two tubal portions of the Wolffian body, is formed in the male embryo, but at an early stage its anterior surface fuses with the posterior surface of the bladder and consequently there is in the male no pelvic compartment equivalent to the vesico-uterine pouch of the female. The male recto-vesical pouch is, however, the homologue of the rectouterine pouch of the female.
 
 
The formation of the inguinal ligament on the surface of the mesonephros has been described on p. 349. On the degeneration of the mesonephros the layer of peritoneum that covered it persists to form a mesorchium extending from the body wall to the hilus of the testis and the inguinal ligament now comes to have its origin from
 
 
356 THE GENITAL DUCTS
the lower pole of that organ, whence it extends to the anterior abdominal wall. Owing to the rudimentary nature of the uterus masculinus and the slight development of its walls the inguinal ligament does not become involved with it, but remains independent and forms the gubemaculum testis of the adult, whose adult position is brought about by the descent of the testis into the scrotum (see p. 366).
 
 
In the Female.  -  In the female the transverse partition of the pelvis does not fuse w'th the bladder but remains distinct as the broad ligament. Consequently there is in the female both a vesicouterine and a recto-uterine pouch. Since the genital ridges form upon the mesial surfaces of the Wolffian ridges and the tubal portions are their lateral portions, when these latter unite to form the broad ligament the ovary will come to lie upon the posterior surface of that structure, projecting into the recto-vesical pouch. On the degeneration of the mesonephros the peritoneum that covered it becomes a part of the broad ligament, forming that part of it which contains the Fallopian tubes and hence is known as the mesosalpinx, while the lower part of the ligament, on account of its relation to the uterus,. is termed the mesometrium.
 
 
The genital portion of the mesonephros, though never functional as ducts in the female, persists as a group of ten to fifteen tubules, situated between the two layers of the broad ligament and in close proximity to the ovary; these constitute what is known as the epoophoron (parovarium or organ of Rosenmuller) . The tubules terminate blindly at the ends nearest the ovary, but at the other extremity, where they are somewhat coiled, they open into a collecting duct which represents the upper end of the Wolffian duct. Near this rudimentary body is another, also composed of tubules, representing the remains of the excretory portion of the mesonephros and termed the paroophoron which, however, degenerates during the early years of extra-uterine life. So far as the mesonephros is concerned, therefore, the persisting rudiments in the female are comparable to those occurring in the male.
 
 
As regards the ducts, however, the case is different, for in the
 
 
THE GENITAL DUCTS 357
female it is the Mtillerian ducts which persist, while the Wolmans undergo degeneration, a small portion of their upper ends persisting in connection with the epoophora, while their lower ends persist as straight tubules lying at the sides of the vagina and forming what are known as the canals of Gartner. The Mtillerian ducts, on the other hand, become converted into the Fallopian tubes (tubas uterince), and in their lower portions into the uterus and vagina. From the margins of the openings by which the Mullerian ducts communicate with the ccelom projections develop at an early period and give rise to the fimbria, with the exception of the one connected with the ovary, the fimbria ovarica, which is the persisting upper portion of the original genital ridge. From the utero-vaginal canal the two structures which give it its name are formed, the entire canal being transformed into the mucous membrane of the uterus and vagina. Indeed, the lower ends of the Fallopian tubes are also taken up into the uterus, for the condensation of mesenchyme that takes place around the mucosa to form the muscular wall of the uterus is so voluminous that it includes not only the utero-vaginal canal but also the adjacent portions of the Mullerian ducts. The histological differentiation of the uterus from the vagina begins to manifest itself at about the third month, and during the fourth month the vaginal portion of the duct becomes flattened and the epithelium lining its lumen fuses so as to completely occlude it and, a little later, there appears at its lower opening a distinct semicircular fold. This is the hymen, a structure which seems to be represented in the male by the colliculus seminalis. The obliteration of the lumen of the vagina persists until about the sixth month, when the cavity is re-established by the breaking down of the central epithelial cells.
 
 
The extent of the mesenchymal condensation to form the muscularis uteri also produces a modification of the relations of the inguinal ligament in the female. For the ligament becomes for a short portion of its length included in the condensation and thus attached to the upper portion of the uterus. It is consequently divided into two portions, one extending from the lower pole of
 
 
358
 
 
THE GENITAL DUCTS
 
 
the ovary to the uterus and forming the ligamentum ovarii proprium and the other extending from the uterus to the anterior abdominal wall and forming what is known in the adult as the round ligament of the uterus.
 
 
The diagram, Fig. 218, illustrates the transformation from the indifferent condition which occurs in the two sexes, and that the
 
 
 
UM
 
 
female indifferent male
Fig. 218.  -  Diagrams Illustrating the Transformation of the Mullerian and
Wolffian Ducts. B, Bladder; C, clitoris; CG, canal of Gaertner; CI, cloaca; Eo, epoophoron; Ep, epididymis; F, Fallopian tube; G, genital gland; HE, hydatid of epididymis; HM, hydatid of Morgagni; K, kidney; MD, Mullerian duct; O, ovary; P, penis; Po, paroophron; Pr, prostate gland; R, rectum; T, testis; U, urethra; UM, uterus masculinus; Ur, ureter; US, urogenital sinus; Ut, uterus; V, vagina; Va, vas aberrans; VD, vas deferens; VS, vesicula seminalis; WB, Wolffian body; WD, Wolffian duct.  -  (Modified from Huxley.)
 
 
homologies of the various parts may be clearly understood they may also be stated in tabular form as on the next page.
 
 
 
 
THE BLADDER
 
 
359
 
 
Indifferent Stage.
 
 
 
Male. Female.
 
 
 
Genital ridge J
 
Testis.
 
 
 
Fimbria ovarica. Ovary.
 
 
Ovarian ligament. Round ligament.
 
 
 
Wolffian body <
 
Globus major of epididymis.
 
 
Paradidymis.
 
 
Vasa aberrantia.
 
 
 
Epoophoron. Paroophoron.
 
 
 
Wolffian ducts. . . . •
 
Body and globus minor of
epididymis. Vasa deferentia. Seminal vesicles.' Ejaculatory ducts.
 
 
 
Collecting tubules of epoophoron.
 
 
Canal of Gartner.
 
 
 
Miillerian ducts . . . <
 
Sessile hyatid. Uterus masculinus.
 
 
 
Fallopian tubes.
 
 
Uterus.
 
 
Vagina.
 
 
 
 
In addition to the sessile hydatid, a stalked hydatid also occurs in connection with the testis, and a similar structure is attached to the fimbriated opening of each Fallopian tube. The significance of these structures is uncertain, though it has been suggested that they are persisting rudiments of the pronephros.
 
 
A failure of the development of the various parts just described to be completed in the normal manner leads to various abnormalities in connection with the reproductive organs. Thus there may occur a failure in the fusion of the lower portions of the Miillerian ducts, a bihorned or bipartite uterus resulting, or the two ducts may come into contact and their adjacent walls fail to disappear, the result being a median partition separating the vagina or both the vagina and uterus into two compartments. The excessive development of the fold which gives rise to the hymen may lead to a complete closure of the lower opening of the vagina, while, on the other hand, a failure of the Miillerian ducts to fuse may produce a biperforate hymen.
 
 
The Development of the Urinary Bladder and the Urogenital Sinus.  -  So far the relations of the lower ends of the urinogenital ducts have not been considered in detail, although it has been
 
 
s6o
 
 
THE BLADDER
 
 
seen that in the early stages of development the Wolffian and Miillerian ducts open into the sides of the ventral portion of the cloaca; that the ureters communicate with the lower portions of the Wolffian ducts; that from the ventral anterior portion of the cloaca the allantoic duct extends outward into the belly-stalk; and, finally (p. 281), that the cloaca becomes divided into a dorsal portion, which forms the lower part of the rectum, and a ventral portion, which is continuous with the allantois and receives the urinogenital ducts
 
 
 
Fig. 219.  -  Reconstruction of the Cloacal Region op an Embryo of 14 mm.
 
 
al, Allantois; b, bladder; gt, genital tubercle; i, intestine; n, spinal cord; nc, notochord ;
r, rectum; sg, urogenital sinus; ur, ureter; w, Wolffian duct. -  (Keibel.)
(Fig. 219). It is the history of this ventral portion of the cloaca which is now to be considered.
 
 
It may be regarded as consisting of two portions, an anterior and a posterior, the line of insertion of the urinogenital ducts marking the junction of the two. The anterior or upper portion is destined to give rise to the urinary bladder (Fig. 219, b), while the lower one forms what is known for a time as the urogenital ^inus (sg). The bladder, when first differentiated, is a tubular structure, whose lumen is continuous with that of the allantois, but after the second
 
 
THE BLADDER
 
 
361
 
 
month it enlarges to become more sac-like, while the intra-embryonic portion of the allantois degenerates to a solid cord extending from the apex of the bladder to the umbilicus and is known as the urachus. During the enlargement of the bladder the terminal portions of the urinogenital ducts are taken up into its walls, a process which continues until finally the ureters and Wolffian ducts open into it separately, the ureters opening to the sides of and a little anterior to the ducts. This condition is reached in embryos of about 14 mm.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 220.  -  Reconstruction of the Cloacal Structures of an Embryo of 25 mm.
 
 
bl, Bladder; m, Mullerian duct; r, rectum; sg, urogenital sinus; sy, symphysis pubis; u,
ureter; ur, urethra; w. Wolffian duct.  -  (Adapted from Keibel.)
(Fig. 219), and in later stages the interval between the two pairs of ducts is increased (Fig. 220), resulting in the formation of a short canal connecting the lower end of the bladder which receives the ureters with the upper end of the urogenital sinus, into which the Wolffian and Mullerian ducts open. This connecting canal represents the urethra (Fig. 220, ur), or rather the entire urethra of the female and the proximal part of that of the male, since a considerable portion of the latter canal is still undeveloped (see p. 364). From
 
 
362 THE UROGENITAL SINUS
this urethra there is developed, at about the third month, a series of solid longitudinal folds which project upon the outer surface and separate from the urethra from above downward. These represent the tubules of the prostate gland and are developed in both sexes, although they remain in a somewhat rudimentary condition in the female. The muscular tissue, so characteristic of the gland in the adult male, is developed from the surrounding mesenchyme at a later stage.
 
 
The bladder is, accordingly, essentially a derivative of the cloaca and its mucous membrane is therefore largely of endodermal origin. Portions of the Wolffian ducts which are of mesodermal origin are, however, taken up into the wall of the bladder and form a portion of it. The extent of the portion so formed is indicated by the position of the orifices of the ureters above and of the ejaculatory ducts below, and it corresponds therefore with what is termed the trigonum vesica together with the floor of the urethra as far as the openings of the ejaculatory ducts. Throughout this region the mucous membrane is of mesodermal origin.
 
 
The urogenital sinus is in the early stages also tubular in its upper part, though it expands considerably below, where it is closed by the cloacal membrane. This, by the separation of the cloaca into rectum and sinus, has become divided into two portions, the more ventral of which closes the sinus and the dorsal the rectum, the interval between them having become considerably thickened to form the perineal body. In embryos of about 17 mm. the urogenital portion of the membrane has broken through, and in later stages the tubular portion of the sinus is gradually taken up into the more expanded lower portion, until finally the entire sinus forms a shallow depression, termed the vestibule, into the upper part of which the urethra opens, while below are the openings of the Wolffian (ejaculatory) ducts in the male or the orifice of the vagina in the female. From the sides of the lower part of the sinus a pair of evaginations arise toward the end of the fourth month and give rise to the bulbo-vestibular glands (Bartholin's) of the female or the corresponding bulbo-urethral glands (Cowper's) in the male.
 
 
 
 
THE EXTERNAL GENITALIA 363
The Development of the External Genitalia.  -  At about the fifth week, before the urogenital sinus has opened to the exterior, the mesenchyme on its ventral wall begins to thicken, producing a slight projection to the exterior. This eminence, which is known as the genital tubercle (Fig. 219, gt), rapidly increases in size, its extremity becomes somewhat bulbously enlarged (Fig. 221, gl) and a groove, extending to the base of the terminal enlargement, appears upon its vestibular surface, the lips of the groove forming two wellmarked genital folds (Fig. 221, gf). At about the tenth week there appears on either side of the tubercle an enlargement termed the genital swelling (Fig. 221, gs), which is due to a thickening of the mesenchyme of the lower part of the ventral^abdominal wall in the
 
 
V^
 
 
 
Fig. 221.  -  The External Genitalia of an Embryo of 25 mm. a, Anus; gf, genital fold; gl, glans; gs, genital swelling; p, perineal body.  -  (Keibel.)
region where the inguinal ligament is attached, and with the appearance of these structures the indifferent stage of the external genitals is completed.
 
 
In the female the growth of the genital tubercle proceeds rather slowly and it becomes transformed into the clitoris, the genital folds becoming prolonged to form the labia minora. The genital swellings increase in size, their mesenchyme becomes transformed into a mass of adipose and fibrous tissue and they become converted into the labia majora, the interval between them constituting the vulva.
 
 
In the male the early stages of development are closely similar to
 
 
3 6 4
 
 
THE EXTERNAL GENITALIA
 
 
those of the female; indeed, it has been well said that the external genitals of the adult female resemble those of the fetal male. In early stages the genital tubercle elongates to form the penis and the integument which covers the proximal part of it grows forward as a fold which encloses the bulbous enlargement or glans and forms the prepuce, whose epithelium fuses with that covering the glans and only separates from it later by a cornification of the cells along the plane of fusion. The genital folds meet together and fuse, converting the vestibule and the groove upon the vestibular surface of the penis into the terminal portion of the male urethra and bringing it about that the vasa deferentia and the uterus masculinus open upon the floor of that passage. The two genital swellings are at the same time brought closer together, so as to lie between the base of the penis and the perineal body and, eventually, they form the scrotum. The mesenchyme of which they were primarily composed differentiates into the same layers as are found in the wall of the abdomen and a peritoneal pouch is prolonged into them from the abdomen, so that they form sacs into which the testes descend toward the close of fetal life (p. 366).
 
 
The homologies of the portions of the reproductive apparatus derived from the cloaca and of the external genitalia in the two sexes may be perceived from the following table.
 
 
 
 
 
 
Male
 
 
 
Female
 
 
 
Urinary bladder.
 
 
 
 
 
Urinary bladder.
 
 
 
 
 
Proximal portion of urethra.
 
 
 
 
 
Urethra.
 
 
 
 
 
Bulbo-urethral glands.
 
 
 
 
 
Bulbo-vestibular glands.
 
 
 
Urogenital sinus ....
 
 
 
The rest of the urethra.
 
 
 
 
 
Vestibule.
 
 
 
Genital tubercle. . . .
 
 
 
Penis.
 
 
 
 
 
Clitoris.
 
 
 
Genital folds
 
Prepuce and integument of
 
penis.
 
 
 
Labia minora
 
Genital swellings... .
 
 
 
Scrotum.
 
 
 
 
 
Labia majora.
 
 
 
 
It is stated above that the layers which compose the walls of the scrotum are identical with those of the abdominal wall. This may be seen in detail from the following scheme:
 
 
THE DESCENT OF THE OVARIES 365
Abdominal Walls. Scrotum.
 
 
Integument. Integument.
 
 
Superficial fascia. Dartos.
 
 
External oblique muscle. Intercolumnar fascia.
 
 
Internal oblique muscle. Cremasteric fascia.
 
 
Transverse muscle. Infundibuliform fascia.
 
 
Peritoneum. Tunica vaginalis.
 
 
Numerous anomalies, depending upon an inhibition or excess of the development of the parts, may occur in connection with the external genitalia. Should, for instance, the lips of the groove on the vestibular surface of the penis fail to fuse, the penial portion of the urethra remains incomplete, constituting a condition known as hypospadias, a condition whic,h offers a serious bar to the fulfilment of the sexual act. If the hypospadias is complete and there be at the same time an imperfect development of the penis, as frequently occurs in such cases, the male genitalia closely resemble those of the female and a condition is produced which is usually known as hermaphroditism. It is noteworthy that in such cases there is frequently a somewhat excessive development of the uterus masculinus, and a similar condition may be produced in the female by an excessive development of the clitoris. Such cases, however, which concern only the accessory organs of reproduction, are instances of what is more properly termed spurious hermaphroditism, true hermaphroditism being a term which should be reserved for possible cases in which the genital ridges give rise in the same individual to both ova and spermatozoa. Such cases are of exceeding rarity in the human species, although occasionally observed in the lower vertebrates, and the great majority of the examples of hermaphroditism hitherto observed are cases of the spurious variety.
 
 
The Descent of the Ovaries and Testes.  -  The positions finally occupied by the ovaries and testes are very different from those which they possess in the earlier stages of development, and this is especially true in the case of the testes. The change of position is partly due to the rate of growth of the inguinal ligaments being less than that of the abdominal walls, the reproductive organs being thereby drawn downward toward the inguinal regions where the ligaments are attached. The point of attachment is beneath the bottom of a slight pouch of peritoneum which projects a short distance into the substance of the genital swellings and is known as the canal of Nuck in the female, and in the male as the vaginal process.
 
 
In the female a second factor combines with that just mentioned.
 
 
 
 
3 66
 
 
THE DESCENT OF THE TESTES
 
 
The relative shortening of the inguinal ligaments acting alone would draw the ovaries toward the inguinal regions, but since they are united to the uterus by the ovarian ligaments movement in that direction is prevented and the ovaries come to lie in the recto-uterine compartment of the pelvic cavity.
 
 
With the testes the case is more complicated, since in addition to the relative shortening of the inguinal ligaments there is an elongation of the vaginal processes into the substance of the genital swellings, and it must be remembered that the testes, like the ovaries, are primarily connected with the peritoneum. Three stages may be recognized in the descent of the testes. The first of these depends
 
 
 
Fig. 222.  -  Diagrams Illustrating the Descent of the Testis. il, Inguinal ligament; m, muscular layer; s, skin and dartos of the scrotum; t, testis; tv, tunica vaginalis ; vd, vas deferens ; vp, vaginal process of peritoneum.  -  (After Hertwig.)
on the slow rate of elongation of the inguinal ligaments or gubernacula. It lasts until about the fifth month of development, when the testes lie in the inguinal region of the abdomen, but during this month the elongation of the gubernaculum becomes more rapid and brings about the second stage, during which there is a slight ascent of the testes, so that they come to lie a little higher in the abdomen. This stage is, however, of short duration, and is succeeded by the stage of the final descent, which is characterized by the elongation of the vaginal processes of the peritoneum into the substance of the scrotum (Fig. 222, A). Since the gubernaculum is attached to the
 
 
THE DESCENT OF TBE TESTES 367
abdominal wall beneath this process, and since its growth has again diminished, the testes gradually assume again their inguinal position, and are finally drawn down into the scrotum with the vaginal processes.
 
 
The condition which is thus acquired persists for some time after birth, the testicles being readily pushed upward into the abdominal cavity along the cavity by which they descended. Later, however, the size of the openings of the vaginal processes into the general peritoneal cavity becomes greatly reduced, so that each process becomes converted into an upper narrow neck and a lower sac-like cavity (Fig. 222, B), and, still later, the walls of the neck portion fuse and become converted into a solid cord, while the lower portion, wrapping itself around the testis, becomes the tunica vaginalis (tv). By these changes the testes become permanently located in the scrotum. During the descent of the testes the remains of each Wolffian body, the epididymis, and the upper part of each vas deferens together with the spermatic vessels and nerves, are drawn down into the scrotum, and the mesenterial fold in which they were originally contained also practically disappears, becoming converted into a sheath of connective tissue which encloses the vas deferens and the vessels and nerves, binding them together into what is termed the spermatic cord. The mesorchium, which united the testis to the peritoneum enclosing the Wolffian body, does not share in the degeneration of the latter, but persists as a fold extending between the epididymis and the testis and forming the sinus epididymis.
 
 
In the text-books of anatomy the spermatic cord is usually described as lying in an inguinal canal which traverses the abdominal walls obliquely immediately above Poupart's ligament. So long as the lumen of the neck portion of the vaginal process of peritoneum remains patent there is such a canal, placing the cavity of the tunica vaginalis in communication with the general peritoneal cavity, but the cord does not traverse this canal, but lies outside it in the retroperitoneal connective tissue. When, however, the neck of the vaginal process disappears, a canal no longer exists, although the connective tissue which surrounds the spermatic cord and unites it with the tissues of the abdominal walls is less dense than the neighboring tissues, so that the cord may readily be separated from these and thus appear to He in a canal.
 
 
 
 
368 LITERATURE
LITERATURE.
 
 
B. M. Allen: "The Embryonic Development of the Ovary and Testes in Mammals,"
Amer. Journ. of AnaL, in, 1904. J. L. Bremer: "Morphology of the Tubules of the Human Testis and Epididymis,"
Amer. Journ. Anat., xi, 1911. E. J. Evatt: "A Contribution to the Development of the Prostate in Man," Journ.
 
 
Anat. and Phys., xliii, 1909. E. J. Evatt: " A Contribution to the Development of the Prostate Gland in the Human
Female," Journ. Anat. and Phys., xlv, 1911. W. Felix: " Entwickelungsgeschichte des Exkretions-sy stems," Ergebn. der Anat. und
Entwicklungsgesch., xni, 1903. W. Felix: "Die Entwicklung der Ham- und Geschlechtsorgane," in Keibel-Mall
Human Embryology, II, 1912. A. Fleischmann: " Morphologische Studien liber Kloake und Phallus der Amnioten,
Morphol. Jarhbuch, xxx, xxxii und xxxvi, 1902, 1904, 1907. O. Frankl: "Beitrage zur Lehre vom Descensus testiculorum," Sitzungsber. der kais.
 
 
Akad. Wissensch. Wien, Math.-Naturwiss. Classe, cix, 1900. S. P. Gage: "A Three Weeks Human Embryo, with especial reference to the Brain
and the Nephric System," Amer. Journ. of Anat., rv, 1905. D. B. Hart: " The Nature and Cause of the Physiological Descent of the Testes,"
Journ. Anat. and Phys., xliv, 1909.
 
 
D. B. Hart: " The Physiological Descent of the Ovaries in the HumanFoetus," Journ.
 
 
Anat. and Phys., xliv, 1909.
 
 
E. Hauch: "Ueber die Anatomie und Entwicklung der Nieren," Anat. Hefte, xxii,
1903. G. C. Huber: "On the Development and Shape of the Uriniferous Tubules of Certain
of the Higher Mammals," Amer. Journ. of Anat., rv, Suppl. 1905. J. Janosik: "Histologisch-embryologische Untersuchungen uber das Urogenitalsystem,"
Sitzungsber. der kais. Akad. Wissensch. Wien, Math.-Naturwiss. Classe, xci, 1887 J. Janosik: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Nachniere bei den Amnioten," Arch, fur
Anat. u. Phys., Anat. Abth., 1907. J. Janosik: "Entwicklung des Nierenbeckens beim Menschen," Arch, fitr mikrosk.
 
 
Anat., lxxviii, 191 1.
 
 
F. Keibel: "Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des menschlichen Urogenital-apparatus,"
Archiv fiir Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1896. J. B. Macallum: "Notes on the Wolffian Body of Higher Mammals," Amer. Journ.
 
 
Anat., 1, 1902. E. Martin: "Ueber die Anlage der Urniere beim Kaninchen," Archiv fiir Anat. und
Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1888. H. Meyer: "Die Entwickelung der Urnieren beim Menschen," Archiv fiir mikrosk.
 
 
Anat., xxxvi, 1890. R. Meyer: "Zur Kenntnis des Gartner'schen Ganges besonders in der Vagina und
dem Hymen des Menschen," Arch, fur mikrosk. Anat., lxxiii, 1909. R. Meyer: "Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte und Anatomie des utriculus prostaticus beim
Menschen," Arch, fiir mikrosk. Anat., lxxtv, 1909
 
 
LITERATURE 369
G. VON Mihalkovicz : " Untersuchungen iiber die Entwickelung des Ham- und
Geschlechtsapparates der Amnioten," Internat. Monatsschrift fiir Anat. und
Physiol., 11, 1885. W. Nagel: "Ueber die Entwickelung des Urogenitalsystems des Menschen," Archiv
fiir mikros. Anat., xxxiv, 1889. W. Nagel: "Ueber die Entwickelung des Uterus und der Vagina beim Menschen,"
Archiv fiir mikros k. Anat., xxxvn, 1891. W. Nagel: "Ueber die Entwickelung der innere und aussere Genitalien biem mensch
lichen Weibes," Archiv fiir Gynakol., xlv, 1894. K. Peter: "Untersuchungen iiber Bau und Entwicklung der Niere. I. Die Nieren
kanalchen des Menschen und einiger Saugetiere, Jena, 1909. A. G. Pohlman: "The Development of the Cloaca in Human Embryos." Amer. Journ.
 
 
of Anat., xii, 191 1. W. Rubaschkin: " Ueber die Urgeschlechtszellen bei Saugetiere,'Mwa<. Hefte, xxxix,
1909. K. E. Schrelner: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Amniotenniere," Zeit. fiir wissensch.
 
 
Zool., lxxi, 1902. O. Stoerk: "Beitrag zur Kenntnis des Aufbaues der menschlichen Niere," Anat.
 
 
Hefte, xxill, 1904. J. Tandler: "Ueber Vornieren-Rudimente beim menschliche Embryo," Anat. Hefte,
xxvni, 1905. F. J. Taussig: "The Development of the Hymen," Amer. Journ. Anat., viii, 1908. F. Tourneux: " Sur le developpement et revolution du tubercule genital chez le foetus
humain dans les deux sexes," Journ. de I' Anat. et de la Physiol., xxv, 1889. S. Weber: " Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des uropoetischen Apparates bei Saugern,
mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung der Urniere zur Zeit des Auftretens der blei
benden Niere," Morphol. Arbeiten, vil, 1897.
 
 
 
 
24
 
 
CHAPTER XIV. THE SUPRARENAL SYSTEM OF ORGANS.
 
 
To the suprarenal system a number of bodies of peculiar structure, probably concerned with internal secretion, may be assigned. In the fishes they fall into two distinct groups, the one containing organs derived from the ccelomic epithelium and known as intervened organs, and the other consisting of organs derived from the sympathetic nervous system and which, on account of the characteristic affinity they possess for chromium salts, have been termed the chroma ffine organs. But in the amphibia and amniote vertebrates, while both the groups are represented by independent organs, yet they also become intimately associated to form the suprarenal bodies, so that, notwithstanding their distinctly different origins, it is convenient to consider them together.
 
 
The Development of the Suprarenal Bodies.  -  The suprarenal bodies make their appearance at an early stage, while the Wolffian bodies are still in a well-developed condition, and they are situated at first to the medial side of the upper ends of these structures (Fig. 211, sr). Their final relation to the metanephros is a secondary event, and is merely a topographic relation, there being no developmental relation between the two structures.
 
 
In the human embryo they make their appearance at about the beginning of the fourth week of development as a number of proliferations of the ccelomic epithelium, which project into the subjacent mesenchyme, and are situated on either side of the median line between the root of the mesentery and the upper portion of the Wolffian body. The various proliferations soon separate from the epithelium and unite to form two masses situated in the mesenchyme, one on either side of the upper portion of the abdominal aorta. In certain forms, such as the rabbit, the primary proliferations arise
37°
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE SUPRARENAL BODIES
 
 
371
 
 
from the bottom of depressions of the ccelomic epithelium (Fig. 223), but in the human embryo these depressions do not form.
 
 
Up to this stage the structure is a pure interrenal organ, but during the fifth week of development masses of cells, derived from the abdominal portion of the sympathetic nervous system, begin to penetrate into each of the interrenal masses (Fig. 224), and form strands traversing them. At about the ninth or tenth week fatty granules begin to appear in the interrenal cells and somewhat later, about the fourth month, the sympathetic constituents begin to show their chromaffine characteristics. The two tissues, however, remain intermingled for a considerable time, and it is not until a much later
 
 
 
 
 
Ao
 
 
& Sr ns
tern J „-.- - 
 
 
WC
 
 
-fvd
 
 
Fig. 223.  -  Section through a Portion of the Wolffian Ridge of a Rabbit
Embryo of 6.5 mm.
 
 
Ao, Aorta; ns, nephrostome; Sr, suprarenal body; vc, cardinal vein; wc, tubule of
Wolffian body; wd, Wolffian duct.  -  (Aichel.)
period that they become definitely separated, the sympathetic elements gradually concentrating in the center of the compound organ to become its medullary substance, while the interrenal tissue forms the cortical substance. Indeed, it is not until after birth that the separation of the two tissues and their histological differentiation is complete, occasional masses of interrenal tissue remaining imbedded in the medullary substance and an immigration of sympathetic cells continuing until at least the tenth year (Wiesel).
 
 
A great deal of difference of opinion has existed in the past concerning the origin of the suprarenal glands. By several authors they have been regarded as derivatives in whole or in part of the excretory apparatus, some tracing their origin to the mesonephros and others even to the pronephros. The fact that in some mammals the cortical (interrenal) cells are
 
 
372 DEVELOPMENT OF THE SUPRARENAL BODIES
formed from the bottom of depressions of the coelomic epithelium seemed to lend support to this view, but it is now pretty firmly established that the appearances thus presented do not warrant the interpretation placed upon them and that the interrenal tissue is derived from the ccelomic epithelium quite independently of the nephric tubules. That the chromaffine tissue is a derivative of the sympathetic nervous system has long been recognized.
 
 
During the development of the suprarenal glands portions of their tissue may be separated as the result of unequal growth and form what are commonly spoken of as accessory suprarenal glands, although, since they are usually composed solely of cortical sub
 
 
 
... â–  /
'•'§'''•. ' . . .■/.
 
 
 
 
$M
 
 
S.B.
 
 
Fig. 224.  -  Section through the Suprarenal Body of an Embryo of 17 mm.
 
 
A, Aorta; R, interrenal portion; S, sympathetic nervous system; SB, sympathetic cells
penetrating the interrenal portion.  -  (Wiesel.)
stance, the term accessory interrenal bodies would be more appropriate. They may be formed at different periods of development and occur in various situations, as for instance, in the vicinity of the kidneys or even actually imbedded in their substance, on the walls of neighboring blood-vessels, in the retroperitoneal tissue below the level of the kidneys, and in connection with the organs of reproduction, in the spermatic cord, epididymis or rete testis of the male and in the broad ligament of the female.
 
 
It seems probable that the bodies associated with the reproductive
 
 
DEVELOPMENT OF THE SUPRARENAL BODIES
 
 
373
 
 
apparatus are separated from the main mass of interrenal tissue before the immigration of the sympathetic tissue and before the descent of the ovaries or testes, while those which occur at higher levels are of later origin, and in some cases may contain some medullary substance, being then true accessory suprarenals. Such bodies are, however, comparatively rare, the great majority of the accessory bodies being composed of interrenal tissue alone.
 
 
Independent chromamne organs also occur, among them the
 
 
 
Fig. 225.  -  Section of a Cell Ball from the Intercarotid Ganglion of Man
be, Blood capillaries; ev, efferent vein; S, connective-tissue septum; I, trabecular  - 
(From Bohm and Davidoff, after Schaper.)
 
 
intercarotid ganglia and the organs of Zuckerkandl being especially deserving of note. It may also be pointed out, however, that the chromamne cells have the same origin as the cells of the sympathetic ganglia and may sometimes fail to separate from the latter, so that the sympathetic ganglia and plexuses frequently contain chromamne cells.
 
 
The Intercarotid Ganglia.  -  These structures, which are fre
 
 
374 T TTF. INTERCAROTID GANGLIA
quently though incorrectly termed carotid glands, are small bodies about 5 mm. in length, which lie usually to the mesial side of the upper ends of the common carotid arteries. They possess a very rich arterial supply and stand in intimate relation with the branches of an intercarotid sympathetic plexus, and, furthermore, they are characterized by possessing as their specific constituents markedly chromamne cells, among which are scattered stellate cells resembling the cells of the sympathetic ganglia.
 
 
They have been found to arise in pig embryos of 44 mm. by the separation of cells from the ganglionic masses scattered throughout the carotid sympathetic plexuses. These cells, which become the chromamne cells, arrange themselves in round masses termed cell balls, many of which unite to form each ganglion, and in man each cell ball becomes broken up into trabecule by the blood-vessels (Fig. 225) which penetrate its substance, and the individual balls are separated from one another by considerable quantities of connective tissue.
 
 
Some confusion has existed in the past as to the origin of this structure. The mesial wall of the proximal part of the internal carotid artery becomes considerably thickened during the early stages of development and the thickening is traversed by numerous blood lacunae which communicate with the lumen of the vessel. This condition is perhaps a relic of the branchial capillaries which in the lower gill-breathing vertebrates represent the proximal portion of the internal carotid, and has nothing to do with the formation of the intercarotid ganglion, although it has been believed by some authors (Schaper) that the ganglion was derived from the thickening of the wall of the vessel. The fact that in some animals, such as the rat and the dog, the ganglion stands in relation with the external carotid and receives its blood- supply from that vessel is of importance in this connection.
 
 
The thickening of the internal carotid disappears in the higher vertebrates almost entirely, but in the Amphibia it persists throughout life, the lumen of the proximal part of the vessel being converted into a fine meshwork by the numerous trabecular which traverse it. This carotid labyrinth has been termed the carotid gland, a circumstance which has probably assisted in producing confusion as to the real significance of the intercarotid ganglion.
 
 
The Organs of Zuckerkandl.  -  In embryos of 14.5 mm. there have been found, in front of the abdominal aorta, closely packed
 
 
THE ORGANS OF ZUCKERKANDL
 
 
375
 
 
groups of cells which resemble in appearance the cells composing the ganglionated cord, two of these groups, which extend downward along the side of the aorta to below the point of origin of the inferior mesenteric artery, being especially distinct. These cell groups give rise to the ganglia of the prevertebral sympathetic plexuses and also
 
 
 
Fig. 226.  -  Organs of Zuckerkandl from a New-born Child. a, Aorta; ci, inferior vena cava; i.c, common iliac artery; mi, inferior mesenteric artery; n.l and n.r, left and right accessory organs; pl.a, aortic plexus; u, ureter; v.r.s, left renal vein.  -  (Zuckerkandl.)
to peculiar bodies which, from their discoverer, may be termed the organs of Zuckerkandl. Each body stands in intimate relation with the fibers of the sympathetic plexuses and has a rich blood-supply, resembling in these respects the intercarotid ganglia, and the resem
 
 
376 LITERATURE
blance is further increased by the fact that the specific cells of the organ are markedly chromamne.
 
 
i At birth the bodies situated in the upper portion of the abdominal cavity have broken up into small masses, but the two lower ones, mentioned above, are still well defined (Fig. 226). Even these, how- # ever, seem to disappear later on and no traces of them have as yet been found in the adult.
 
 
LITERATURE.
 
 
A. Kohn: "Ueber den Bau und die Entwickelung der sog. Carotisdruse," Archiv.
 
 
fur mikrosk. Anat., lvi, 1900. A. Kohn: "Das chromaffine Gewebe," Ergebn. der Anat. und Entwickelungsgesch.,
xii, 1902. H. Poll: "Die vergleichende Entwicklungsgeschichte der Nebennierensysteme der
Wirbeltiere," Hertwig's Handb. der vergl. und exper. Entwicklungslehre der Wirbel
tiere, in, 1906. A. Sotjlie: "Recherches sur le developpement des capsules surrenales chez les
Vertebres," Journ. de V Anat. et de la Physiol., xxxix, 1903. J. Wiesel: "Beitrage zur Anatomie und Entwickelung der menschlichen Nebenniere,"
Anat. Heft., xix, 1902. E. Zuckerkandl: "Ueber Nebenorgane des Sympathicus im Retroperitonealraum
des Menschen," Verhandl. Anat. Gesellsch., xv, 1901.
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XV.
 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM.
 
 
The Histogenesis of the Nervous System.  -  The entire central nervous system is derived from the cells lining the medullary groove, whose formation and conversion into the medullary canal has already been described (p. 72). When the groove is first formed, the cells lining it are somewhat more columnar in shape than those on either side of it, though like them they are arranged in a single layer; later they increase by mitotic division and arrange themselves in several layers, so that the ectoderm of the groove becomes very much thicker than that of the general surface of the body. At the same time the cell boundaries, which were originally quite distinct, gradually disappear, the tissue becoming a syncytium. While its tissue is in this condition the lips of the medullary groove unite, and the subsequent differentiation of the canal so formed differs somewhat in different regions, although a fundamental plan may be recognized. This plan is most readily perceived in the region which becomes the spinal cord, and may be described as seen in that region.
 
 
Throughout the earlier stages, the cells lining the inner wall of the medullary tube are found in active proliferation, some of the cells so produced arranging themselves with their long axes at right angles to the central canal (Fig. 227), while others, whose destiny is for the most part not yet determinable, and which therefore may be termed indifferent cells are scattered throughout the syncytium. At this stage a transverse section of the medullary tube shows it to be composed of two well-defined zones, an inner one immediately surrounding the central canal and composed of the indifferent cells and the bodies of the inner or ependymal cells, and an outer one consisting of branched prolongations of the syncytial cytoplasm. This
377
 
 
378 THE HISTOGENESIS OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM
outer layer is termed the marginal velum (Randschleier) (Fig. 227, m). The indifferent cells now begin to wander outward to form a definite layer, termed the mantle layer, lying between the marginal velum and the bodies of the ependymal cells (Fig. 228), and when this layer has become well established the cells composing it begin to divide and to differentiate into (1) cells termed neuroblasts, destined to become nerve-cells, and (2) others which appear to be supportive in character and are termed neuroglia cells (Fig. 228, B).
 
 
 
 
 
6r ° %
 
 
 
 
 
,'. I"' «9
 
 
W:
 
 
cs
 
 
Fig. 227.  -  Transverse Section through the Spinal Cord of a Pig Embryo of 30 mm., the Upper Part showing the Appearance produced by the Silver Method of Demonstrating the Neuroglia Fibers.
 
 
a, Ependyma of floor plate; b, boundary between mantle layer and marginal zone; cs, mesenchymal connective- tissue syncytium; ep, ependymal cells; i, ingrowth of connective tissue; m, marginal velum; mn, mantle layer; mv, mantle layer of floor plate; p, pia mater; r, neuroglia fibers.  -  (Hardesty.)
The latter are for the" most part small and are scattered among the neuroblasts, these, on the other hand, being larger and each early developing a single strong process which grows out into the marginal velum and is known as an axis-cylinder. At a later period the
 
 
THE HISTOGENESIS OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM
 
 
379
 
 
neuroblasts also give rise to other processes, termed dendrites, more slender and shorter than the axis-cylinders, branching repeatedly, and, as a rule, not extending beyond the limits of the mantle layer. In connection with the neuroglia cells peculiar neuroglia fibrils develop very much in the same way as the fibers are formed in mesenchymal connective tissue. That is to say, they are formed from the peripheral portions of the cytoplasm of the neuroglial and ependymal cells. But since these cells are connected i together to form a syncytium the fibrils are not confined to the territories of the indi
 
 
o ^i^r
Ote%0«»
OqQ q ®»,
■ooq.©^
u rtOO^*>^ a
 
 
D ooo§
 
 
 
 
 
o o°b
u o u o °
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 228.  -  Diagrams showing the Development of the Mantle Layer in the
Spinal Cord. The circles, indifferent cells; circles with dots, neuroglia cells; shaded cells, germinal cells; circles with cross, germinal cells in mitosis; black cells, nerve-cells.  -  (Schaper.)
vidual cells, but may extend far beyond these, passing in the syncytium from the territory of one neuroglial cell to another, many of those, indeed, arising in connection with the ependymal cells extending throughout the entire thickness of the medullary wall (Fig. 227). The fibrils branch abundantly and form a supportive network extending through all portions of the central nervous system. The axis-cylinder processes of the majority of the neuroblasts on reaching the marginal velum bend upward or downward and, after
 
 
3 8o
 
 
THE HISTOGENESIS OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM
 
 
traversing a greater or less length of the cord, re-enter the mantle layer and terminate by dividing into numerous short branches which come into relation with the dendrites of adjacent neuroblasts. The processes of certain cells situated in the ventral region of the mantle zone pass, however, directly through the marginal velum out into the surrounding tissues and constitute the ventral nerveroots (Fig. 231).
 
 
The dorsal nerve-roots have a very different origin. In embryos
of about 2.5 mm., in which the medullary canal is only partly closed (Fig. 53), the cells which lie along the line of transition between the lips of the groove and the general ectoderm form a distinct ridge readily recognized in sections and termed the neural crest (Fig. 229, A). When the lips of the groove fuse together the cells of the crest unite to form a wedge-shaped mass, completing the closure of the canal (Fig. 229, B), and later proliferate so as to extend outward over the surface of the canal (Fig. 229, C). Since this proliferation is most active in the regions of the crest which correspond to the mesodermic somites there is formed a series of cell masses, arranged segmentally and situated in the mesenchyme at the sides of the medullary canal (Fig. 214). These cell masses represent the dorsal root ganglia, and certain of their constituent cells, which may also be termed neuroblasts, early assume a fusiform shape and send out a process from each extremity. One of these processes, the axiscylinder, grows inward toward the medullary canal and penetrates its
 
 
 
Fig. 229.  -  Three Sections through the Medullary Canal of an Embryo of 2.5 mm.  -  (vonLenhossek.)
 
 
THE HISTOGENESIS OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM 381
marginal velum, and, after a longer or shorter course in this zone, enters the mantle layer and comes into contact with the dendrites of some of the central neuroblasts. The other process extends peripherally and is to be regarded as an extremely elongated dendrite. The processes from the cells of each ganglion aggregate to form a nerve, that formed by the axis-cylinders being the posterior root of a spinal nerve, while that formed by the dendrites soon unites with the ventral nerve-root of the corresponding segment to form the main stem of a spinal nerve.
 
 
There is thus a very important difference in the mode of development of the two nerve-roots, the axis-cylinders of the ventral roots
 
 
 
Fig. 230.  -  Cells from the Gasserian Ganglion of a Guinea-pig Embryo. a, Bipolar cell; b and c, transitional stages to d, T-shaped cells.  -  (von Gehuchten.)
arising from cells situated in the wall of the medullary canal and growing outward (centrif ugally) , while those of the dorsal root spring from cells situated peripherally and grow inward (centripetally) toward the medullary canal. In the majority of the dorsal root ganglia the points of origin of the two processes of each bi-polar cell gradually approach one another (Fig. 230, b) and eventually come to rise from a common stem, a process of the cell-body, which thus assumes a characteristic T form (Fig. 230, d).
 
 
From what has been said it will be seen that each axis-cylinder is an outgrowth from a single neuroblast and is part of its cell-body, as are also the dendrites. Another view has, however, been advanced to the
 
 
382 THE HISTOGENESIS OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM
effect that the nerve fibers first appear as chains of cells and that the axiscylinders, being differentiated from the cytoplasm of the chains, are really multicellular products. Many difficulties stand in the way of the acceptance of this view and recent observations, both histogenetic (Cajal) and experimental (Harrison), tend to confirm the unicellular origin of the axis-cylinders. The embryological evidence therefore goes to support the neurone theory, which regards the entire nervous system as composed of definite units, each of which corresponds to a single cell and is termed a neurone.
 
 
By the development of the axis-cylinders which occupy the meshes of the marginal velum, that zone increases in thickness and comes to consist principally of nerve-fibers, while the cell-bodies of the neurones of the cord are situated in the mantle zone. No such definite distinction of color in the two zones as exists in the adult is, however, noticeable until a late period of development, the medullary sheaths, which give to the nerve-fibers their white appearance not beginning to appear until the fifth month and continuing to form from that time onward until after birth. The origin of the myelin which composes the medullary sheaths is as yet uncertain, although the more recent observations tend to show that it is picked out from the blood and deposited around the axis-cylinders in some manner not yet understood. Its appearance is of importance as being associated with the beginning of the functional activity of the nerve-fibers.
 
 
In addition to the medullary sheaths the majority of the fibers of the peripheral nervous system are provided with primitive sheaths, which are lacking, however, to the fibers of the central system. They are formed by cells which wander out from the dorsal root-ganglia and are therefore of ectodermal origin. Frog larvae deprived of their neural crests at an early stage of development produce ventral nerve-fibers altogether destitute of primitive sheaths (Harrison).
 
 
Various theories have been advanced to account for the formation of the medullary sheaths. It has been held that the myelin is formed at the expense of the outermost portions of the axis-cylinders themselves (von Kolliker), and on the other hand, it has been regarded as an excretion of the cells which compose the primitive sheaths surrounding the fibers
 
 
THE SPINAL CORD 383
(Ranvier) , a theory which is, however, invalidated by the fact that myelin is formed around the fibers of the central nervous system which possess no primitive sheaths. As stated above, the more recent observations (Wlassak) indicate its exogenous origin.
 
 
It has been seen that the central canal is closed in the mid-dorsal line by a mass of cells derived from the neural crest. These cells do not take part in the formation of the mantle layer, but become completely converted into ependymal tissue, and the same is true of the cells situated in the mid-ventral line of the canal. In these two regions, known as the roof -plate and floor -plate respectively, the wall of the canal has a characteristic structure and does not share to any great extent in the increase of thickness which distinguishes the other regions (Fig. 231). In the lateral walls of the canal there is also noticeable a differentiation into two regions, a dorsal one standing in relation to the ingrowing fibers from the dorsal root ganglia and known as the dorsal zone, and a ventral one, the ventral zone, similarly related to the ventral nerve-roots. In different regions of the medullary tube these zones, as well as the roof- and floor-plates, undergo different degrees of development, producing peculiarities which may now be considered.
 
 
Trie Development of the Spinal Cord.  -  Even before the lips of the medullary groove have met a marked enlargement of the anterior portion of the canal is noticeable, the region which will become the brain being thus distinguished from the more posterior portion which will be converted into the spinal cord. When the formation of the mesodermic somites is completed, the spinal cord terminates at the level of the last somite, and in this region still retains its connection with the ectoderm of the dorsal surface of the body; but in that portion of the cord which is posterior to the first coccygeal segment the histological differentiation does not proceed beyond the stage when the walls consist of several layers of similar cells, the formation of neuroblasts and nerve-roots ceasing with the segment named. After the fourth month the more differentiated portion elongates at a much slower rate than the surrounding tissues and so appears to recede up the spinal canal, until its
 
 
384 THE SPINAL CORD
termination is opposite the second lumber vertebra. The less differentiated portion, which retains its connection with the ectoderm until about the fifth month, is, on the other hand, drawn out into a slender filament whose cells degenerate during the sixth month, except in its uppermost part, so that it comes to be represented throughout the greater part of its extent by a thin cord composed of pia mater. This cord is the structure known in the adult as the filum terminate, and lies in the center of a leash of nerves occupying the lower part of the spinal canal and termed the cauda equina. The existence of the cauda is due to the recession of the cord which necessitates for the lower lumbar, sacral and coccygeal nerves, a descent through the spinal canal for a greater or less distance, before they can reach the intervertebral foramina through which they make their exit.
 
 
In the early stages of development the central canal of the cord is quite large and of an elongated oval form, but later it becomes somewhat rhomboidal in shape (Fig. 231, A), the lateral angles marking the boundaries between the dorsal and ventral zones. As development proceeds the sides of the canal in the dorsal region gradually approach one another and eventually fuse, so that this portion of the canal becomes obliterated (Fig. 231, B) and is indicated by the dorsal longitudinal fissure in the adult cord, the central canal of which corresponds to the ventral portion only of the embryonic cavity. While this process has been going on both the roofand the floor-plate have become depressed below the level of the general surface of the cord, and by a continuance of the depression of the floor-plate  -  a process really due to the enlargement and consequent bulging of the ventral zone  -  the anterior median fissure is produced, the difference between its shape and that of the dorsal fissure being due to the difference in its development.
 
 
The development of the mantle layer proceeds at first more rapidly in the ventral zone than in the dorsal, so that at an early stage (Fig. 231, A) the anterior column of gray matter is much more pronounced, but on the development of the dorsal nerve-roots the formation of neuroblasts in the dorsal zone proceeds apace, resulting
 
 
THE SPINAL CORD
 
 
385
 
 
in the formation of a dorsal column. A small portion of the zone, situated between the point of entrance of the dorsal nerve-roots and the roof-plate, fails, however, to give rise to neuroblasts and is entirely converted into ependyma. This represents the future funiculus gracilis (fasciculus of Goll) (Fig. 231, A, cG), and at the point of entrance of the dorsal roots into the cord a well-marked oval bundle of fibers is formed (Fig. 231, A, ob) which, as develop
 
 
 
Fig. 231.  -  Transverse Sections through the Spinal Cords of Embryos .of (A) about Four and a Half Weeks and (B) about Three Months'. cB, Fasciculus of Burdach; cG, fasciculus of Goll; dh, dorsal column; dz, dorsal zone; fp, floor-plate; ob, oval bundle; rp, roof-plate; vh, ventral column; vz, ventral zone.  -  (His.)
ment proceeds, creeps dorsally over the surface of the dorsal horn until it meets the lateral surface of the fasciculus of Goll, and, its further progress toward the median line being thus impeded, it insinuates itself between that fasciculus and the posterior horn to form the funiculus cuneatus (fasciculus of Burdach) (Fig. 231, B, cB).
 
 
Little definite is as yet known concerning the development of the other fasciculi which are recognizable in the adult cord, but it seems
25
 
 
3 86
 
 
THE BRAIN
 
 
A "
;
 
t
 
ffe
 
V/tt
 
1  -  H
 
 
 
/»//
 
\-mt
 
 
certain that the lateral and anterior cerebro-spinal (pyramidal) fasciculi are composed of fibers which grow downward in the meshes of the marginal velum from neuroblasts situated in the cerebral cortex, while the cerebellospinal (direct cerebellar) fasciculi and the fibers of the ground-bundles have their origin from cells of the mantle layer of the cord.
 
 
The myelination of the fibers of the spinal cord begins between the fifth and sixth months and appears first in the funiculi cuneati, and about
a month later in the funiculi graciles. The myelination of the great motor paths, the lateral and anterior cerebro-spinal fasciculi, is the last to develop, appearing toward the end of the ninth month of fetal life.
 
 
The Development of the Brain.
 
 
-  The enlargement of the anterior portion of the medullary canal does not take place quite uniformly, but is less along two transverse lines than else where, so that the brain region early becomes divided into three primary vesicles which undergo further differentiation as follows. Upon each side of the anterior vesicle an evagination appears and becomes converted into a club-shaped structure attached to the ventral portion of the vesicle by a pedicle. These evaginations (Fig. 232, op) are known as the optic evaginations, and being concerned in the formation of the eye will be considered in the succeeding chapter. After their formation the antero-lateral portions of the vesicle become bulged out into two protuberances (h) which rapidly increase in size and give rise, eventually to the two cerebral hemispheres, which form, together with the portion of the vesicle which lies between them, what is termed the telencephalon or forebrain, the remainder of the vesicle giving rise to what is known as
 
 
 
Fig. 232.  -  Reconstruction of the Brain of an Embryo of 2.15
MM.
 
 
h, Hemisphere; i, isthmus; m, mesencephalon; mf, mid-brain flexure; mt, metencephalon ; myl, myelencephalon; nf, nape flexure; ot, otic capsule; op, optic evagination; t, diencephalon.  -  (His.)
 
 
THE BRAIN
 
 
387
 
 
the diencephalon or Hween-brain (Fig. 232, /). The middle vesicle is bodily converted into the mesencephalon or mid-brain (m), but the posterior vesicle differentiates so that three parts may be recognized : (1) a rather narrow portion which immediately succeeds the midbrain and is termed the isthmus (i); (2) a portion whose roof and floor give rise to the cerebellum and pons respectively, and which is termed the metencephalon or hind-brain (mi) ; and (3) a terminal portion which is known as the medulla oblongata, or, to retain a consistent nomenclature, the myelencephalon or after-brain (my). From each of these six divisions definite structures arise whose relations to the secondary divisions and to the primary vesicles may be understood from the following table and from the annexed figure (Fig. 233), which represents a median longitudinal section of the brain of a fetus of three months.
 
 
 
 
3rd Vesicle
 
 
Myelencephalon
 
 
Metencephalon
 
 
Isthmus
 
 
Medulla oblongata (I) .
 
 
/ Pons (II 1).
 
 
^ Cerebellum (II 2).
 
 
SBrachia conjunctiva (III). Cerebral peduncles (posterior portion) .
 
 
 
 
2nd Vesicle Mesencephalon
 
 
Cerebral peduncles (anterior portion) (IV 1). Corpora quadrigemina (IV 2).
 
 
 
 
1st Vesicle <
 
 
Diencephalon
 
 
Telencephalon
 
 
Pars mammillaris (V 1). Thalamus (V 2). Epiphysis (V 3).
 
 
Infundibulum (VI 1). Corpus striatum (VI 2). Olfactory bulb (VI 3). Hemispheres (VI 4).
 
 
 
 
But while the walls of the primary vesicles undergo this complex differentiation, their cavities retain much more perfectly their original relations, only that of the first vesicle sharing to any great extent the modifications of the walls.
 
 
 
 
388 THE BRAIN
The cavity of the third vesicle persists in the adult as the fourth ventricle, traversing all the subdivisions of the vesicle; that of the second, increasing but little in height and breadth, constitutes the aquaductus cerebri; while that of the first vesicle is continued into the cerebral hemispheres to form the lateral ventricles, the remainder of it constituting the third ventricle, which includes the cavity of the median portion of the telencephalon as well as the entire cavity of the diencephalon.
 
 
During the differentiation of the various divisions of the brain certain flexures appear in the roof and floor, and to a certain extent
 
 
'V'i L-/
 
 
 
IV Z
 
 
iVi
 
 
02
 
 
Fig. 233.  -  Median Longitudinal Section of the Brain of an Embryo of the Third Month.  -  (His.)
correspond with those already described as occurring in the embryo. The first of these flexures to appear occurs in the region of the midbrain, the first vesicle being bent ventrally until it comes to lie at practically a right angle with the axis of the mid-brain. This may be termed the mid-brain flexure (Fig. 232, mf) and corresponds with the head-bend of the embryo. The second flexure occurs in the region of the medulla oblongata and is known as the nape flexure (Fig. 232, nf); it corresponds with the similarly named bend of the embryo and is produced by a bending ventrally of the entire head, so
 
 
THE MYELENCEPHALON 389
that the axis of the mid-brain comes to lie almost at right angles with that of the medulla and that of the first vesicle parallel with it. Finally, a third flexure occurs in the region of the metencephalon and is entirely peculiar to the nervous system; it consists of a bending ventrally of the floor of the hind-brain, the roof of this portion of the brain not being affected by it, and it may consequently be known as the pons flexure (Fig. 233).
 
 
In the later development the pons flexure practically disappears, owing to the development in this region of the transverse fibers and nuclei of the pons, but the mid-brain and nape flexures persist, though greatly reduced in acuteness, the axis of the anterior portion of the adult brain being inclined to that of the medulla at an angle of about 134 degrees.
 
 
The Development of the Myelencephalon.  -  In its posterior portion the myelencephalon closely resembles the spinal cord and has a very similar development. More anteriorly, however, the roof-plate (Fig. 234, rp) widens to form an exceedingly thin membrane, the posterior velum; with the broadening of the roof-plate there is associated a broadening of the dorsal portion of the brain cavity, the dorsal and ventral zones bending outward, until, in the anterior portion of the after-brain, the margins of the dorsal zone have a lateral position, and are, indeed, bent ventrally to form a reflected lip (Fig. 234, I). The portion of the fourth ventricle contained in this division of the brain becomes thus converted into a broad shallow cavity, whose floor is formed by the ventral zones separated in the median line by a deep groove, the floor of which is the somewhat thickened floor-plate. About the fourth month there appears in the roof-plate a transverse groove into which the surrounding mesenchyme dips, and, as the groove deepens in later stages, the mesenchyme contained within it becomes converted into blood-vessels, forming the chorioid plexus of the fourth ventricle, a structure which, as may be seen from its development, does not lie within the cavity of the ventricle, but is separated from it by the portion of the roofplate which forms the floor of the groove.
 
 
In embryos of about 9 mm. the differentiation of the dorsal
 
 
39o
 
 
THE MYELENCEPHALON
 
 
and ventral zones into ependymal and mantle layers is clearly visible (Fig. 234), and in the ventral zone the marginal velum is also well developed. Where the fibers from the sensory ganglion of the vagus nerve enter the dorsal zone an oval area (Fig. 234, fs) is to be seen which is evidently comparable to the oval bundle of the cord and consequently with the fasciculus of Burdach. It gives rise to the solitary fasciculus of adult anatomy, and in embryos of 11 to 13 mm. it becomes covered in by the fusion of the reflected lip of the dorsal zone with the sides of the myelencephalon, this fusion, at the same time, drawing the margins of the roof-plate ventrally to form a
 
 
 
Fig. 234.  -  Transverse Section through the Medulla Oblongata of
an Embryo of 9.1 mm.
 
 
dz, Dorsal zone; fp, floor-plate; /s, fasciculus solitarius; I, lip; rp, roof-plate; vz, ventral
zone; X and XII, tenth and twelfth nerves.  -  (His.)
secondary lip (Fig. 235). Soon after this a remarkable migration ventrally of neuroblasts of the dorsal zone begins. Increasing rapidly in number the migrating cells pass on either side of the solitary fasciculus toward the territory of the ventral zone, and, passing ventrally to the ventral portion of the mantle layer, into which fibers have penetrated and which becomes the formatio reticularis (Fig. 235, fr), they differentiate to form the olivary body (ol).
 
 
The thickening of the floor-plate gives opportunity for fibers to pass across the median line from one side to the other, and this opportunity is taken advantage of at an early stage by the axis-cylin
 
 
THE MYELENCEPHALON
 
 
39 1
 
 
ders of the neuroblasts of the ventral zone, and later, on the establishment of the olivary bodies, other fibers, descending from the cerebellum, decussate in this region to pass to the olivary body of the opposite side. In the lower part of the medulla fibers from the neuroblasts of the nuclei gracilis and cuneatus, which seem to be
 
 
 
ol z*
Fig. 235.  -  Transverse Section through the Medulla Oblongata of an Embryo
of about Eight Weeks.
 
 
av, Ascending root of the trigeminus ;fr, reticular formation; ol, olivary body; sf, solitary
fasciculus; tr, restiform body; XII, hypoglossal nerve.  -  (His.)
developments from the mantle layer of the dorsal zone, also decussate in the substance of the floor-plate; these fibers, known as the arcuate fibers, pass in part to the cerebellum, associating themselves with fibers ascending from the spinal cord and with the olivary fibers to form a round bundle situated in the dorsal portion of the marginal velum and known as the restiform body (Fig. 235, tr).
 
 
The principal differentiations of the zones of the myelencephalon may be stated in tabular form as follows:
Roof-plate Posterior velum.
 
 
(Nuclei of termination of sensory roots of cranial nerves. Nuclei gracilis and cuneatus. The olivary bodies.
 
 
. ( Nuclei of origin of the motor roots of cranial nerves.
 
 
Ventral zones < _,, ...
 
 
I I he reticular formation.
 
 
Foor-plate The median raphe.
 
 
 
 
39 2
 
 
THE CEREBELLUM
 
 
The Development of the Metencephalon and Isthmus.  -  Our knowledge of the development of the metencephalon, isthmus, and mesencephalon is by no means as complete as is that of the myelencephalon. The pons develops as a thickening of the portion of the brain floor which forms the anterior wall of the pons flexure, and its transverse fibers are well developed by the fourth month (Mihalkovicz), but all details regarding the origin of the pons nuclei are as yet wanting. If one may argue from what occurs in the myelencephalon, it seems probable that the reticular formation of the metencephalon is derived from the ventral zone, and that the median raphe represents the floor-plate. Furthermore, the relations of the pons nuclei to the reticular formation on the one hand, and its connection by means of
 
 
 
 
Fig. 236.  -  A, Dorsal View of the Brain or a Rabbit Embryo of 16 mm.; B, Median
Longitudinal Section of a Calf Embryo of 3 cm.
 
 
c, Cerebellum; m, mid-brain.  -  (Mihalkovicz?)
the transverse pons fibers with the cerebellum on the other, suggest the possibility that they may be the metencephalic representatives of the olivary bodies and are formed by a migration ventrally of neuroblasts from the dorsal zones, such a migration having been observed to occur (Essick).
 
 
The cerebellum is formed from the dorsal zones and roof-plate of the metencephalon and is a thickening of the tissue immediately anterior to the front edge of the posterior velum. This latter structure has in early stages a rhomboidal shape (Fig. 236, A) which causes the cerebellar thickening to appear at first as if composed of two lateral portions inclined obliquely toward one another. In reality, however, the thickening extends entirely across the roof of
 
 
THE CEREBELLUM
 
 
393
 
 
the brain (Fig. 236, B), the roof-plate probably being invaded by cells from the dorsal zones and so giving rise to the vermis, while the lobes are formed directly from the dorsal zones. During the second month a groove appears on the ventral surface of each lobe, marking out an area which becomes the flocculus, and later, during the third month, transverse furrows appear upon the vermis dividing it into five lobes, and later still extend out upon the lobes and increase in number to produce the lamellate structure characteristic of the cerebellum.
 
 
The histogenetic development of the cerebellum at first proceeds along the lines which have already been described as typical, but after the development of the mantle layer the cells lining the greater portion of the cavity of the ventricle
rease to rrmltinlv onlv those FlG - 237- -  Diagram Representing the cease to multiply, oniy tnose DifferenT iation of the Cerebellar Cells.
 
 
which are situated in the roof- The circles, indifferent cells; circles with
plate of the metencephalon d °f ' n< r ur . g lia c f s > shaded c ? lls : g™. al
1 r cells; circles with cross, germinal cells in
and along the line of junction mitosis; black cells, nerve-cells. L, Lateral
. , , ,, ,i • i • recess; M, median furrow, and R, floor of IV,
of the cerebellar thickening fourth ven tricle. -  (Schaper.) with the roof-plate continuing
to divide. The indifferent cells formed in these regions migrate outward from the median line and forward in the marginal velum to form a superficial layer, known as the epithelioid layer, and cover the entire surface of the cerebellum (Fig. 237). The cells of this layer, like those of the mantle, differentiate into neuroglia cells and neuroblasts, the latter for the most part migrating centrally at a later stage to mingle with the cells of the mantle layer and to become transformed into the granular cells of the cerebellar cortex. The neuroglia cells remain at the surface, however, forming the principal constituent of the outer or, as it is now termed, the molecular layer of the cortex, and into this the dendrites of the Purkinje cells,
 
 
 
394 THE isthmus
probably derived from the mantle layer, project. The migration of the neuroblasts of the epithelial layer is probably completed before birth, at which time but few remain in the molecular layer to form the stellate cells of the adult. The origin of the dentate and other nuclei of the cerebellum is at present unknown, but it seems probable that they arise from cells of the mantle layer.
 
 
The nerve-fibers which form the medullary substance of the cerebellum do not make their appearance until about the sixth month, when they are to be found in the ependymal tissue on the inner surface of the layer of granular cells. Those which are not commissural or associative in function converge to the line of junction of the cerebellum with the pons, and there pass into the marginal velum of the pons, myelencephalon, or isthmus as the case may be.
 
 
The dorsal surface of the isthmus is at first barely distinguishable from the cerebellum, but as development proceeds its roof-plate undergoes changes similar to those occurring in the medulla oblongata and becomes converted into the anterior velum. In the dorsal portion of its marginal velum fibers passing to and from the cerebellum appear and form the brachia conjunctiva, while ventrally fibers, descending from the more anterior portions of the brain, form the cerebral peduncles. Nothing is at present known as to the history of the gray matter of this division of the brain, although it may be presumed that its ventral zones take part in the formation of the tegmentum, while from its dorsal zones the nuclei of the brachia conjunctiva are possibly derived.
 
 
The following table gives the origin of the principal structures of the metencephalon and isthmus:
Metencephalon. Isthmus.
 
 
/ Posterior velum. Anterior velum.
 
 
^ Vermis of cerebellum.
 
 
 
 
Dorsal zones.
 
 
 
 
Lobes of cerebellum. Brachia conjunctiva.
 
 
Flocculi.
 
 
Nuclei of termination of sensory roots of cranial nerves. Pons nuclei.
 
 
 
 
THE MESENCEPHALON 395
Metencephalon. Isthmus.
 
 
f Nuclei of origin of motor Posterior part of cerebral
Ventral zones -j roots of cranial nerves. peduncles.
 
 
[ Reticular formation. Posterior part of tegmentum.
 
 
Floor-plate Median raphe. Median raphe.
 
 
The Development of the Mesencephalon.  -  Our knowledge of the development of this portion of the brain is again very imperfect. During the stages when the flexures of the brain are well marked (Figs. 232 and 233) it forms a very prominent structure and possesses for a time a capacious cavity. Later, however, it increases in size less rapidly than adjacent parts and its walls thicken, the roofand floor-plates as well as the zones, and, as a result, the cavity becomes the relatively smaller canal-like cerebral aquaeduct. In the marginal velum of its ventral zone fibers appear at about the third month, forming the anterior portion of the cerebral peduncles, and, at the same time, a median longitudinal furrow appears upon the dorsal surface, dividing it into two lateral elevations which, in the fifth month, are divided transversely by a second furrow and are thus converted from corpora bigemina (in which form they are found in the lower vertebrates) into corpora quadrigemina.
 
 
Nothing is known as to the differentiation of the gray matter of the dorsal and ventral zones of the mid-brain. From the relation of the parts in the adult it seems probable that in addition to the nuclei of origin of the oculomotor and trochlear nerves, the ventral zones give origin to the gray matter of the tegmentum, which is the forward continuation of the reticular formation. Similarly it may be supposed that the corpora quadrigemina are developments of the dorsal zones, as may also be the red nuclei, whose relations to the brachia conjunctiva suggest a comparison with the olivary bodies and the nuclei of the pons.
 
 
A tentative scheme representing the origin of the mid-brain structures may be stated thus:
Roof -plate (?)
J Corpora quadrigemina. .LJorsal zones. ...... \ .
 
 
^ Red nuclei.
 
 
[ Nuclei of origin of the third and fourth nerves. Ventral zones \ Anterior part of tegmentum.
 
 
[ Anterior part of cerebral peduncles. Floor-plate Median raphe.
 
 
 
 
396
 
 
THE DIENCEPHALON
 
 
The Development of the Diencephalon.  -  A transverse section through the diencephalon of an embryo of about five weeks (Fig. 238) shows clearly the differentiation of this portion of the brain into the typical zones, the roof-plate (rp) being represented by a thinwalled, somewhat folded area, the floor-plate (fp) by the tissue forming the floor of a well-marked ventral groove, while each lateral wall is divided into a dorsal and ventral zone by a groove known as the sulcus Monroi (Sm), which extends forward and ventrally
toward the point of origin of the optic evagination (Fig. 240). At the posterior end of the ridge-like elevation which represents the roof-plate is a rounded elevation (Fig. 239, p) which, in later stages, elongates until it almost reaches the dermis, forming a hollow evagination of the brain roof known as the pineal process. The distal extremity of this process enlarges to a sac-like structure which later beFig. 238. -  Transverse Section comes lobed, and, by an active pro
of the Diencephalon of an Em- Hferation of the cells lining the cavibryo of Five Weeks. ^
dz, Dorsal zone; fp, floor-plate; tieS ° f the various lobes, finally be
 
 
 
rp, roof-plate; Sm, sulcus Monroi vz, ventral zone.  -  (His.)
 
 
comes a solid structure, the pineal body.
 
 
The more proximal portion of the evagination, remaining hollow, forms the pineal stalk, and the entire structure, body and stalk, constitutes what is known as the epiphysis.
 
 
The significance of this organ in the Mammalia is doubtful. In the Reptilia and other lower forms the outgrowth is double, a secondary outgrowth arising from the base or from the anterior wall of the primary one. This anterior evagination elongates until it reaches the dorsal epidermis of the head, and, there expanding, develops into an unpaired eye, the epidermis which overlies it becoming converted into a transparent cornea. In the Mammalia this anterior process does not develop and the epiphysis in these forms is comparable only to the posterior process of the Reptilia.
 
 
In addition to the epiphysial evaginations, another evagination arises
 
 
THE DIENCEPHALON
 
 
397
 
 
 
from the roof-plate of the first brain vesicle, further forward, in the region which becomes the median portion of the telencephalon. This paraphysis as it has been called, has been observed in the lower vertebrates and in the Marsupials (Selenka), but up to the present has not been found in other groups of the Mammalia. It seems to be comparable to a chorioid plexus which is evaginated from the brain surface instead of being invaginated as is usually the case. There is no evidence that a paraphysis is developed in the human brain.
 
 
The portion of the roof-plate which lies in front of the epiphysis represents the velum interpositum of the adult brain, and it forms at first a distinct ridge (Fig. 239, rp). At an early stage, however, it becomes reduced to a thin membrane upon the surface of which bloodvessels, developing in the surrounding mesenchyme, arrange themselves at about the third month in two longitudinal plexuses, which, with the subjacent portions of the
velum, become invaginated into the „ „,
riG. 239.  -  Dorsal View of the
cavity of the third ventricle to form Brain, the Roof of the Lateral
its chorioid Mexu* Ventricles being Removed, of an
us cnomoia plexus. Embryo of 13.6 mm.
 
 
The dorsal zones thicken in b, Superior brachiuui; eg, lateral
their more dorsal and anterior S eniculate . bod y; C P> chorioid plexus; tneir more aorsai ana anterior cqa> anterior corpu3 quadrigeminum;
portions to form massive Structures, h > hippocampus; hf, hippocampal fis, 7 7 . , sure; ot, thalamus; p, pineal body; rp,
the thatami [rigs. 233, V2, and roof-plate. -  (Aw.)
239, ot), which, encroaching upon
the cavity of the ventricle, transform it into a narrow slit-like
space, so narrow, indeed, that at about the fifth month the inner
surfaces of the two thalami come in contact in the median line,
forming what is known as the intermediate mass. More ventrally
 
 
/, .,
 
 
-\P
 
 
cqn
 
 
398 THE TELENCEPHALON
and posteriorly another thickening of the dorsal zone occurs, giving rise on each side to the pulvinar of the thalamus and to a lateral geniculate body, and two ridges extending backward and dorsally from the latter structures to the thickenings in the roof of the midbrain which represent the anterior corpora quadrigemina, give a path along which the nerve-fibers which constitute the superior quadrigeminal brachia pass.
 
 
From the ventral zones what is known as the hypothalamic region develops, a mass of fibers and cells whose relations and development are not yet clearly understood, but which may be regarded as the forward continuation of the tegmentum and reticular formation. In the median line of the floor of the ventricle an unpaired thickening appears, representing the corpora mamillaria, which during the third month becomes divided by a median furrow into two rounded eminences; but whether these structures and the posterior portion of the tuber cinereum, which also develops from this region of the brain, are. derivatives of the ventral zones or of the floor-plate is as yet uncertain.
 
 
Assuming that the mamillaria and the tuber cinereum are derived from the ventral zones, the origins of the structures formed from the walls of the diencephalon may be tabulated as follows:
^ . , f Velum interpositum.
 
 
Roof-plate < ^ . . . ^
(_ Epiphysis.
 
 
(Thalami. Pulvinares. Lateral geniculate bodies. (Hypothalamic region. Corpora mamillaria. Tuber cinereum (in part) . Floor-plate Tissue of mid-ventral line.
 
 
The Development of the Telencephalon.-  -  For convenience of description the telencephalon may be regarded as consisting of a median portion, which contains the anterior part of the third ventricle, and two lateral outgrowths which constitute the cerebral hemispheres. The roof of the median portion undergoes the same transformation as does the greater portion of that of the diencephalon
 
 
THE TELENCEPHALON 399
and is converted into the anterior part of the velum interpositum (Fig. 240, vi). Anteriorly this passes into the anterior wall of the third ventricle, the lamina terminalis (It), a structure which is to be regarded as formed by the union of the dorsal zones of opposite sides, since it lies entirely dorsal to the anterior end of the sulcus Monroi. From the ventral part of the dorsal zones the optic evaginations are formed, a depression, the optic recess (or), marking their point of origin.
 
 
The ventral zones are but feebly developed, and form the anterior part of the hypothalamic region, while at the anterior extremity of the floor-plate an evagination occurs, the infundibular recess (ir), which elongates to form a funnel-shaped structure known as the hypophysis. At its extremity the hypophysis comes in contact during the fifth week with the enlarged extremity of Rathke's pouch formed by an invagination of the roof of the oral sinus (see p. 285), and applies itself closely to the posterior surface of this (Fig. 233) to form with it the pituitary body. The anterior lobe at an early stage separates from the mucous membrane of the oral sinus, the stalk by which it was attached completely disappearing, and toward the end of the second month it begins to send out processes from its walls into the surrounding mesenchyme and so becomes converted into a mass of solid epithelial cords embedded in a mesenchyme rich in blood and lymphatic vessels. The cords later on divide transversely to a greater or less extent to form alveoli, the entire structure coming to resemble somewhat the parathyreoid bodies (see p. 297), and, like these, having the function of producing an internal secretion. The posterior lobe, derived from the brain, retains its connection with that structure, its stalk being the injundibidum, but its terminal portion does not undergo such extensive modifications as does the anterior lobe, although it is claimed that it gives rise to a glandular epithelium which may become arranged so as to form alveoli.
 
 
The cerebral hemispheres are formed from the lateral portions of the dorsal zones, each possessing also a prolongation of the roofplate. From the more ventral portion of each dorsal zone there is
 
 
400 THE TELENCEPHALON
formed a thickening, the corpus striatum (Figs. 240, cs, and 233, VI 2), a structure which is for the telencephalon what the optic thalamus is for the diencephalon, while from the more dorsal portion there is formed the remaining or mantle (pallial) portions of the hemispheres (Figs. 240, h, and 233, VI 4). When first formed, the hemispheres are slight evaginations from the median portion of the telencephalon, the openings by which their cavities communicate with the third ventricle, the interventricular foramina, being relatively very large (Fig. 240), but, in later stages (Fig. 233), the hemispheres increase more markedly and eventually surpass all the other portions of the
 
 
<y
 
 
 
-  •■/
 
 
Fig. 240.  -  Median Longitudinal Section of the Brain of an Embryo of 16.3 mm. br, Anterior brachium; eg, corpus geniculatum laterale; cs, corpus striatum; h, cerebral hemisphere; ir, infundibular recess; It, lamina terminalis; or, optic recess; ot, thalamus; p, pineal process; sm, sulcus Monroi; st, hypothalamic region; vi, velum interpositum.  -  (His.)
brain in magnitude, overlapping and completely concealing the roof and sides of the diencephalon and mesencephalon and also the anterior surface of the cerebellum. In this enlargement, however, the interventricular foramina share only to a slight extent, and consequently become relatively smaller (Fig. 233), forming in the adult merely slit-like openings lying between the lamina terminalis and the thalami and having for their roof the anterior portion of the velum interpositum.
 
 
The velum Interpositum  -  that is to say, the roof-plate  -  where
 
 
THE TELENCEPHALON
 
 
401
 
 
it forms the roof of the interventricular foramen, is prolonged out upon the dorsal surface of each hemisphere, and, becoming invaginated, forms upon it a groove.' As the hemispheres, increasing in height, develop a mesial wall, the groove, which is the so-called chorioidal fissure, comes to lie along the ventral edge of this wall, and as the growth of the hemispheres continues it becomes more and more elongated, being carried at first backward (Fig. 241), then ventrally, and finally forward to end at the tip of the temporal lobe. After the establishment of the grooves the mesenchyme in their vicinity dips into them, and, developing blood-vessels, becomes the chorioid plexuses of the lateral ventricles, and at first these plexuses grow much more rapidly than the ventricles, and so fill them almost completely. Later, however, the walls of the hemispheres gain the ascendancy in rapidity of growth and the plexuses become relatively much smaller. Since the portions of the roof-plate which form the chorioidal fissures are continuous with the velum interpositum in the roofs of the interventricular foramina, the chorioid plexuses of the lateral and third ventricles become continuous also at that point.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 241.
 
 
 
 
-Median Longitudinal Section of the Brain of an Embryo Calf of 5 cm.
 
 
cb, Cerebellum; cp, chorioid plexus; cs, corpus striatum; JM, interventricular foramen; in, The mode of growth of the chorioid hypophysis; m, mid-brain; oc, , optic commissure; t, posterior
fissures seems to indicate the mode of par t of the diencephalon  -  growth of the hemispheres. At first the Wihalkovicz.) growth is more or less equal in all directions, but later it becomes more extensive posteriorly, there being more room for expansion in that direction, and when further extension backward becomes difficult the posterior extremities of the hemispheres bend ventrally toward the base of the cranium, and reaching this, turn forward to form the temporal lobes. As a result the cavities of the hemispheres, the lateral ventricles, in addition to being carried forward to form an anterior horn, are also carried backward and ventrally to form the lateral or descending horn, and the corpus striatum likewise extends 26
 
 
402 THE TELENCEPHALON
backward to the tip of each temporal lobe as a slender process known as" the tail of the caudate nucleus. In addition to the anterior and lateral horns, the ventricles of the human brain also possess posterior horns extending backward into the occipital portions of the hemispheres, these portions, on account of the greater persistence of the mid-brain flexure (see p. 388), being enabled to develop to a greater extent than in the lower mammals.
 
 
The scheme of the origin of parts in the telencephalon may be stated as follows:
Median Part. Hemispheres.
 
 
„ , , f Anterior part of velum inter- f _ , n ..,,,.
 
 
Roof-plate < . < Moor of chonoidai nssure.
 
 
(^ positum. [
r , . ... Pallium.
 
 
-r. , Lamina terminahs. _
Dorsal zones â– (_... < Corpus striatum.
 
 
Optic evaginations. _,, , , . ..
 
 
> . , . Olfactory lobes (see p. 406)
Anterior part of hypothalamic [
Ventral zones < region.
 
 
[ Anterior part of tuber cinereum.
 
 
The Convolutions of the Hemispheres.  -  The growth of the hemispheres to form the voluminous structures found in the adult depends mainly upon an increase of size of the pallium. The corpus striatum, although it takes part in the elongation of each hemisphere, nevertheless does not increase in other directions as rapidly and extensively as the pallium, and hence, even in very early stages, a depression appears upon the surface of the hemispheres where the corpus is situated (Fig. 242). This depression is the lateral cerebral fossa, and for a considerable period it is the only sign of inequality of growth on the outer surfaces of the hemispheres. Upon the mesial surfaces, however, at about the time that the choroid fissure appears, another linear depression is formed dorsal to the chorioid, and when fully formed extends from in front of the interventricular foramen to the tip of the temporal lobe (Fig. 244, h). It affects the entire thickness of the pallial wall and consequently produces an elevation upon the inner surface, a projection into the cavity of the ventricle which is known as the hippocampus, whence
 
 
THE CEREBRAL CONVOLUTIONS
 
 
403
 
 
the fissure may be termed the hippocampal fissure. The portion of the pallium which intervenes between this fissure and the chorioidal forms what is known as the dentate gyrus.
 
 
Toward the end of the third or the beginning of the fourth month two prolongations arise from the fissure just where it turns to be continued into the temporal lobe, and these, extending posteriorly, give rise to the parieto-occipital and calcarine fissures. Like the hippocampal, these fissures produce elevations upon the inner surface of the pallium, that formed by the parieto-occipital early disappearing, while that produced by the calcarine persists to form the calcar (hippocampus minor) of adult anatomy.
 
 
The three fissures just described, together with the chorioidal and the lateral cerebral fossa, are all formed by the beginning of the fourth month and all the fissures affect the entire thickness of the wall of the hemisphere, and hence have been termed the primary or total fissures. Until the beginning of the fifth
month they are the only fissures present, but at that time secondary fissures, which, with one exception, are merely furrows of the surface of the pallium, make their appearance and continue to form until birth and possibly later. Before considering these, however, certain changes which occur in the neighborhood of the lateral cerebral fossa may be described.
 
 
The fossa is at first a triangular depression situated above the temporal lobe on the surface of the hemisphere. During the fourth month it deepens considerably, so that its upper and lower margins become more pronounced and form projecting folds, and, during the fifth month, these two folds approach one another and eventually
 
 
 
Fig. 242.  -  Brain of an Embryo of the
Fourth Month. c, Cerebellum; p, pons; s, lateral cerebral fossa.
 
 
 
 
404
 
 
TEE CEREBRAL CONVOLUTIONS
 
 
cover in the floor of the fossa completely, the groove which marks the line of their contact forming the lateral cerebral fissure, while the floor of the fossa becomes known as the insula.
 
 
The first of the secondary fissures to appear is the sulcus cinguli, which is formed about the middle of the fifth month on the mesial surface of the hemispheres, lying parallel to the anterior portion of the hippocampal fissure and dividing the mesial surface into the gyri marginalis and fornicatus. A little later, at the beginning of the sixth month, several other fissures make their appearance upon
 
 
ptc
 
 
 
Fig. 243.  -  Cerebral Hemisphere oe an Embryo of about the Seventh Month. fs, Superior frontal sulcus; ip, interparietal; IR, insula; pet, inferior pre-central; pes, superior pre-central; ptc, post-central; R, central; S, lateral; t 1 , first temporal.  -  (Cunningham )
 
 
the outer surface of the pallium, the chief of these being the central sulcus, the inter-parietal, the pre- and post-central, and the temporal sulci, the most ventral of these last running parallel with the lower portion of the hippocampal fissure and differing from the others in forming a ridge on the wall of the ventricle termed the collateral eminence, whence the fissure is known as the collateral. The position of most of these fissures may be seen from Fig. 243, and for a more
 
 
THE CORPUS CALLOSUM
 
 
405
 
 
complete description of them reference may be had to text-books of descriptive anatomy.
 
 
In later stages numerous tertiary fissures make their appearance and mask more or less extensively the secondaries, than which they are, as a rule, much more inconstant in position and shallower. The Corpus Callosum and Fornix.  -  While these fissures have been forming, important structures have developed in connection with the lamina terminalis. Up to about the fourth month the lamina is thin and of nearly uniform thickness throughout, but at this time it begins to thicken near its dorsal edge and fibers appear in the thickening. These fibers belong to three sets. In the first place, certain of them arise in connection with the olfactory tracts (see p. 407) and from the region of the hippocampal gyrus, which is also associated with the olfactory sense, and, passing through tbe substance of the lamina terminalis, they extend across the median line to the corresponding regions of the opposite cerebral hemisphere. They are therefore commissural fibers and form what is termed the anterior commissure (Figs. 244, ca and 245, ac). Secondly, fibers, which have their origin from the cells of the hippocampus, develop along the chorioidal edge of that structure, forming what is termed the fimbria. They follow along the edge of the chorioidal fissure and, when this reaches the interventricular foramen, they enter as the pillars of the fornix (Figs. 244, cf; Fig. 245,/) the substance of the lamina terminalis and, passing ventrally in it, eventually reach the hypothalamic region, where they terminate in the corpora mammillaria.
 
 
Thirdly, as the mantle develops fibers radiate from all parts of it toward the dorsal portion of the lamina terminalis and traversing it are distributed to the corresponding portions of the mantle of the opposite side. There fibers are also commissural in character and form the corpus callosum (Figs. 244 and 245, cc). With the development of these three sets of fibers and especially those forming the corpus callosum, the dorsal portion of the lamina terminalis becomes enlarged so as to form a triangular area extending between the two cerebral hemispheres (Fig. 245), the corpus callosum form
 
 
4<o6
 
 
THE CORPUS CALLOSUM
 
 
ing its dorsal portion and base, which is directed anteriorly, the pillars of the fornix its ventral portion, while the anterior commissure occupies its ventral anterior angle.
 
 
The portion of the triangle included between the callosum and the fornix remains thin and forms the septum pellucidum, and a split occurring in the center of this gives rise to the so-called^///* ventricle,
which, from its mode of formation, is a completely closed cavity and is not lined with ependymal tissue of the same nature as that found in the other ventricles.
 
 
Owing to the very considerable size reached by the triangular area whose history has just been described, important changes are wrought in the adjoining portions of the mesial surface of the hemispheres. Before the development of the area the gyrus dentatus and the hippocampus extend forward into the anterior portion of the hemispheres (Fig. 244), but on account of their position they become encroached upon by the enlargement of the corpus callosum, with the result that the hippocampus becomes practically obliterated in that portion of its course which lies in the region occupied by the corpus callosum, its fissure in this region becoming known as the callosal fissure, while the corresponding portions of the dentate gyrus become reduced to narrow and insignificant bands of nerve tissue which rest upon the upper surface of the corpus callosum and are known as the lateral longitudinal stria.
 
 
The Olfactory Lobes.  -  At the time when the cerebral hemispheres
 
 
 
Fig. 244.  -  Median Longitudinal Section or the Brain of an Embryo of Four Months.
 
 
c, Calcarine fissure; ca, anterior commissure; cc, corpus callosum; cf. chorioidal fissure; dg, dentate gyrus; fm, interventricular foramen; h, hippocampal fissure; po, parieto-o c c i p i t a 1 fissure.  -  (Mihalkovicz.)
 
 
THE OLFACTORY LOBES
 
 
407
 
 
 
begin to enlarge  -  that it to say, at about the fourth week  -  a slight furrow, which appears on the ventral surface of each anteriorly, marks off an area which, continuing to enlarge with the hemispheres, gradually becomes constricted off from them to form a distinct lobelike structure, the olfactory lobe (Fig. 233, VI 3). In most of the lower mammalia these lobes reach a very considerable size, and consequently have been regarded as constituting an additional division of the brain, known as the rhinencephalon, but in man they remain smaller, and although they are at first hollow, containing prolongations from the lateral ventricles, the cavities later on disappear and the lobes become solid. Each lobe becomes differentiated into two portions, its terminal portion becoming converted into the club-shaped structure, the olfactory bulb and stalk, while its proximal portion gives rise to the olfactory tracts, the trigone, and the anterior perforated substance.
 
 
Histogenesis of the Cerebral Cortex.  -  A satisfactory study of the histogenesis of the cortex has not yet been made. In embryos of three months a marginal velum is present and probably gives rise to the stratum zonale of the adult brain; beneath this is a cellular layer, perhaps representing the mantle layer; beneath this, again, a layer of nerve-fibers is beginning to appear, representing the white substance of the pallium; and, finally, lining the ventricle is an ependymal layer. In embryos of the fifth month, toward the innermost part of the second layer, cells are beginning to differentiate into the large pyramidal cells, but almost nothing is known as to the
 
 
Fig. 245.  -  Median Longitudinal Section of the Brain oe an Embryo of the Fifth Month.
 
 
ac, Anterior commissure; cc, corpus callosum; dg, dentate gyrus;/, fornix; i, infundibulum; mc, intermediate mass; si, septum pellucidum; vi, velum interpositum.  -  (Mihal
kovicz.)
 
 
408 THE SPINAL NERVES
origin of the other layers recognizable in the adult cortex, nor is it known whether any migration, similar to what occurs in the cerebellar cortex, takes place. The fibers of the white substance do not begin to acquire their myelin sheaths until toward the end of the ninth month, and the process is not completed until some time after birth (Flechsig), while the fibers of the cortex continue to undergo myelination until comparatively late in life (Kaes).
 
 
The Development of the Spinal Nerves.  -  It has already been seen that there is a fundamental difference in the mode of development of the two roots of which the typical spinal nerves are composed, the ventral root being formed by axis-cylinders which arise from neuroblasts situated within the substance of the spinal cord, while the dorsal roots arise from the cells of the neural crests, their axiscylinders growing into the substance of the cord while their dendrites become prolonged peripherally to form the sensory fibers of the nerves. Throughout the thoracic, lumbar and sacral regions of the cord the fibers which grow out from the anterior horn cells converge to form a single nerve-root in each segment, but in the cervical region fibers which arise from the more laterally situated neuroblasts make their exit from the cord independently of the more ventral neuroblasts and form the roots of the spinal accessory nerve (see p. 416). In the cervical region there are accordingly three sets of nerve-roots, the dorsal, lateral, and ventral sets.
 
 
In a typical spinal nerve, such as one of the thoracic series, the dorsal roots as they grow peripherally pass ventrally as well as outward, so that they quickly come into contact with the ventral roots with whose fibers they mingle, and the mixed nerve so formed soon after divides into two trunks, a dorsal one, which is distributed to the dorsal musculature and integument, and a larger ventral one. The ventral division as it continues its outward growth soon reaches the dorsal angle of the pleuro-peritoneal cavity, where it divides, one branch passing into the tissue of the body- wall while the other passes into the splanchnic mesoderm. The former branch, continuing its onward course in the body- wall, again divides, one branch becoming the lateral cutaneous nerve, while the other continues inward to
 
 
THE CRANIAL NERVES 409
terminate in the median ventral portion of the body as the anterior cutaneous nerve. The splanchnic branch forms a ramus communicans to the sympathetic system and will be considered more fully later on.
 
 
The conditions just described are those which obtain throughout the greater part of the thoracic region. Elsewhere the fibers of the ventral divisions of the nerves as they grow outward tend to separate from one another and to become associated with the fibers of adjacent nerves, giving rise to plexuses. In the regions where the limbs occur the formation of the plexuses is also associated with a shifting of the parts to which the nerves are supplied, a factor in plexus formation which is, however, much more evident from comparative anatomical than from embryological studies.
 
 
The Development of the Cranial Nerves. -  During the last thirty years the cranial nerves have received a great deal of attention in connection with the idea that an accurate knowledge of their development would afford a clue to a most vexed problem of vertebrate morphology, the metamerism of the head. That the metamerism which was so pronounced in the trunk should extend into the head was a natural supposition, strengthened by the discovery of head-cavities in the lower vertebrates and by the indications of metamerism seen in the branchial arches, and the problem which presented itself was the correlation of the various structures belonging to each metamere and the determination of the modifications which they had undergone during the evolution of the head.
 
 
In the trunk region a nerve forms a conspicuous element of each metamere and is composed, according to what is known as Bell's law, of a ventral or efferent and a dorsal or afferent root. Until comparatively recently the study of the cranial nerves has been dominated by the idea that it was possible to extend the application of Bell's law to them and to recognize in the cranial region a number of nerve pairs serially homologous with the spinal nerves, some of them, however, having lost their afferent roots, while in others a dislocation, as it were, of the two roots had occurred.
 
 
The results obtained from investigation along this line have not,
 
 
4IO . THE CRANIAL NERVES
however, proved entirely satisfactory, and facts have been elucidated which seem to show that it is not possible to extend Bell's law, in its usual form at least, to the cranial nerves. It has been found that it is not sufficient to recognize simply afferent and efferent roots, but these must be analyzed into further components, and when this is done it is found that in the series of cranial nerves certain components occur which are not represented in the nerves of the spinal series.
 
 
Before proceeding to a description of these components it will be well to call attention to a matter already alluded to in a previous chapter (p, 84) in connection with the segmentation of the mesoderm of the head. It has been pointed out that while there exist "head-cavities" which are serially homologous with the mesodermal somites of the trunk, there has been imposed upon this primary cranial metamerism a secondary metamerism represented by the branchiomeres associated with the branchial arches, and, it may be added, this secondary metamerism has become the more prominent of the two, the primary one, as it developed, gradually slipping into the background until, in the higher vertebrates, it has become to a very considerable extent rudimentary. In accordance with this double metamerism it is necessary to recognize two sets of cranial muscles, one derived from the cranial myotomes and represented by the muscles of the eyeball, and one derived from the branchiomeric mesoderm, and it is necessary also to recognize for these two sets of muscles two sets of motor nerves, so that, with the dorsal or sensory nerve-roots, there are altogether three sets of nerve-roots in the cranial region instead of only two, as in the spinal region.
 
 
These three sets of roots are readily recognizable both in the embryonic and in the adult brain, especially if attention be directed to the cell groups or nuclei with which they are associated (Fig. 246). Thus there can be recognized: (1) a series of nuclei from which nerve-fibers arise, situated in the floor of the fourth ventricle and aquaeduct close to the median line and termed the ventral motor nuclei; (2) a second series of nuclei of origin, situated more laterally
 
 
THE CRANIAL NERVES
 
 
411
 
 
and in the substance of the formatio reticularis, and known as the lateral motor nuclei; and (3) a series of nuclei in which afferent nervefibers terminate, situated still more laterally in the floor of the ventricle and forming the dorsal or sensory nuclei. None of the twelve cranial nerves usually recognized in the text-books contains fibers associated with all three of these nuclei; the fibers from the lateral motor nuclei almost invariably unite with sensory fibers to form a
 
 
 
Fig. 246.  -  Transverse Section through the Medulla Oblongata of an Embryo of 10 mm., showing the Nuclei of Origin of the Vagus (X) and Hypoglossal (XII) Nerves.  -  (His.)
mixed nerve, but those from all the ventral motor nuclei form independent roots, while the olfactory and auditory nerves alone, of all the sensory roots (omitting for the present the optic nerve), do not contain fibers from either of the series of motor nuclei. The relations of the various cranial nerves to the nuclei may be seen from the following table, in which the + sign indicates the presence and the  -  sign the absence of fibers from the nuclear series under which it stands':
 
 
412
 
 
THE CRANIAL NERVES
 
 
Number
 
Name
 
Ventral Motor
 
Lateral Motor
 
Sensory
 
I.
 
 
 
Olfactory.
 
 
 
_
 
 
 
 
+
 
III.
 
 
 
Oculomotor.
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
 
 
TV.
 
 
 
Trochlear.
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
 
 
V.
 
 
 
Trigeminus.
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
+
 
VI
 
Abducens.
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
 
 
VII.
 
 
 
Facial.
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
+
 
VIII.
 
 
 
Auditory.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
IX.
 
 
 
Glossopharyngeal.
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
+
 
X.
 
 
XI.
 
 
 
Vagus. 1 Spinal Accessory. J
 
 
 
+
 
+
 
 
Two nerves  -  namely, the second and twelfth  -  have been omitted from the above table. Of these, the second or optic nerve undoubtedly belongs to ah entirely different category from the other peripheral nerves, and will be considered in the following chapter in connection with the sense-organ with which it is associated (see especially p. 460). The twelfth or hypoglossal nerve, on the other hand, really belongs to the spinal series and has only secondarily been taken up into the cranial region in the higher vertebrates. It has already been seen (p. 170) that the bodies of four vertebrae are included in the basioccipital bone, and that three of the nerves corresponding to these vertebrae are represented in the adult by the hypoglossal and the fourth by the first cervical or suboccipital nerve. The dorsal roots of the hypoglossal nerves seem to have almost disappeared, although a ganglion has been observed in embryos of 7 and 10 mm. in the posterior part of the hypoglossal region (His), and probably represents the dorsal root of the most posterior portion of the hypoglossal nerve. This ganglion disappears, as a rule, in later stages, and it is interesting to note that the ganglion of the suboccipital nerve is also occasionally wanting in the adult condition. The hypoglossal roots are to be regarded, then, as equivalent to the ventral roots of the cervical spinal nerves, and the nuclei from which they arise lie in series with the cranial ventral motor roots, a
 
 
THE CRANIAL NERVES 413
fact which indicates the equivalency of these latter with the fibers which arise from the neuroblasts of the anterior horns of the spinal cord.
 
 
The equivalents of the lateral motor roots may more conveniently be considered later on, but it may be pointed out here that these are the fibers which are distributed to the muscles of the branchiomeres. In the case of the sensory nerves a further analysis is necessary before their equivalents in the spinal series can be determined. For this the studies which have been made in recent years of the components entering into the cranial nerves of the amphibia (Strong) and fishes (Herrick) must supply a basis, since as yet a direct analysis of the mammalian nerves has not been made. In the forms named it has been found that three different components enter into the formation of the dorsal roots of the cranial nerves: (i) fibers belonging to a general cutaneous or somatic sensory system, distributed to the skin without being connected with any special sense-organs; (2) fibers belonging to what is termed the communis or viscerosensory system, distributed to the walls of the mouth and pharyngeal region and to special organs found in the skin of the same character as those occurring in the mouth; and (3) fibers belonging to a special set of cutaneous sense-organs largely developed in the fishes and known as the organs of the lateral line.
 
 
The fibers of the somatic sensory system converge to a group of cells, situated in the lateral part of the floor of the fourth ventricle and forming what is termed the trigeminal lobe, and also extend posteriorly in the substance of the medulla (Fig. 247), forming what has been termed the spinal root of the trigeminus and terminating in a column of cells which represents the forward continuation of the posterior horn of the cord. In the fishes and amphibia fibers belonging to this system are to be found in the fifth, seventh, and tenth nerves, but in the mammalia their distribution has apparently become more limited, being confined almost exclusively to the trigeminus, of whose sensory divisions they form a very considerable part. Since the cells around which the fibers of the spinal root of the trigeminus terminate are the forward continuations of the posterior
 
 
414
 
 
THE CRANIAL NERVES
 
 
horn of the cord, it seems probable that the fibers of this system are the cranial representatives of the posterior roots of the spinal nerves, which, it may be noted, are also somatic in their distribution. The fibers of the viscero-sensory system are found in the lower forms principally in the ninth and tenth nerves (see Fig. 247), although groups of them are also incorporated in the seventh and fifth. They converge to a mass of cells, known as the lobus vagi, and like the first set are also continued down the medulla to form
 
 
 
rix
 
 
Fig. 247. -  Diagrams showing the Sensory Components of the Cranial Nerves
of a Fish (Menidia) . The somatic sensory system is unshaded, the viscero-sensory is cross-hatched, and the lateral line system is black, asc.v, Spinal root of trigeminus; brx, branchial branches of vagus; Ix, lobus vagi; ol, olfactory bulb; op, optic nerve; rc.x, cutaneous branch of the vagus; rix, intestinal branch of vagus; rl, lateral line nerve; rl.acc, accessory lateral line nerve; ros, superficial ophthalmic; rp, ramus palatinus of the facial; thy, hyomandibular branch of the facial; t.inf, infraorbital nerve.  -  (Herrick.)
a tract known as the fasciculus solitarius or: fasciculus communis. In the mammalia the system is represented by the sensory fibers of the glosso-pharyngeo-vagus set of nerves, of which it represents practically the entire mass; by the sensory fibers of the facial arising from the geniculate ganglion and included in the chorda tympani and probably also the great superficial petrosal; and also, probably, by
 
 
THE CRANIAL NERVES 415
the lingual branch of the trigeminus. Furthermore, since the mucous membrane of the palate is supplied by branches from the trigeminus which pass by way of the spheno-palatine (Meckel's) ganglion, and the same region is supplied in lower forms by a palatine branch from the facial, it seems probable that the palatine nerves of the mammalia are also to be assigned to this system.* If this be the case, a very evident clue is afforded to the homologies of the system in the spinal nerves, for since the spheno-palatine ganglion is to be regarded as part of the sympathetic system, the sensory fibers which pass from the viscera to the spinal cord by way of the sympathetic system (p. 420) present relations practically identical with those of the palatine nerves.
 
 
Finally, with regard to the system of the lateral line, there seems but little doubt that it has no representation whatsoever in the spinal nerves. It is associated with a peculiar system of cutaneous senseorgans found only in aquatic or marine animals, and also with the auditory and possibly the olfactory organs, the former of which are certainly and the latter possibly primarily parts of the lateral line system of organs. The organs are principally confined to the head, although they also extend upon the trunk, where they are followed by a branch from the vagus nerve, the entire system being accordingly supplied by cranial nerves. In the fishes, in which the development of the organs is at a maximum, fibers belonging to the system are found in all the branchiomeric nerves and all converge to a portion of the medulla known as the tuberculum acusticum. In the Mammalia, with the disappearance of the lateral line organs there has been a disappearance of the associated nerves, and the only certain representative of the system which persists is the auditory nerve.
 
 
The table given on page 412 may now be expanded as follows, though it must be recognized that such an analysis of the mammalian nerves is merely a deduction from what has been observed in lower
* The fact that the palatine branches are associated with the trigeminus in the Mammalia and with the facial in the Amphibia is readily explained by the fact that in the latter the Gasserian and geniculate ganglia are not always separated, so that it is possible for fibers originating from the compound ganglion to pass into either
 
 
416
 
 
THE CRANIAL NERVES
 
 
forms, and may require some modifications when the components have been subjected to actual observation:
 
 
Nerve
 
Ventral
 
Lateral
 
Somatic
 
Visceral
 
Lateral
 
Motor
 
Motor
 
Sensory
 
Sensory
 
Line
 
I.
 
 
 
 
 
_
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
III.
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
IV.
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
V.
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
+
 
+
 
 
 
VI.
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
vii.
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
VIII.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
IX.]
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
X.
 
 
 
 
 
+
 
+
 
+
 
 
 
XL J
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
XII.
 
 
 
+
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Spinal.
 
 
 
+
 
(?)
 
+
 
+
 
 
 
 
An additional word is necessary concerning the spinal accessory nerve, for it presents certain interesting relations which possibly furnish a clue to the spinal equivalents of the lateral motor roots. In the first place, the neuroblasts which give rise to those fibers of the nerve which come from the spinal cord are situated in the dorsal part of the ventral zones. As the nuclei of origin are traced anteriorly they will be found to change their position somewhat as the medulla is reached and eventually come to lie in the reticular formation, the most anterior of them being practically continuous with the motor nucleus of the vagus. Indeed, it seems that the spinal accessory nerve is properly to be regarded as an extension of the vagus downward into the cervical region (Furbringer, Streeter), a process which reaches its greatest development in the mammalia and seems to-stand in relation to the development of those portions of the trapezius and sterno-mastoid muscles which are supplied by the spinal accessory nerve.
 
 
It is believed that the white rami communicantes which pass from the spinal cord to the thoracic and upper lumbar sympathetic
 
 
THE CRANIAL NERVES 417
ganglia arise from cells situated in the dorso-lateral portions of the ventral horns, and it is noteworthy that white rami are wanting in the region in which the spinal accessory nerve occurs. Since this nerve represents a cranial lateral motor root the temptation is great to regard the cranial lateral motor roots as equivalent to the white rami of the cord, and this temptation is intensified when it is recalled that there are both embryological and topographical reasons for regarding the branchiomeric muscles, to which the cranial lateral motor nerves are supplied, as equivalent to the visceral muscles of the trunk. But in view of the fact that a sympathetic neurone is always interposed between a white ramus fiber and the visceral musculature (see Fig. 249), while the lateral motor fibers connect directly with the branchiomeric musculature, it seems advisable to await further studies before yielding to the temptation.
 
 
As regards the actual development of the cranial nerves, they follow the general law which obtains for the spinal nerves, the motor fibers being outgrowths from neuroblasts situated in the walls of the neural tube, while the sensory nerves are outgrowths from the cells of ganglia situated without the tube. In the lower vertebrates a series of thickenings, known as the suprabranchial placodes, are developed from the ectoderm along a line corresponding with the level of the auditory invagination, while on a line corresponding with the upper extremities of the branchial clefts another series occurs which has been termed that of the epibranchial placodes, and with both of these sets of placodes the cranial nerves are in connection. In the human embryo epibranchial placodes have been found in connection with the fifth, seventh, ninth and tenth nerves, to whose ganglia they contribute cells. The suprabranchial placodes, which in the lower vertebrates are associated with the lateral line nerves, are unrepresented in man, unless, as has been maintained, the sense-organs of the internal ear are their representatives.
 
 
From what has been said above it is clear that the usual arrangement of the cranial nerves in twelve pairs does not represent their true relationships with one another. The various pairs are serially homologous neither
27
 
 
418 THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM
with one another nor with the typical spinal nerves, nor can they be regarded as representing twelve cranial segments. Indeed, it would seem that comparatively little information with regard to the number of myotomic segments which have fused together to form the head is to be derived from the cranial nerves, for while there are only four of these nerves which are associated with structures equivalent to the mesodermic somites of the trunk, a much greater number of head cavities or mesodermic somites has been observed in the cranial region of the embryos of the lower vertebrates, Dohrn, for instance, having found nineteen and Killian eighteen in the cranial region of Torpedo. Furthermore, it is not possible to say at present whether the branchiomeres and their associated nerves correspond with one or several of the cranial mesodermic somites, or whether, indeed, any correspondence whatever exists.
 
 
In early stages of development a series of constrictions have been observed in the cranial portion of the neural tube and have been regarded as indicating a primitive segmentation of that structure. The neuromeres, as the intervals between successive constrictions have been termed, seem to correspond with the cranial nerves as usually recognized and hence cannot be regarded as primitive segmental structures. They are more probably secondary and due to the arrangement of the neuroblasts corresponding to the various nerves.
 
 
The Development of the Sympathetic Nervous System.  - 
From the embryological standpoint the distinction which has been generally recognized between the sympathetic and central nervous systems does not exist, the former having been found to be an outgrowth from the latter. This mode of origin has been observed with especial clearness in the embryos of some of the lower vertebrates, in which masses of cells have been seen to separate from the posterior root ganglia to form the ganglia of the ganglionated cord (Fig. 248). In the mammalia, including man, the relations of the two sets of ganglia to one another is by no means so apparent, since the sympathetic cells, instead of being separated from the posterior root ganglion en masse, migrate from it singly or in groups, and are therefore less readily distinguishable from the surrounding mesodermal tissues.
 
 
To understand the development of the sympathetic system it must be remembered that it consists typically of three sets of ganglia. One of these is constituted by the ganglia of the ganglionated cord (Fig. 249, GC), the second is represented by the ganglia of the
 
 
THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM
 
 
419
 
 
'"v
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
^
 
 
 
 
 
 
â– 
 
 
Fig. 248.  -  Transverse Section through an Embryo Shark (Scyllium) of ii mm.,
SHOWING THE ORIGIN OF A SYMPATHETIC GANGLION.
 
 
Ch, Notochord; E, ectoderm; G, posterior root ganglion; Gs, sympathetic ganglion; .1/,
spinal cord.  -  (Onodi.)
 
 
420
 
 
THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM
 
 
prevertebral plexuses (PVG), such as the cardiac, solar, hypogastric, and pelvic, while the third or peripheral set (PG) is formed by the cells which occur throughout the tissues of probably most of the visceral organs, either in small groups or scattered through plexuses such as the Auerbach and Meissner plexuses of the intestine. Each cell in these various ganglia stands in direct contact with the axiscylinder of a cell situated in the central nervous system, probably in the lateral horn of the spinal cord or the corresponding region of the brain, so that each cell forms the terminal link of a chain whose first link is a neurone belonging to the central system (Huber) . Through
 
 
 
Fig. 249.  -  Diagram showing the Arrangement of the Neurones of the Sympathetic System. The fibers from the posterior root ganglia are represented by the broken black lines; those from the anterior horn cells by the solid black; the white rami by red; and the sympathetic neurones by blue. DR, Dorsal ramus of spinal nerve; GC, ganglionated cord; GR, gray ramus communicans; PG, peripheral ganglion; PVG, prsevertebral ganglion; VR, ventral ramus of spinal nerve; WR, white ramus communicans.  -  (Adapted from Huber.)
out the thoracic and upper lumbar regions of the body the central system neurones form distinct cords known as the white rami communicantes (Fig. 249, WR), which pass from the spinal nerves to the adjacent ganglia of the ganglionated cord, some of them terminating around the cells of these ganglia, others passing on to the cells of the prsevertebral ganglia, and others to those of the peripheral plexuses. In the cervical, lower lumbar and sacral regions white rami are wanting, the central neurones in the first-named region probably making their way to the sympathetic cells by way of the upper
 
 
THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM
 
 
421
 
 
thoracic nerves, while in the lower regions they may pass down the ganglionated cord from higher regions or may join the prevertebral and peripheral ganglia directly without passing through the proximal ganglia. In addition to these white rami, what are known as gray rami also extend between the proximal ganglia and the spinal nerves; these are composed of fibers, arising from sympathetic cells,
 
 
 
Fig. 250.  -  Transverse Section through the Spinal Cord of an Embryo of 7 mm.
 
 
c, Notochord; g, posterior root ganglion; m, spinal cord; s, sympathetic cell migrating
from the posterior root ganglion; wr, white ramus.-  -  (His.)
which join the spinal nerves in order to pass with them to their ultimate distribution.
 
 
The brief description here given applies especially to the sympathetic system of the neck and trunk. Representatives of the system are also found in the head, in the form of a series of ganglia connected with the trigeminal and facial nerves and known as the ciliary, spheno-palatine, otic, and submaxillary ganglia; and, as will
 
 
422 THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM
be seen later, there are probably some sympathetic cells which owe their origin to the root ganglia of the vagus and glossopharyngeal nerves. There is nothing, however, in the head region corresponding to the longitudinal bundles of fibers which unite the various proximal ganglia of the trunk to form the ganglionated cord.
 
 
The first distinct indications of the sympathetic system are to be seen in a human embryo of about 7 mm. As the spinal nerves reach the level of the dorsal edge of the body-cavity, they branch, one of the branches continuing ventrally in the body-wall, while the other (Fig 250, wr) passes mesially toward the aorta, some of its fibers reaching that structure, while others bend so as to assume a longitudinal direction. These mesial branches represent the white rami communicantes, but as yet no ganglion cells can be seen in their course. The cells of the posterior root ganglia have already, for the most part, assumed their bipolar form, but among them there may still be found a number of cells in the neuroblast condition, and these (Fig. 250, s), wandering out from the ganglia, give rise to a column of cells standing in relation to the white rami. At first there is no indication of a segmental arrangement of the cells of the column (Fig. 251), but at about the seventh week such an arrangement makes its appearance in the cervical region, and later, extends posteriorly, until the column assumes the form of the ganglionated cord.
 
 
This origin of the ganglionated cord from cells migrating out from the posterior root ganglia has been described by various authors, but recently the origin of the cells has been carried a step further back, to the mantle layer of the central nervous system (Kuntz). Indifferent cells and neuroblasts are said to wander out from the walls of the medullary canal by way of both the posterior and anterior nerve roots and it is claimed that these are the cells that give rise to the ganglionated cord in the manner just described.
 
 
Before, however, the segmentation of the ganglionated cord becomes marked, thickenings appear at certain regions of the cell column, and from these, bundles of fibers may be seen extending ventrally toward the viscera. The thickenings represent certain of
 
 
THE SYMPATHETIC SYSTEM
 
 
423
 
 
the prevertebral ganglia, and later cells wander out from them and take a position in front of the aorta. In an embryo of 10.2 mm. two ganglionic masses (Fig. 251, pc) occur in the vicinity of the origin
 
 
 
Fig. 251.  -  Reconstruction of the Sympathetic System of an Embryo of 10.2 mm. am, Vitelline artery; ao, aorta; au, umbilical artery; bg, ganglionic mass representing the pelvic plexus; d, intestine; oe, oesophagus; pc, ganglia of the cceliac plexus; ph, pharynx; rv, right vagus nerve; sp, splanchnic nerves; sy, ganglionated cord; t, trachea; *, peripheral sympathetic ganglia in the walls of the stomach.  -  (His, Jr.)
 
 
of the vitelline artery (am), one lying above and the other below that vessel; these masses represent the ganglia of the cceliac
 
 
424 LITERATURE
plexus and have separated somewhat from the ganglionated cord, the fiber bundles which unite the upper mass with the cord representing the greater and lesser splanchnic nerves (sp), while that connected with the lower mass represents the connection of the cord with the superior mesenteric ganglion. Lower down, in the neighborhood of the umbilical arteries, is another enlargement of the cord (bg), which probably represents the inferior mesenteric and hypogastric ganglia which have not yet separated from the cell column.
 
 
With the peripheral ganglia the conditions are slightly different, in that they are formed very largely, if not exclusively, from cells that migrate from the walls of the hind-brain by way of the vagus nerves (Fig. 251). In this way the ganglia of the myenteric, pulmonary and cardiac plexuses are formed, though in the case of the last named it is probable that contributions are also received from the ganglionated cord.
 
 
The elongated courses of the cardiac sympathetic and splanchnic nerves in the adult receive an explanation from the recession of the heart arid diaphragm (see pp. 239 and 322), the latter process forcing downward the coeliac plexus, which originally occupied a position opposite the region of the ganglionated cord from which the splanchnic nerves arise.
 
 
As regards the cephalic sympathetic ganglia, the observations of Remak on the chick and Kolliker on the rabbit show that the ciliary, sphenopalatine, and otic ganglia arise by the separation of cells from the semilunar (Gasserian) ganglion, and from their adult relations it may be supposed that the cells of the submaxillary and sublingual ganglia have similarly arisen from the geniculate ganglion of the facial nerve. Evidence has also been obtained from human embryos that sympathetic cells are derived from the ganglia of the vagus and glossopharyngeal nerves, but, instead of forming distinct ganglia in the adult, these, in all probability, associate themselves with the first cervical ganglia of the ganglionated cord.
 
 
LITERATURE.
 
 
C. R. Bardeen: "The Growth and Histogenesis of the Cerebrospinal Nerves in Mammals," Amer. Journ. AnaL, 11, 1903.
 
 
 
 
LITERATURE 425
S. R. Cajal: "Nouvelles Observations sur revolution des neuroblasts avec quelques
remarques sur l'hypothese neurogenetique de Hensen-Held," Anal. Anzeiger,
xxxii, 1908. A. F. Dixon: "On the Development of the Branches of the Fifth Cranial Nerve in
Man," Sclent. Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc, Ser. 1, VI, 1896. C. R. Essick: "The Development of the Nuclei pontis and the Nucleus Arcuatus in
Man," Amer. Journ. Anat., xiii, 1912. E. Giglio-Tos: "Sugli organi branchiali e laterali di senso nell' uomo nei primordi
del suo sviluppo," Monit. Zool. Ital., xill, 1902. E. Giglio-Tos: "SulP origine embrionale del nervo trigemino nell' uomo," Anat.
 
 
Anzeiger, xxi, 1902. E. Giglio-Tos: "Sui primordi dello sviluppo del nervo acustico-faciale nell' uomo,"
Anat. Anzeiger, xxi, 1902. K. Goldstein: "Die erste Entwicklung der grossen Hirncommissuren und die
'Verwachsung' von Thalamus und Striatum" Archiv jiir Anat. und Physiol.,
Anat. Abth., 1903. G. Groenberg: "Die Ontogenese einer niederen Saugergehirns nach Untersuchungen
an Erinaceus europaeus," Zoolog. Jahrb. Abth. f. Anat. und Ontogen., xv, 1901. I. Hardesty: "On the Development and Nature of the Neuroglia," Amer. Journ
Anat., in, 1904. R. G. Harrison: "Further Experiments on the Development of Peripheral Nerves,'
Amer. Journ. of Anat., v, 1906. W. His: "Zur Geschichte des menschlichen Ruckenmarkes und der Nervenwurzeln,'
Abhandl. der konigl. Sachsischen Gesellsch., Math.-Physik. Classe, xiii, 1886. W. His: "Zur Geschichte des Gehirns sowie der centralen und peripherischen Nerven
bahnen beim menschlichen Embryo," Abhandl. der konigl. Sachsischen Gesellsch.,
Math.-Physik. Classe, xiv, 1888. W. His: "Die Formentwickelung des menschlichen Vorderhirns vom Ende des ersten
bis zum Beginn des dritten Monats," Abhandl. der konigl. Sachsischen Gesellsch.,
Math.-Physik. Classe, xv. 1889. W. His: "Histogenese und Zusammenhang der Nervenelemente," Archiv fur Anat.
 
 
und Physiol., Anat. Abth., Supplement, 1890. W. His: "Die Entwickelung des menschlichen Gehirns wahrend der ersten Monate,"
Leipzig, 1904. W. His, Jr.: "Die Entwickelung des Herznervensystem bei Wirbelthieren," Abhandl.
 
 
der konigl. Sachsischen Gesellsch., Math.-Physik. Classe, xvni, 1893. W. His, Jr.: "Ueber die Entwickelung des Bauchsympathicus beim Huhnchen und
Menschen," Archiv filr Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., Supplement, 1S97. C. J. Herrick: " The Cranial and First Spinal Nerves of Menidia: A Contribution upon
the Nerve Components of the Bony Fishes," Journ. of Comp. Neurol., ix, 1899. C. J. Herrick: "The Cranial Nerves and Cutaneous Sense-organs of the North
American Siluroid Fishes," Journ. of Comp. Neurol., xi, 1901. G. C. Huber: "Four Lectures on the Sympathetic Nervous System," Journ. of Comp.
 
 
Neurol., vn, 1897. A. Kuntz: "A Contribution to the Histogenesis of the Sympathetic System," Anat.
 
 
Record, in, 1909.
 
 
 
 
426 LITERATURE
A. Kuntz: "The role of the Vagi in the Development of the Sympathetic Nervous
System," Anat. Anzeiger, xxxv, 1909. A. Kuntz: "The Development of the Sympathetic Nervous System in Mammals,'
Journ. Compar. Neurol., xx, 1910. M. von Lenhossek: "Die Entwickelung der Ganglienanlagen bei dem menschlichen
Embryo," Archiv filr Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1891.
 
 
F. Marchand: "Ueber die Entwickelung des Balkens im menschlichen Gehirn,"
Archiv filr mikrosk. Anat., xxxvn, 1891. V. VON Mihalkovicz: " Entwickelungsgeschichte des Gehirns," Leipzig, 1877. A. D. Onodi: "Ueber die Entwickelung des sympathischen Nervensystems," Archiv
filr mikrosk. Anat., xxvn, 1886.
 
 
G. Retzius: "Das Menschenhirn," Stockholm, 1896.
 
 
A. Schaper: "Die friihesten Differenzirungsvorgange im Central-nerven-system,'
Archiv filr Entwicklungsmechanik, v, 1897. G. L. Streeter: " The Development of the Cranial and Spinal Nerves in the Occipita
Region of the Human Embryo," Amer. Journ. Anat., iv, 1904. O. S. Strong: "The Cranial Nerves of Amphibia," Journal of Morphol., x, 1895. R. Wlassak: "Die Herkunft des Myelins," Archiv filr Entwicklungsmechanik, VI
1898. E. Zuckerkandl: "Zur Entwicklung des Balkens," Arbeiten aus neurol. Inst. Wien.
 
 
xvii, 1909.
 
 
 
 
CHAPTER XVI.
 
 
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE ORGANS OF SPECIAL SENSE.
 
 
Like the cells of the central nervous system, the sensory cells are all of ectodermal origin, and in lower animals, such as the earthworm, for instance, they retain their original position in the ectodermal epithelium throughout life. In the vertebrates, however, the majority of the sensory cells relinquish their superficial position and sink more or less deeply into the subjacent tissues, being represented by the posterior root ganglion cells and by the sensory cells of the special sense-organs, and it is only in the olfactory organ that the original condition is retained. Those cells which have withdrawn from the surface receive stimuli only through overlying cells, and in certain cases these transmitting cells are not specially differentiated, the terminal branches of the sensory dendrites e ding among ordinary epithelial cells or in such structures as the Pacinian bodies or the end-bulbs of Krause situated beneath undifferentiated epithelium. In other cases, however, certain specially modified superficial cells serve to transmit the stimuli to the peripheral sensory neurones, forming such structures as the hair-cells of the auditory epithelium or the gustatory cells of the taste-buds.
 
 
Thus three degrees of differentiation of the special sensory cells may be recognized and a classification of the sense-organs may be made upon this basis. One organ, however, the eye, cannot be brought into such a classification, since its sensory cells present certain developmental peculiarities which distinguish them from those of all other sense-organs. Embryologically the retina is a portion of the central nervous system and not a peripheral organ, and hence it will be convenient to arrange the other sense-organs
427
 
 
428 THE OLFACTORY ORGANS
according to the classification indicated and to discuss the" history of the eye at the close of the chapter.
 
 
The Development of the Olfactory Organ.  -  The general development of the nasal fossa, the epithelium of which contains the olfactory sense cells, has already been described (pp. 99 and 283), as has also the development of the olfactory lobes of the brain (p. 406), and there remains for consideration here merely the formation of the olfactory nerve and the development of the rudimentary organ of Jacobson.
 
 
The Olfactory Nerve.  -  Very diverse results have been obtained by various observers of the development of the olfactory nerve, it having been held at different times that it was formed by the outgrowth of fibers from the olfactory lobes (Marshall), from fibers which arise partly from the olfactory lobes and partly from the olfactory epithelium (Beard), from the cells of an olfactory ganglion originally derived from the olfactory epithelium but later separating from it (His), and, finally, that it was composed of the prolongations of certain cells situated and, for the most part at least, remaining permanently in the olfactory epithelium (Disse). The most recent observations on the structure of the olfactory epithelium and nerve indicate a greater amount of probability in the last result than in the others, and the description which follows will be based upon the observations of His, modified in conformity with the results obtained by Disse from chick embryos.
 
 
In human embryos of the fourth week the cells lining the upper part of the olfactory pits show a distinction into ordinary epithelial and sensory cells, the latter, when fully formed, being elongated cells prolonged peripherally into a short but narrow process which reaches the surface of the epithelium and proximally gives rise to an axis-cylinder process which extends up toward and penetrates the tip of the olfactory lobe to come into contact with the dendrites of the first central neurones of the olfactory tract (Fig. 252). These cells constitute a neuro-epithelium and in later stages of development retain their epithelial position for the most part, a few of them, however, withdrawing into the subjacent mesenchyme and becoming
 
 
THE OLFACTORY ORGANS
 
 
429
 
 
bipolar, their peripheral prolongations ending freely among the cells of the olfactory epithelium. These bipolar cells resemble closely in form and relations the cells of the embryonic posterior root ganglia, and thus form an interesting transition between these and the neuroepithelial cells.
 
 
The Organ of Jacohson.  -  In embryos of three or four months a
 
 
 
Fig. 252.  -  Diagram Illustrating the Relations of the Fibers of the Olfactory
Nerve.
 
 
Ep, Epithelium of the olfactory pit; C, cribiform plate of the'ethmoid, G, glomerulus of
the olfactory bulb; M, mitral cell.  -  (Van Gekuchten.) j
small pouch-like invagination of the epithelium covering the lower anterior portion of the median septum of the nose can readily be seen. This becomes converted into a slender pouch, 3 to 5 mm. long, ending blindly at its posterior extremity and opening at its other end
 
 
430 THE ORGANS OF TASTE
into the nasal cavity. Its lining epithelium resembles that of the respiratory portion of the nasal cavity, and there is developed in the connective tissue beneath its floor a slender plate of cartilage, distinct from that forming the septum of the nose.
 
 
This organ, which may apparently undergo degeneration in the adult, and in some cases completely disappears, appears to be the representative of what is known as Jacobson's organ, a structure which reaches a much more extensive degree of development in many of the lower mammals, and in these contains in its epithelium sensory cells whose axis-cylinder processes pass with those of the olfactor} sense cells to the olfactory bulbs. In man, however, it seems to be a rudimentary organ, and no satisfactory explanation of its function has as yet been advanced.
 
 
The olfactory neuro-epithelium, considered from a comparative standpoint, seems to have been derived from the system of lateral line organs so highly developed in the lower vertebrates (Kupffer). In higher forms the system, which is cutaneous in character, has disappeared except in two regions where it has become highly specialized. In one of these regions it has given rise to the olfactory sense cells and in the other to the similar cells of the auditory apparatus.
 
 
The Organs of Touch and Taste.  -  Little is yet known concerning the development of the various forms of tactile organs, which belong to the second class of sensory organs described above.
 
 
The Organs of Taste.  -  The remaining organs of special sense belong to the third class, and of these the organs of taste present in many respects the simplest condition. They are developed principally in connection with the vallate and foliate papillae of the tongue, and of the former one of the earliest observed stages has been found in embryos of 9 cm. in the form of two ridges of epidermis, lying toward the back part of the tongue and inclined to one another in such a manner as to form a V with the apex directed backward. From these ridges solid downgrowths of epidermis into the subjacent tissue occur, each downgrowth having the form of a hollow truncated cone with its basal edge continuous with the
 
 
THE INTERNAL EAR 43 1
superficial epidermis (Fig. 253, A). In later stages lateral outgrowths develop from the deeper edges of the cone, and about the same time clefts appear in the substance of the original downgrowths (Fig. 253, B) and, uniting together, finally open to the surface, forming a trench surrounding a papilla (Fig. 253, C). The lateral outgrowths, which are at first solid, also undergo an axial degeneration and become converted into the glands of Ebner (b), which open into the trench near its floor. The various papillae which occur in the adult do not develop simultaneously, but their number increases with the age of the fetus, and there is, moreover, considerable variation in the time of their development.
 
 
The taste-buds are formed by a differentiation of the epithelium which covers the papillae, and this differentiation appears to stand
 
 
 
 
B C
Fig. 253.  -  Diagrams Representing the Development of a Vallate Papilla. a, Valley surrounding the papilla; b, von Ebner's gland.  -  (Graberg.)
in intimate relation with the penetration of fibers of the glossopharyngeal nerve into the papillae. The buds form at various places upon the papillae, and at one period are especially abundant upon their free surfaces, but in the later weeks of intrauterine life these surface buds undergo degeneration and only those upon the sides of the trench persist, as a rule.
 
 
The foliate papillae do not seem to be developed until some time after the circumvallate, being entirely wanting in embryos of four and a half and five months, although plainly recognizable at the seventh month.
 
 
The Development of the Ear.  -  It is customary to describe the mammalian ear as consisting of three parts, known as the inner, middle, and outer ears, and this division is, to a certain extent at
 
 
43 2
 
 
THE INTERNAL EAR
 
 
least, confirmed by the embryonic development. The inner ear, which is the sensory portion proper, is an ectodermal structure, which secondarily becomes deeply seated in the mesodermal tissue of the head, while the middle and outer ears, which provide the apparatus necessary for the conduction of the sound-waves to the inner ear, are modified portions of the anterior branchial arches. It will be convenient, accordingly, in the description of the ear, to accept the usually recognized divisions and to consider first of all the development of the inner ear, or, as it is better termed, the otocyst. The Development of the Otocyst.  -  In an embryo of 2.4 mm. a pair of pits occur upon the surface of the body about opposite the middle portion of the hind-brain (Fig. 254, A). The ectoderm lining the pits is somewhat thicker than is the neighboring ectoderm
 
 
 
 
a  -  B
Fig. 254.  -  Transverse Section Passing through the Otocyst (ot) of Embryos of (A) 2.4 mm. and (B) 4 mm.  -  (His.)
of the surface of the body, and, from analogy with what occurs in other vertebrates, it seems probable that the pits are formed by the invagination of localized thickenings of the ectoderm. The mouth of each pit gradually becomes smaller, until finally the invagination is converted into a closed sac (Fig. 254, B), which separates from the surface ectoderm and becomes enclosed within the subjacent mesoderm. This sac is the otocyst, and in the stage just described, found in embryos of 4 mm., it has an oval or more or less spherical form. Soon, however, in embryos of 6.9 mm., a prolongation arises from its dorsal portion and the sac assumes the form shown in Fig. 255, A; this prolongation, which is held by some authors to be the remains of the stalk which originally connected the otocyst sac
 
 
THE INTERNAL EAR
 
 
433
 
 
with the surface ectoderm, represents the ductus endolymphaticus , and, increasing in length, it soon becomes a strong club-shaped process, projecting considerably beyond the remaining portions of the otocyst (Fig. 255, B). In embryos of about 10.2 mm. the sac begins to show certain other irregularities of shape (Fig. 255, B, sc). Thus, about opposite the point of origin of the ductus endolymphaticus three folds make their appearance, representing the semi
 
 
 
 
-rsc
 
 
Fig. 255.  -  Reconstruction of the Otocysts of Embryo of (A) 6.9 mm. and (B)
10.2 MM.
 
 
de, Endolymphatic duct; gc, ganglion cochleare; gg, ganglion geniculatum; gv,
ganglion vestibulare; sc, lateral semicircular duct.  -  (His, Jr.)
circular ducts, and as they increase in size the opposite walls of the central portion of each fold come together, fuse, and finally become absorbed, leaving the free edge of the fold as a crescentic canal, at one end of which an enlargement appears to form the ampulla. The transformation of the folds into canals takes place somewhat earlier in the cases of the two vertical than in that of the horizontal duct, as 28
 
 
434
 
 
THE INTERNAL EAR
 
 
may be seen from Fig. 256, which represents the condition occurring
in an embryo of 13.5 mm.
 
 
A short distance below the level at which the canals communicate
with the remaining portion of the otocyst a constriction appears,
indicating a separation of the otocyst into a more dorsal portion and a more ventral one. Later, the latter begins to be prolonged into a flattened canal which, as it elongates, becomes coiled upon itself and also becomes separated by a constriction from the remaining portion of the otocyst (Fig. 257). This canal is the ductus cochlearis (scala media of the cochlea), and the remaining portion of the otocyst subsequently becomes divided by a constriction into the utriculus, with which the semicircular ducts are connected, and the sacculus. The constriction which separates the cochlear duct from the sacculus becomes the ductus reuniens, while that between the utriculus and sacculus is converted into a narrow canal with which the ductus endolymphaticus connects, and hence it is that, in the adult, the connection between these two portions of H the otocyst seems to be formed by the ductus dividing proximally into two limbs, one of which is connected with
the utricle and the other with the saccule.
 
 
When first observed in the human embryo the auditory ganglion
is closely associated with the geniculate ganglion of the seventh
nerve (Fig. 255, B), the two, usually spoken of as the acustico-facialis
ganglion, forming a mass of cells lying in close contact with the
 
 
 
Fig. 256.  -  Reconstruction of the Otocyst of an Embryo of
I3.5 MM.
 
 
co, Cochlea; de, endolymphatic duct;.sc, semicircular duct.  -  (His Jr.)
 
 
THE INTERNAL EAR
 
 
435
 
 
anterior wall of the otocyst. The origin of the ganglionic mass has not yet been traced in the mammalia, but it has been observed that in cow embryos the geniculate ganglion is connected with the ectoderm at the dorsal end of the first branchial cleft (Froriep), and it may perhaps be regarded as one of the epibranchial placodes (see p. 417), and in the lower vertebrates a union of the ganglion with a suprabranchial placode has been observed (Kupffer), this union
 
 
 
Fig. 257.  -  Reconstruction of the Otocyst of an Embryo of 20 mm., front view. cc, Common limb of superior and posterior semicircular ducts; eg, cochlear ganglion; co, cochlea; de, endolymphatic duct; s, sacculus; sdl, sdp, and sds x lateral, posterior and superior semicircular ducts; u, utriculus; vg, vestibular ganglion.  -  (Streeter.)
indicating the origin of the auditory ganglion from one or more of the ganglia of the lateral line system.
 
 
At an early stage in the human embryo the auditory ganglion shows indications of a division into two portions, a more dorsal one, which represents the future ganglion vestibular e, and a ventral one, the ganglion cochleare. The ganglion cells become bipolar, in which condition they remain throughout life, never reaching the T-shaped condition found in most of the other peripheral cerebro-spinal ganglia. One of the prolongations of each cell is directed centrally to
 
 
43 6
 
 
THE INTERNAL EAR
 
 
form a fiber of the auditory nerve, while the other penetrates the wall of the otocyst to enter into relations with certain specially modified cells which differentiate from its lining epithelium.
 
 
â– In the earliest stages the ectodermal lining of the otocyst is formed of similar columnar cells, but later over the greater part of the surface the cells flatten down, only a few, aggregated together to
 
 
 
Fig. 258.  -  The Right Internal Ear of an Embryo of Six Months. ca, ce, and cp, Superior, lateral, and posterior semicircular ducts; cr, crista acustica; de, endolymphatic duct; Is, spiral ligament; mb, basilar membrane; ms and tnu, macula acustica sacculi and utriculi; rb, basilar branches of the cochlear nerve.  -  (Retzius.)
form patches, retaining the high columnar form and developing hairlike processes upon their free surfaces. These are the sensory cells of the ear. In the human ear there are in all six patches of these sensory cells, an elongated patch (crista ampullaris) in the ampulla of each semicircular canal (Fig. 258, cr), a round patch (macula acus
 
 
THE INTERNAL EAR 437
tica, mii) in the utriculus and another (ms) in the sacculus, and, finally, an elongated patch which extends the entire length of the scala media of the cochlea and forms the sensory cells of the spiral organ of Corti. The cells of this last patch are connected with the fibers from the cochlear ganglion, while those of the vestibular ganglion pass to the cristas and maculae.
 
 
In connection with the spiral organ certain adjacent cells also retain their columnar form and undergo various modifications,
 
 
ftfJ^\-\'
 
 
 
 
 
 
<&WB
 
 
%^,
 
 
 
 
 
l&i^Spfc
 
 
 
Fig. 259.  -  Section of the Cochlear Duct of a Rabbit Embryo of 55 mm.
 
 
a, Mesenchyme; b to e, epithelium of cochlear duct; M.t, membrana tectoria; V.s.p,
vein; 1 to 7, spiral organ of Corti.  -  (Baginsky.)
giving rise to a rather complicated structure whose development has been traced in the rabbit. Along the whole length of the cochlear duct the cells resting upon that half of the basilar membrane which is nearest the axis of the cochlea, and may be termed the inner half, retain their columnar shape, forming two ridges projecting slightly into the cavity of the scala (Fig. 259). The cells of the inner ridge, much the larger of the two, give rise to the membrana tectoria,
 
 
438 THE INTERNAL EAR
either as a cuticular secretion or by the artificial adhesion of long hair-like processes which project from their free surfaces (Ayers). The cells of the outer ridge are arranged in six longitudinal rows (Fig. 259, 1-6); those of the innermost row (1) develop hairs upon their free surfaces and form the inner hair cells, those of the next two
rows (2 and 3) gradually become transformed on their adjacent surfaces into chitinous
p /''- /^ substance and form the rods of
Corti, while the three outer rows
 
 
; (4 to 6) develop into the outer e -^~~ __ hair cells. It is in connection
with the hair cells that the peripheral prolongations of the cells of the cochlear ganglion ter™JS= d^t" 1 ™ mi «ate, and since these hair cells
Rabbit Embryo of Twenty-four Days, are arranged in rows extending
c, Periotic cartilage; ep, fibrous mem- .1 pnt j rp ] er ,a\h of the cochlear
brane beneath the epithelium of the canal; me ermre lengin 01 me COCIliear
p, perichondrium; s, spongy tissue. -  (Von duct, the ganglion also IS drawn Kolliker.) . 1 .. .
 
 
out into a spiral following the coils of the cochlea, and hence is sometimes termed the spiral ganglion.
 
 
While the various changes described above have been taking place in the otocyst, the mesoderm surrounding it has also been undergoing development. At first this tissue is quite uniform in character, but later the cells immediately surrounding the otocyst condense to give rise to a fibrous layer (Fig. 260, ep), while more peripherally they become more loosely arranged and form a somewhat gelatinous layer (s) , and still more peripherally a second fibrous layer is differentiated and the remainder of the tissue assumes a character which indicates an approaching conversion into cartilage. The further history of these various layers is as follows: The inner fibrous layer gives rise to the connective-tissue wall which supports the ectodermal lining of the various portions of the otocyst; the gelatinous layer undergoes a degeneration to form a lymph-like
 
 
THE INTERNAL EAR
 
 
439
 
 
fluid known as the perilymph, the space occupied by the fluid being the perilymphatic space; the outer fibrous layer becomes perichondrium and later periosteum; and the precartilage undergoes chondrification and later ossifies to form the petrous portion of the temporal bone.
 
 
The gelatinous layer completely surrounds most of the otocyst structures, which thus come to lie free in the perilymphatic space, but in the cochlear region the conditions are somewhat different. In this region the gelatinous layer is interrupted along two lines,
 
 
 
Fig. 261.  -  Diagrammatic Transverse Section through a Coil of the Cochlea
showing the relation of the scal^e. c, Organ of Corti; co, ganglion cochleare; Is, lamina spiralis; SAT, cochlear duct; ST, scala tympani; SV, scala vestibuli.  -  (From Gerlach.)
an outer broad one where the connective-tissue wall of the cochlear duct is directly continuous with the perichondrium layer, and an inner narrow one, along which a similar fusion takes place with the perichondrium of a shelf-like process of the cartilage, which later ossifies to form the lamina spiralis. Consequently throughout the cochlear region the perilymphatic space is divided into two compartments which communicate at the apex of the cochlea, while below one, known as the scala vestibuli, communicates with the space
 
 
440 THE MIDDLE EAR
surrounding the saccule and utricle, and the other, the scala tympani, abuts upon a membrane which separates it from the cavity of the middle ear and represents a portion of the outer wall of the petrous bone where chondrification and ossification have failed to occur. This membrane closes what appears in the dried skull to be an opening in the inner wall of the middle ear, known as the fenestra cochlea (rotunda) ; another similar opening, also closed by membrane in the fresh skull, occurs in the bony wall opposite the utricular portion of the otocyst and is known as the fenestra vestibuli (ovalis) .
 
 
The Development of the Middle Ear.  -  The middle ear develops from the upper part of the pharyngeal groove which represents the endodermal portion of the first branchial cleft. This becomes prolonged dorsally and at its dorsal end enlarges to form the tympanic cavity, while the narrower portion intervening between this and the pharyngeal cavity represents the tuba auditiva (Eustachian tube).
 
 
To correctly understand the development of the tympanic cavity it is necessary to recall the structures which form its boundaries. Anteriorly to the upper end of the first branchial pouch there is the upper end of the first arch, and behind it the corresponding part of the second arch, the two fusing together dorsal to the tympanic cavity and forming its roof. Internally the cavity is bounded by the outer wall of the cartilaginous investment of the otocyst, while externally it is separated from the upper part of the ectodermal groove of the first branchial cleft by the thin membrane which forms the floor of the groove.
 
 
It has been seen in an earlier chapter that the axial mesoderm of each branchial arch gives rise to skeletal structures and muscles. The axial cartilage of the ventral portion of the first arch is what is known as Meckel's cartilage, but in that portion of the arch which forms the roof and anterior wall of the tympanic cavity, the cartilage becomes constricted to form two masses which later ossify to form the malleus and incus (Fig. 262, m and i), while the muscular tissue of this dorsal portion of the arch gives rise to the tensor tympani. Similarly, in the case of the second arch there is to be found, dorsal to
 
 
THE MIDDLE EAR 44 1
the extremity of the cartilage which forms the styloid process of the adult, a narrow plate of cartilage which forms an investment for the facial nerve (Fig. 262, VII), and dorsal to this a ring of cartilage (st) which surrounds a small stapedial artery and represents the stapes.
 
 
It has been found that in the rabbit the mass of cells from which the stapes is formed is at its first appearance quite independent of the second branchial arch (Fuchs), and it has been held to be a
 
 
 
Fig. 262.  -  Semi-diagrammatic Viewof the Auditory Ossicles of an Embryo of
Six Weeks. i, Incus; j, jugular vein; m, malleus; mc, Meckel's cartilage; oc, capsule of otocyst; R, cartilage of the second branchial arch; st, stapes; VII, facial nerve.  -  (Siebenmann.)
derivative of the mesenchyme from which the periotic capsule is formed. In later stages, however, it becomes connected with the cartilage of the second branchial arch, as shown in Fig. 262, and it is a question whether this connection, which is transitory, does not really indicate the phylogenetic origin of the ossicle from the second arch cartilage, its appearance as an independent structure being a secondary ontogenetic phenomenon. However that may be, the stapedial artery disappears in later stages and the stapedius muscle, derived from the musculature of the second branchial arch and therefore supplied by the facial nerve, becomes attached to the ossicle.
 
 
The three ossicles at first lie embedded in the mesenchyme forming the roof of the primitive tympanic cavity, as does also the chorda tympani, a branch of the seventh nerve, as it passes into the substance of the first arch on the way to its destination. The mesenchyme in which these various structures are embedded is rather voluminous (Fig. 264), and after the end of the seventh month becomes converted into a peculiar spongy tissue, which, toward the end of fetal life, gradually degenerates, the tympanic cavity at the same time expanding and wrapping itself around the ossicles and the muscles attached to them (Fig. 263). The bones and their muscles, consequently, while appearing in the adult to traverse the tympanic cavity, are really completely enclosed within a layer of epithelium continuous with that lining the wall of the cavity, while the handle of the malleus and the chorda tympani lie between the epithelium of the outer wall of the cavity and the fibrous mesoderm which forms the tympanic membrane. The extension of the tympanic cavity does not, however, cease with its replacement of the degenerated spongy mesenchyme, but toward the end of fetal life it begins to invade the substance of the temporal bone by a process similar to that which produces the ethmoidal cells and the other osseous sinuses in connection with the nasal cavities (see p. 175). This process continues for some years after birth and results in the formation in the mastoid portion of the bone of the so-called mastoid cells, which communicate with the tympanic cavity and have an epithelial lining continuous with that of the cavity.
 
 
 
Fig. 263.  -  Diagrams Illustrating the Mode of Extension of the Tympanic Cavity Around the Auditory Ossicles.
 
 
M, Malleus; m, spongy mesenchyme; p, surface of the periotic capsule; T, tympanic cavity. The broken line represents the epithelial lining of the tympanic cavity.
 
 
 
 
The lower portion of the diverticulum from the first pharyngeal groove which gives rise to the tympanic cavity becomes converted into the Eustachian tube. During development the lumen of the tube disappears for a time, probably owing to a proliferation of its lining epithelium, but it is re-established before birth.
 
 
In the account of the development of the ear-bones given above it is held that the malleus and incus are derivatives of the first branchial (mandibular) arch and the stapes probably of the second. This view represents the general consensus of recent workers on the difficult question of the origin of these bones, but it should be mentioned that nearly all possible modes of origin have been at one time or other suggested. The malleus has very generally been accepted as coming from the first arch, and the same is true of the incus, although some earlier authors have assigned it to the second arch. But with regard to the stapes the opinions have been very varied. It has been held to be derived from the first arch, from the second arch, from neither one nor the other, but from the cartilaginous investment of the otocyst, or, finally, it has been held to have a compound origin, its arch being a product of the second arch while its basal plate was a part of the otocyst investment.
 
 
The Development of the Tympanic Membrane and of the Outer Ear.  -  Just as the tympanic cavity is formed from the endodermal groove of the first branchial cleft, so the outer ear owes its origin to the ectodermal groove of the same cleft and to the neighboring arches. The dorsal and most ventral portions of the groove flatten out and disappear, but the median portion deepens to form, at about the end of the second month, a funnel-shaped cavity which corresponds to the outer portion of the external auditory meatus. From the inner end of this a solid ingrowth of ectoderm takes place, and this, enlarging at its inner end to form a disk-like mass, comes into relation with the gelatinous mesoderm which surrounds the malleus and chorda tympani. At about the seventh month a split occurs in the disk-like mass (Fig. 264), separating it into an outer and an inner  layer, the latter of which becomes the outer epithelium of the tympanic membrane. Later, the split extends outward in the substance of the ectodermal ingrowth and eventually unites with the funnel-shaped cavity to complete the external meatus.
 
 
 
 
Fig. 264.  -  Horizontal Section Passing through the Dorsal Wall of the External Auditory Meatus in an Embryo of 4.5 cm.
 
 
c, Cochlea; de, endolymphatic duct; i, incus; Is, transverse sinus; m, malleus; me,
meatus auditorius externus; me' , cavity of the meatus; s, sacculus; sc, lateral semicircular
canal; sc', posterior semicircular canal; st, stapes; t, tympanic cavity; u, utriculus; 7,
facial nerve.  -  (Siebenmann.)
 
The tympanic membrane is formed in considerable part from the substance of the first branchial arch, the area in which it occurs not being primarily part of the wall of the tympanic cavity, but being brought into it secondarily by the expansion of the cavity. The membrane itself is mesodermal in origin and is lined on its outer surface by an ectodermal and on the inner by an endodermal epithelium.
 
 
The auricle (pinna) owes its origin to the portions of the first and second arches which bound the entrance of the external meatus. Upon the posterior edge of the first arch there appear about the end of the fourth week two transverse furrows which mark off three tubercles (Fig. 258, A, 1-3) and on the anterior edge of the second arch a corresponding number of tubercles (4-6) is formed, while, in addition, a longitudinal furrow, running down the middle of the arch, marks ofT a ridge (c) lying posterior to the tubercles. From these six tubercles and the ridge are developed the various parts of the auricle, as may be seen from Fig. 265 which represents the transformation as described by His. According to this, the most ventral tubercle of the first arch (i) gives rise to the tragus, and the middle one (5) of the second arch furnishes the antitragus. The middle and dorsal tubercles of the first arch (2 and 3) unite with the ridge (c) to produce the helix, while from the dorsal tubercle of the second arch (4) is produced the anthelix and from the ventral one (6) the lobule. More recent observations, however, seem to indicate that the lobule is an accessory structure unrelated to the tubercles and that the sixth tubercle gives rise to the antitragus, while the fifth is either included in the anthelix or else disappears. It is noteworthy that up to about the third month of development the upper and posterior portion of the helix is bent forward so as to conceal the anthelix (Fig. 265, D); it is at just about a corresponding stage that the pointed form of the ear seen in the lower mammals makes its appearance, and it is evident that, were it not for the forward bending, the human ear would also be assuming at this stage a more or less pointed form. Indeed, there is usually to be found upon the incurved edge of the helix, some distance below the upper border of the auricle, a more or less distinct tubercle, known as Darwin's tubercle, which seems to represent the point of the typical mammalian ear, and is, accordingly, the morphological apex of the pinna.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 265.  -  Stages in the Development of the Auricle.
 
 
A, Embryo of n mm.; B, of 13.6 mm.; C, of 15 mm.; D, at the beginning of the third month; E, fetus of 8.5 cm.; F, fetus at term.  -  (His.)
 
 
 
 
 
There seems to be little room for doubt that the otocyst belongs primarily to the system of lateral line sense-organs, but a discussion of this interesting question would necessitate a consideration of details concerning the development of the lower vertebrates which would be foreign to the general plan of this book. It may be recalled, however, that the analysis of the components of the cranial nerves described on page 415 refers the auditory nerve to the lateral line system.
 
 
The Development of the Eye.  -  The first indications of the development of the eye are to be found in a pair of hollow outgrowths from the side of the first primary brain vesicle, at a level which corresponds to the junction of the dorsal and ventral zones. Each evagination is directed at first upward and backward, and, enlarging at its extremity, it soon shows a differentiation into a terminal bulb and a stalk connecting the bulb with the brain (Fig. 232). At an early stage the bulb comes into apposition with the ectoderm of the side of the head, and this, over the area of contact, becomes thickened and then depressed to form the beginning of the future lens (Fig. 266).
 
 
 
 
Fig. 266.  -  Early Stages in the Development of the Lens in a Rabbit Embryo. The nucleated layer to the left is the ectoderm and the thicker lens epithelium, beneath which is the outer wall of the optic evagination; above and below between the two is mesenchyme.  -  (Rabl.)
 
 
As the result of the depression of the lens ectoderm, the outer wall of the optic bulb becomes pushed inward toward the inner wall, and this invagination continuing until the two walls come into contact, the bulb is transformed into a double-walled cup, the optic cup, in the mouth of which lies the lens (Fig. 268). The cup is not perfect, however, since the invagination affects not only the optic bulb, but also extends medially on the posterior surface of the stalk, forming upon this a longitudinal groove and producing a defect of the ventral wall of the cup, known as the chorioidal fissure (Fig. 267). The groove and fissure become occupied by mesodermal tissue, and in this, at about the fifth week, a blood-vessel develops which traverses
 
 
 
Fig. 267.  -  Reconstruction of the Brain of an Embryo of Four Weeks, showing the Chorioid Fissure.  -  (His.)
the cavity of the cup to reach the lens and is known as the arteria hyaloidea.
 
 
In the meantime further changes have been taking place in the lens. The ectodermal depression which represents it gradually deepens to form a cup, the lips of which approximate and finally meet, so that the cup is converted into a vesicle which finally separates completely from the ectoderm (Fig. 268), much in the same way as the otocyst does. As the lens vesicle is constricted off, the surrounding mesodermal tissue grows in to form a layer between it and the overlying ectoderm, and a split appearing in the layer divides it into an outer thicker portion, which represents the cornea, and an inner thinner portion, which covers the outer surface of the lens and becomes highly vascular. The cavity between these two portions represents the anterior chamber of the eye. The cavity of the optic cup has also become filled by a peculiar tissue which represents the vitreous humor, while the mesodermal tissue surrounding the cup condenses to form a strong investment for it, which is externally continuous with the cornea, and at about the sixth week shows a differentiation into an inner vascular layer, the chorioid coat, and an outer denser one, which becomes the sclerotic coat.
 
 
 
Fig. 268.  -  Horizontal Section through the Eye of an Embryo Pig of 7 mm. Br, Diencephalon; Ec, ectoderm; I, lens; P, pigment, and R, retinal layers of the retina.
 
 
 
 
 
The various processes resulting in the formation of the eye, which have thus been rapidly sketched, may now be considered in greater detail.
 
 
The Development of the Lens.  -  When the lens vesicle is complete, it forms a more or less spherical sac lying beneath the superficial ectoderm and containing in its cavity a few cells, either scattered or in groups (Fig. 268). These cells, which have wandered into the cavity of the vesicle from its walls, take no part in the further development of the lens, but early undergo complete degeneration, and the first change which is concerned with the actual formation of the lens is an increase in the height of the cells forming its inner wall and a thinning out of its outer wall (Fig. 269, A). These changes continuing, the outer half of the vesicle becomes converted into a single layer of somewhat flat cells which persist in the adult condition to form the anterior epithelium of the lens, while the cells of the posterior wall form a marked projection into the cavity of the vesicle and eventually completely obliterate it, coming into contact with the inner surface of the anterior epithelium (Fig. 269, B).
 
 
These posterior elongated cells form, then, the principal mass of the lens, and constitute what are known as the lens fibers. At first those situated at the center of the posterior wall are the longest, the more peripheral ones gradually diminishing in length until at the equator of the lens they become continuous with and pass into the anterior epithelium. As the lens increases in size, however, the most centrally situated cells fail to elongate as rapidly as the more peripheral ones and are pushed in toward the center of the lens, the more peripheral fibers meeting below them along a line passing across the inner surface of the lens. The disparity of growth continuing, a similar sutural line appears on the outer surface beneath the anterior epithelium, and the fibers become arranged in concentric layers around a central core composed of the shorter fibers. In the human eye the line of suture of the peripheral fibers becomes bent so as to consist of two limbs which meet at an angle, and from the angle a new sutural line develops during embryonic life, so that the suture assumes the form of a three-rayed star. In later life the stars become more complicated, being either six-rayed or more usually nine-rayed in the adult condition '(Fig. 270).
 
 
 
 
Fig. 269. -  Sections through the Lens (4) of Human Embryo of Thirty Thirty-one Days and (B) of Pig Embryo of 36 Mu. - (Rabl.)
 
 
 
As early as the second month of development the lens vesicle becomes completely invested by the mesodermal tissue in which blood-vessels are developed in considerable numbers, whence the
 
 
 
Fig. 270. - Posterior (Inner) Surface of the Lens from an Adult showing the Sutural Lines.  -  (Rabl.)
 
 
investment is termed the tunica vasculosa lends (Fig. 278, tv). The arteries of the tunic are in connection principally with the hyaloid artery of the vitreous humor (Fig. 276), and consist of numerous fine branches which envelop the lens and terminate in loops almost at the center of its outer surface. This tunic undergoes degeneration after the seventh month of development, by which time the lens has completed its period of most active growth, and, as a rule, completely disappears before birth. Occasionally, however, it may persist to a greater or less extent, the persistence of the portion covering the outer surface of the lens, known as the membrana papillaris, causing the malformation known as congenital atresia of the pupil.
 
 
In addition to the vascular tunic, the lens is surrounded by a non-cellular membrane termed the capsule. The origin of 'this structure is still in doubt, some observers maintaining that it is a product of the investing mesoderm, while others hold it to be a product of the lens epithelium.
 
 
It is interesting from the standpoint of developmental mechanics to note that W. H. Lewis and Spemann have shown that in the Amphibia contact of the optic vesicle with the ectoderm is necessary for the formation of the lens, and, furthermore, if the vesicle be transplanted to other regions of the body of a larva, a lens will be developed from the ectoderm with which it is then in contact, even in the abdominal region,
The Development of the Optic Cup.-  -  When the invagination of the outer wall of the optic bulb is completed, the margins of the resulting cup are opposite the sides of the lens vesicle (Fig. 268), but with the enlargement of the lens and cup the margins of the latter gradually come to lie in front of -  that is to say, upon the outer surface of  -  the lens, forming the boundary of the opening known as the pupil. The lens, consequently, is brought to lie within the mouth of the optic cup, and that portion of the latter which covers the lens takes part in the formation of the iris and the adjacent ciliary body, while its posterior portion gives rise to the retina.
 
 
The chorioidal fissure normally disappears during the sixth or seventh week of development by a fusion of its lips, and not until this is accomplished does the term cup truly describe the form assumed by the optic bulb after the invagination of its outer wall. In certain cases the lips of the fissure fail to unite perfectly, producing the defect of the eye known as coloboma; this may vary in its extent, sometimes affecting both the iris and the retina and forming what is termed coloboma iridis, and at others being confined to the retinal portion of the cup, in which case it is termed coloboma chorioidae.
 
 
Up to a certain stage the differentiation of the two layers which form the optic cup proceeds along similar lines, in both the ciliary and retinal regions. The layer which represents the original internal portion of the bulb does not thicken as the cup increases in size, and becomes also the seat of a deposition of dark pigment, whence it may be termed the pigment layer of the cup; while the other layer  -  â–  that formed by the invagination of the outer portion of the bulb, and which may be termed the retinal layer  -  remains much thicker (Fig. 268) and in its proximal portions even increases in thickness. Later, however, the development of the ciliary and retinal portions of the retinal layers differs, and it will be convenient to consider first the history of the ciliary portion.
 
 
The Development of the Iris and Ciliary Body
 
The first change noticeable in the ciliary portion of the retinal layer is its thinning out, a process which continues until the layer consists, like the pigment layer, of but a single layer of cells (Fig. 271), the transition of which to the thicker retinal portion of the layer is somewhat abrupt and corresponds to what is termed the ora serrata in adult anatomy. In embryos of 10.2 cm. the retinal layer throughout its entire extent is readily distinguishable from the pigment layer by the absence in it of all pigmentation, but in older forms this distinction gradually diminishes in the iris region, the retinal layer there acquiring pigment and forming the uvea.
 
 
When the anterior chamber of the eye is formed by the splitting of the mesoderm which has grown in between the superficial ectoderm and the outer surface of the lens, the peripheral portions of its posterior (inner) wall are in relation with the ciliary portion of the optic cup and give rise to the stroma of the ciliary body and of the iris (Fig. 271), this latter being continuous with the tunica vasculosa lentis so long as that structure persists (Fig. 278). In embryos of about 14.5 cm. the ciliary portion of the cup becomes thrown into radiating folds (Fig. 271), as if by a too rapid growth, and into the folds lamellae of mesoderm project from the stroma. These folds occur not only throughout the region of the ciliary body, but also extend into the iris region, where, however, they are but temporary structures, disappearing entirely by the end of the fifth month. The folds in the region of the corpus ciliare persist and produce the ciliary processes of the adult eye.
 
 
Embedded in the substance of the iris stroma in the adult are non-striped muscle-fibers, which constitute the sphincter and dilatator iridis. It has long been supposed that these fibers were differentiated from the stroma of the iris, but recent observations have shown that they arise from the cells of the pigment layer of the optic cup, the sphincter appearing near the pupillary border (Fig. 271, Sph) while the dilatator is more peripheral.
 
 
 
Fig. 271.  -  Radial Section through the Iris of an Embryo of 19 cm. AE, Pigment layer; CC, ciliary folds; IE, retinal layer; I.Str, iris stroma; Pm, pupillary membrane; Rs, marginal sinus; Sph, sphincter iridis.  -  (Szili.)
 
 
The Development of the Retina
 
Throughout the retinal region of the cup the pigment layer, undergoing the same changes as in the ciliary region, forms the pigment layer of the retina (Fig. 272, p). The retinal layer increases in thickness and early becomes differentiated into two strata (Fig. 268), a thicker one lying next the pigment layer and containing numerous nuclei, and a thinner one containing no nuclei. The thinner layer, from its position and structure, suggests an homology with the marginal velum of the central nervous system, and probably becomes converted into the nerve-fiber layer of the adult retina, the axis-cylinder processes of the ganglion cells passing into it on their way to the optic nerve. The thicker layer similarly suggests a comparison with the mantle layer of the cord and brain, and in embryos of 38 mm. it becomes differentiated into two secondary layers (Fig. 272), that nearest the pigment layer if) consisting of smaller and more deeply staining nuclei, probably representing the rod and cone and bipolar cells of the adult retina, while the inner layer, that nearest the marginal velum, has larger nuclei and is presumably composed of the ganglion cells.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 272.  -  Portion of a Transverse Section of the Retina of a New-born
Rabbit. ch, Chorioid coat; g, ganglion-cell layer; r, outer layer of nuclei; p, pigment layer.  - 
(Falchi.)
 
 
 
Little is as yet known concerning the further differentiation of the nervous elements of the human retina, but the history of some of them has been traced in the cat, in which, as in other mammals, the histogenetic processes take place at a relatively later period than in man. Of the histogenesis of the inner layer the information is
 
 
 
Fig. 273.  -  Diagram showing the Development of the Retinal Elements.
 
 
a, Cone cell in the unipolar, and b, in the bipolar stage; c, rod cells in the unipolar, and d, in the bipolar stage; e, bipolar cells; /and i, amacrine cells; g, horizontal cells; h, ganglion cells; k, Muller's fiber; I, external limiting membrane.  -  (Kallius, after Cajal.)
rather scant, but it may be stated that the ganglion cells are the earliest of all the elements of the retina to become recognizable. The rod and cone cells, when first distinguishable, are unipolar cells (Fig. 273, a and c), their single processes extending outward from the cell-bodies to the external limiting membrane which bounds the outer surface of the retinal layer. Even at an early stage the cone cells (a) are distinguishable from the rod cells (c) by their more decided reaction to silver salts, and at first both kinds of cells are scattered throughout the thickness of the layer from which they arise. Later, a fine process grows out from the inner end of each cell, which thus assumes a bipolar form (Fig. 2 73 , b and d) , and, later still, the cells gradually migrate toward the external limiting membrane, beneath which they form a definite layer in the adult. In the meantime there appears opposite the outer end of each cell a rounded eminence projecting from the outer surface of the external limiting membrane into the pigment layer. The eminences over the cone cells are larger than those over the rod cells, and later, as both increase in length, they become recognizable by their shape as the rods and cones.
 
 
The bipolar cells are not easily distinguishable in the early stages of their differentiation from the other cells with which thy are mingled, but it is believed that they are represented by cells which are bipolar when the rod and cone cells are still in a unipolar condition (Fig. 273, e). If this identification be correct, then it is noteworthy that at first their outer processes extend as far as the external limiting membrane and must later shorten or fail to elongate until their outer ends lie in what is termed the outer granular layer of the retina, where they stand in relation to the inner ends of the rod and cone cell processes. Of the development of the amacrine (/", i) and horizontal cells (g) of the retina little is known. From their position in new-born kittens it seems probable that the former are derived from cells of the same layer as the ganglion cells, while the horizontal cells may belong to the outer layer.
 
 
In addition to the various nerve-elements mentioned above, the retina also contains neuroglial elements known as Muller's fibers (Fig. 273, k), which traverse the entire thickness of the retina. The development of these cells has not yet been thoroughly traced, but they resemble closely the ependymal cells observable in early stages of the spinal cord.
 
 
 
 
The Development of the Optic Nerve
 
The observations on the development of the retina have shown very clearly that the great majority of the fibers of the optic nerve are axis-cylinders of the ganglion cells of the retina and grow from these cells along the optic stalk toward the brain. Their embryonic history has been traced most thoroughly in rat embryos (Robinson), and what follows is based upon what has been observed in that animal.
 
 
 
The optic stalk, being an outgrowth from the brain, is at first a hollow structure, its cavity communicating with that of the third ventricle at one end and with that of the optic bulb at the other. When the chorioid fissure is developed, it extends, as has already been described, for some distance along the posterior surface of the stalk and has lying in it a portion of the hyaloid artery. Later, when the lips of the fissure fuse, the artery becomes enclosed within the stalk to form the arteria centralis retina of the adult (Fig. 276). By the formation of the fissure the original cavity of the distal portion of the stalk becomes obliterated, and at the same time the ventral and posterior walls of the stalk are brought into continuity with the retinal layer of the optic cup, and so opportunity is given for the passage of the axis-cylinders of the ganglion cells along those walls (Fig. 274). At an early stage a section of the proximal portion of the optic stalk (Fig. 275, A) shows the central cavity surrounded by a number of nuclei representing the mantle layer, and surrounding these a non-nucleated layer, resembling the marginal velum and continuous distally with the similar layer of the retina. When the ganglion cells of the latter begin to send out their axis-cylinder processes, these pass into the retinal marginal velum and converge in this layer toward the bottom of the chorioidal fissure, so reaching the ventral wall of the optic stalk, in the velum of which they may be distinguished in rat embryos of 4 mm., and still more clearly in those of 9 mm. (Fig. 275, A). Later, as the fibers become more numerous, they gradually invade the lateral and finally the dorsal
 
 
Fig. 2 74.  -  Diagrammatic Longitudinal Section of the Optic Cup and Stalk passing through the chorioid fisSURE.
 
 
Ah, Hyaloid artery; L, lens; On, fibers of the optic nerve; Os, optic stalk; PI, pigment layer, and R, retinal layer of the retina.
 
 
 
 
THE OPTIC NERVE
 
 
walls of the stalk, and, at the same time the mantle cells of the stalk become more scattered and assume the form of connective-tissue (neuroglia) cells, while the original cavity of the stalk is gradually obliterated (Fig. 275, B). Finally, the stalk becomes a solid mass of nerve-fibers, among which the altered mantle cells are scattered.
 
 
 
 
Fig. 275.  -  Transverse Sections through the Proximal Part of the Optic Stalk of Rat Embryos of (A) 9 mm. and (5) 11 mm.  -  (Robinson.)
 
 
From what has been stated above it will be seen that the sensory cells of the eye belong to a somewhat different category from those of the other sense-organs. Embryologically they are a specialized portion of the mantle layer of the medullary canal, whereas in the other organs they are peripheral structures either representing or being associated with representatives of posterior root ganglion cells. Viewed from this standpoint, and taking into consideration the fact that the sensory portion of the retina is formed from the invaginated part of the optic bulb, some light is thrown upon the inverted arrangement of the retinal elements, the rods and cones being directed away from the source of light. The normal relations of the mantle layer and marginal velum are retained in the retina, and the latter serving as a conducting layer for the axis-cylinders of the mantle layer (ganglion) cells, the layer of nerve-fibers becomes interposed between the source of light and the sensory cells. Furthermore, it may be pointed out that if the differentiation of the retina be imagined to take place before the closure of the medullary canal  -  a condition which is indicated in some of the lower vertebrates  -  there would be then no inversion of the elements, this peculiarity being due to the conversion of the medullary plate into a tube, and more especially to the fact that the retina develops from the outer wall of the optic cup. In certain reptiles in which an eye is developed in connection with the epiphysial outgrowths of the diencephalon, the retinal portion of this pineal eye is formed from the inner layer of the bulb, and in this case there is no inversion of the elements.
 
 
A justification of the exclusion of the optic nerve from the category which includes the other cranial nerves has now been presented. For if the retina be regarded as a portion of the central nervous system, it is clear that the nerve is not a nerve at all in the strict sense of that word, but is a tract, confined throughout its entire extent within the central nervous system and comparable to such groups of fibers as the direct cerebellar or fillet tracts of that system.
 
 
The Development of the Vitreous Humor.  -  It has already been pointed out (p. 448) that a blood-vessel, the hyaloid artery, accompanied by some mesodermal tissue makes its way into the cavity
 
 
 
Fig. 276.  -  Reconstruction of a Portion of the Eye of an Embryo of 13.8 mm. ah, Hyaloid artery; ch, chorioid coat; /, lens; r, retina.  -  (His.)
of the optic cup through the chorioid fissure. On the closure of the fissure the artery becomes enclosed within the optic stalk and appears to penetrate the retina, upon the surface of which its branches ramify. In the embryo the artery does not, however, terminate in these branches as it does in the adult, but is continued on through the cavity of the optic cup (Fig. 276) to reach the lens, around which it sends branches to form the tunica vasculosa lentis.
 
 
According to some authors, the formation of the vitreous humor is closely associated with the development of this artery, the humor being merely a transudate from it, while others have maintained that it is a derivative of the mesoderm which accompanies the vessel, and is therefore to be regarded as a peculiar gelatinous form of connective tissue. More recently, however, renewed observations by several authors have resulted in the deposition of the mesoderm from the chief role in the formation of the vitreous and the substitution in it of the retina. At an early stage of development delicate protoplasmic processes may be seen projecting from the surface of the retinal layer into the cavity of the optic cup, these processes probably arising from those cells which will later form the Muller's
 
 
 
 
Fig. 277.  -  Transverse Section through the Ciliary Region of a Chick Embryo
of Sixteen Days. ac, Anterior chamber of the eye; cj, conjunctiva; co, cornea; i, iris; I, lens; mc, ciliary muscle; rl, retinal layer of optic cup; sf, spaces of Fontana; si, suspensory ligament of the lens; v, vitreous humor.  -  (Angelucci.)
(neuroglia) fibers of the retina. As development proceeds they increase in length, forming a dense and very fine fibrillar reticulum traversing the space between the lens and the retina and constituting the primary vitreous humor. The formation of the fibers is especially active in the ciliary portion of the retina and it is probable that it is from some of the fibers developing in this region that the suspensory ligament of the lens (zonula Zinnii) (Fig. 277, si) is formed spaces which occur between the fibers of the ligament enlarging to produce a cavity traversed by scattered fibers and known as the canal of Petit.
 
 
THE CORNEA
 
 
 
A participation of similar protoplasmic prolongations from the cells of the lens in the formation of the vitreous humor has been maintained (von Lenhossek) and as strenuously denied. But it is generally admitted that at the time when the hyaloid artery penetrates the vitreous to form the tunica vasculosa lentis it carries with it certain mesodermal elements, whose fate is at present uncertain. It has been held that they take part in the formation of the definitive vitreous, which, according to this view, is of mixed origin, being partly ectodermal and partly mesodermal (Van P6e), and, on the contrary, it has been maintained that they eventually undergo complete degeneration, the vitreous being of purely ectodermal origin (von Kolliker).
 
 
The degeneration of the mesodermal elements which the latter view supposes is associated with the degeneration of the hyaloid artery. This begins in human embryos in the third month and is completed during the ninth month, the only trace after birth of the existence of the vessel being a more fluid consistency of the axis of the vitreous humor, this more fluid portion representing the space originally occupied by the artery and forming what is termed the hyaloid canal (canal ofCloquet).
 
 
The Development of the Outer Coat of the Eye, of the Cornea, and of the Anterior Chamber.  -  Soon after the formation of the optic bulb a condensation of the mesoderm cells around it occurs, forming a capsule. Over the medial portions of the optic cup the further differentiation of this capsule is comparatively simple, resulting in the formation of two layers, an inner vascular and an outer denser and fibrous, the former becoming the chorioid coat of the adult eye and the latter the sclera.
 
 
More laterally, however, the processes are more complicated. After the lens has separated from the surface ectoderm a thin layer of mesoderm grows in between the two structures and later gives place to a layer of homogeneous substance in which a few cells,
 
 
The Anterior Chamber Of The Eye
 
 
more numerous laterally than at the center, are embedded. Still later cells from the adjacent mesenchyme grow into the layer, which increases considerably in thickness, and blood-vessels also grow into that portion of it which is in contact with the outer surface of the lens. At this stage the interval between the surface ectoderm and the lens is occupied by a solid mass of mesodermal tissue (Fig. 278, co and tv), but as development proceeds, small spaces (ac) filled with fluid begin to appear toward the inner portion of the mass, and these, increasing in number and size, eventually fuse together to form a single cavity which divides the mass into an inner and an outer portion. The cavity is the anterior chamber of the eye, and it has served to separate the cornea (co) from the tunica vasculosa lentis (tv) , and, extending laterally in all directions, it also separates from the cornea the mesenchyme which rests upon the marginal portion of the optic cup and constitutes the stroma of the iris. Cells arrange themselves on the corneal surface of the cavity to form a  continuous endothelial layer, and the mesenchyme which forms the peripheral boundary of the cavity assumes a fibrous character and forms the ligamentum pectinatum iridis, among the fibers of which cavities, known as the spaces of Fontana (Fig. 277, sf), appear. Beyond the margins of the cavity the corneal tissue is directly continuous with the sclerotic, beneath the margin of which is a distinctly thickened portion of mesenchyme resting upon the ciliary processes and forming the stroma of the ciliary body, as well as giving rise to the muscle tissue which constitutes the ciliary muscle (Figs. 277 and 278, mc).
 
 
 
Fig. 278.  -  Transverse Section through the Ciliary Region of a Pig Embryo or
23 MM. ac, Anterior chamber of the eye; co, cornea; ec, ectoderm; I, lens; mc, ciliary muscle; p, pigment layer of the optic cup; r, retinal layer; tv, tunica vasculosa lentis.  -  (Angelucci.)
 
 
 
 
 
The ectoderm which covers the outer surface of the eye does not proceed beyond the stage when it consists of several layers of cells, and never develops a stratum corneum. In the corneal region it rests directly upon the corneal tissue, which is thickened slightly upon its outer surface to form the anterior elastic lamina; more peripherally, however, a quantity of loose mesodermal tissue lies between the ectoderm and the outer surface of the sclerotic, and, together with the ectoderm, forms the conjunctiva (Fig. 277, cj).
 
 
The Development of the Accessory Apparatus of the Eye.  -  The eyelids make their appearance at an early stage as two folds of skin, one a short distance above and the other below the cornea. The center of the folds is at first occupied by indifferent mesodermal tissue, which later becomes modified to form the connective tissue of the lids and the tarsal cartilage, the muscle tissue probably secondarily growing into the lids as a result of the spreading of the platysma over the face, the orbicularis oculi apparently being a derivative of that sheet of muscle tissue.
 
 
At about the beginning of the third month the lids have become sufficiently large to meet one another, whereupon the thickened epithelium which has formed upon their edges unites and the lids fuse together, in which condition they remain until shortly before birth. During the stage of fusion the eyelashes (Fig. 279, h) develop at the edges of the lids, having the same developmental history as ordinary hairs, and from the fused epithelium of each lid there grow upward or downward, as the case may be, into the mesodermic tissue, solid rods of ectoderm, certain of which early give off numerous short lateral processes and become recognizable as the tarsal (Meibomian) glands (m), while others retain the simple cylindrical form and represent the glands of Moll. When the eyelids separate, these solid ingrowths become hollow by a breaking down of their
 
 
 
Fig. 279.  -  Section through the Margins of the Fused Eyelids in an Embryo^
of Six Months. i "1
 
 
h, Eyelash; //, lower lid; m, tarsal gland; mu, muscle bundle; ul, upper lid.
Seidl.)
 
 
-(Schweigger
 
 
central cells, just as in the sebaceous and sudoriparous glands of the skin, the tarsal glands being really modifications of the former glands, while the glands of Moll are probably to be regarded as specialized sudoriparous glands.
 
 
A third fold of skin, in addition to^the two which produce the eyelids, is also developed in connection with the eye, forming the plica semilunaris. This is a rudimentary third eyelid, representing the nictitating membrane which is fairly well developed in many of the lower mammals and especially well in birds.
 
 
 
 
THE LACHRYMAL GLAND 467
The lachrymal gland is developed at about the third month as a number of branching outgrowths of the ectoderm into the adjacent mesoderm along the outer part of the line where the epithelium of the conjunctiva becomes continuous with that covering the inner surface of the upper eyelid. As in the other epidermal glands, the outgrowths and their branches are at first solid, later becoming hollow by the degeneration of their axial cells.
 
 
The naso-lachrymal duct is developed in connection with the groove which, at an early stage in the development (Fig. 62), extends
 
 
 
Fig. 280.  -  Diagram showing the Insertions of the Lachrymal Ducts in
EMBRYOS OF 40 MM. AND 170 MM.. THE CaRUNCULA LaCRIMALIS BEING FORMED IN
the Latter.
 
 
The eyelids are really fused at these stages but have been represented as separate • for the sake of clearness.  -  (Ask.)
from the inner corner of the eye to the olfactory pit and is bounded posteriorly by the maxillary process of the first visceral arch. The epithelium lying in the floor of this groove thickens toward the begining of the sixth week to form a solid cord, which sinks into the subjacent mesoderm. From its upper end two outgrowths arise which become connected with the ectoderm of the edges of the upper and lower lids, respectively, and represent the lachrymal ducts, and, finally, the solid cord and its outgrowths acquire a lumen and a connection with the mucous membrane of the inferior meatus of the nasal cavity.
 
 
The inferior duct connects with the border of the eyelid some distance lateral to the inner angle of the eye, and between its opening and the angle a number of tarsal glands develop. The superior duct, on the other hand, opens at first close to the inner angle and later moves laterally until its opening is opposite that of the inferior duct. During this change the portion of the lower lid between the opening of the inferior duct and the angle is drawn somewhat upward, and, with its glands, forms a small reddish nodule, resting upon the plica semilunaris and known as the caruncula lacrimalis (Fig. 280).
 
 
 
 
 
Literature
 
G. Alexander: "Ueber Entwicklung und Bau des Pars inferior Labyrinthi der hdheren Saugethiere," Denkschr. kais. wissench. Acad. Wien, Math.-Naturw. Classe, lxx, 1901.
 
 
A. Angeltjcci: "Ueber Entwickelung und Bau des vorderen Uvealtractus der Verte
braten," Archiv fur mikrosk. Anat., xix, 1881. F. Ask: " Ueber die Entwickelung der Caruncula lacrimalis beim Menschen, nebst Bemerkungen iiber die Entwickelung der Tranenrohrchen und der Meibom'schen Driisen," Anatom. Anzeiger, xxx, 1907.
 
 
F. Ask: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Lidrander, der Tranenkarunkel und der Nick
haut beim Menschen, nebst Bemerkungen zur Entwicklung der Tranenabfuhrungswege," Anat. Hefte, xxxvi, 1908.
 
 
B. Baginsky: "Zur Entwickelung der Gehorschnecke," Archiv fur mikrosk. Anat.,
xxviii, 1886. I. Broman: "Die Entwickelungsgeschichte der Gehorknochelchen beim Menschen,"
Anat. Hefte, xi, 189S. S. Ramon y Cajal: "Nouvelles contributions a l'etude histologique de la retine,"
Journ. de I' Anat. et de la Physiol., xxxii, 1896.
 
 
G. Cirincione: "Ueber den gegenwartigen Stand der Frage hinsichtlich der Genese
des Glaskorpers," Arch, fur Augenheilk., L, 1904. A. Contino: "Ueber Bau and Entwicklung des Lidrandes beim Menschen," Arch, fur Ophthalmol., lxvi, 1908.
 
 
A. Contino: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Karunkel und der plica semilunaris beim
Menschen," Arch, fur Ophthalmol, lxxi, 1909. J. Disse: "Die erste Entwickelung der Riechnerven," Anat. Hefte, ix, 1897.
 
 
B. Fleischer: "Die Entwickelung der Tranenrohrchen bei den Saugetiere," Archiv
fur Ophthalmol., lxii, 1906. H. Fuchs : " Bemerkungen iiber die Herkunft und Entwickelung der Gehorknochelchen
bei Kaninchen-Embryonen (nebst Bemerkungen iiber die Entwickelung des
Knorpelskeletes der beiden ersten Visceralbogen)," Archiv. fur Anat und Phys.,
Anat. Abth., Supplement, 1905. J. Graberg: "Beitrage zur Genese des Geschmacksorgans der Menschen," Morphol.
 
 
Arbeiten, vn, 1898. J. A. Hammar: "Zur allgemeinen Morphologie der Schlundspalten des Menschen.
 
 
Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte des Mittelohrraumes, des ausseren Gehorganges
und des Paukenfelles beim Menschen," Anat. Anzeiger, xx, 1901.
 
 
J. A. Hammar: " Studien iiber die Entwicklung des Vorderdarms und einiger angrenz
ender Organe," Arch, fur mikrosk. Anat., Lix, 1902. C. Heerfordt: "Studien iiber den Muse, dilatator pupilke sammt Angabe von
gemeinschaftlicher Kennzeichen einiger Falle epithelialer Musculatur," Anat.
 
 
Hefte, xiv. J. Hegetschweiler: "Die embryologische Entwickelung des Steigbugels," Archiv
fur Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1898.
 
 
F. Hochstetter: "Ueber die Bildung der primitiven Choanen beim Menschen,"
Verhandl. Anat. Gesellsch., VI, 1892. W. His, Jr.: "Die Entwickelungsgeschichte des Acustico-Facialisgebietes beim
Menschen," Archiv fur Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., Supplement, 1897. A. von Kolliker: "Die Entwicklung und Bedeutung des Glaskorpers," Zeitschr.
 
 
fur wissensch. Zoolog., lxxvi, 1904. P. Lang: "Zur Entwicklung des Tranenausfiihrsapparates beim Menschen," Anat.
 
 
Anzeiger," xxxvni, 1911.
 
 
G. Leboucq: " Contribution a. l'etude de l'histogenese de la retine chez les mammiferes,"
Arch. Anat., Microsc, x, 1909. V. von Mihalkovicz: "Nasenhohle und Jacobsonsches Organ. Eine morphologische
Studie." Anat. Hefte. xi, 1898. J. L. Paitlet: "Contribution a l'etude de l'organe de Jacobson chez l'embryon
humain," Bibliogr. Anat., xvii, 1907. P. van Pee: "Recherches sur l'origine du corps vitre," Archives de Biol., xix, 1902. C. Rabl: "Ueber den Bau und Entwickelung der Linse," Zeitschrift fur wissensch.
 
 
Zoologie, lxiii and lxv, 1898; lxviii, 1899. A. Robinson: "On the Formation and Structure of the Optic Nerve and Its Relation
to the Optic Stalk," Journal of Anat. and Physiol., xxx, 1896. G. Speciale-Cirincione: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Tranendriise beim Menschen "
Arch.filr Ophthalmol., LXIX, 1908. J. P. Schaefeer: "The Genesis and Development of the Nasolacrimal Passages in
Man," Amer. Journ. Anat., xm, 1912. G. L. Streeter: "On the Development of the Membranous Labyrinth and the
Acoustic and Facial Nerves in the Human Embryo," Amer. Journ. of Anat.
 
 
vi, 1907. N. van der Stricht: "L'histogenese des parties constituantes du neuroepithelium
acoustique, des taches et des cretes acoustiques et de l'organe de Corti " Arch.
 
 
de Biol., xxiii, 1908. A. Szili: "Zur Anatomie und Entwickelungsgeschichte der hinteren Irisschichten
mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung des Musculus sphincter iridis des Menschen "
Anat. Anzeiger, xx, 1901. A. Szili: "Ueber das Entstehen eines fibrillares Stutzgewebes im Embryo und dessen
Verhaltnis zur Glaskorperfrage," Anat. Hejte, xxxv, 190S. F. Tuckerman: "On the Development of the Taste Organs in Man," Journal of Anat.
 
 
and Physiol., xxiv, 1889. R. Versari: "Ueber die Entwicklung der Blutgefasse des menschlichen Au^es "
Anat. Anzeiger, xxxv, 1909.
 
 
 
Chapter XVII. Post-Natal Development
 
 
In the preceding pages attention has been directed principally to the changes which take place in the various organs during the period before birth, for, with a few exceptions, notably that of the liver, the general form and histological peculiarities of the various organs are acquired before that epoch. Development does not, however, cease with birth, and a few statements regarding the changes which take place in the interval between birth and maturity will not be out of place in a work of this kind.
 
 
The conditions which obtain during embryonic life are so different from those to which the body must later adapt itself, that arrangements, such as those connected with the placental circulation, which are of fundamental importance during the life in utero, become of little or no use, while the relative importance of others is greatly diminished, and these changes react more or less profoundly on all parts of the body. Hence, although the post-natal development consists chiefly in the growth of the structures formed during earlier stages, yet the growth is not equally rapid in all parts, and indeed in some organs there may even be a relative decrease in size. That this is true can be seen from the annexed figure (Fig. 281), which represents the body of a child and that of an adult man drawn as of the same height. The greater relative size of the head and upper part of the body in the child is very marked, and the central point of the height of the child is situated at about the level of the umbilicus, while in the man it is at the symphysis pubis.
 
 
That there is a distinct change in the geometric form of the body during growth is also well shown by the following consideration. (Thoma). Taking the average height of a new-born male as 500 mm., and that of a man of thirty years of age as 1686 mm., the height of the body will have increased from birth to adolescence
- v _â– 
= 3.37 times. The child will weigh 3.1 kilos and the man
5::
66.1 kilos, and if the specific gravity of the body with the included
gases be taken in the one case as 0.90 and in the other as 0.93, then
the volume of the child's body will be 3.44 liters and that of the
man's 71.08 liters, and the increase in volume will be  -  -  =20.66.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 281.  -  Child ast> }vL\x Drawn as of th* " Growth of the Brain, " Contemporary Science Series Sons.)
 
 
If the increase in volume had taken place without any alteration in the geometric form of the body, it should be equal to the cube of the increase in height; this, however, is 3-37 s =38.27, a number wellnigh twice as large as the actual increase.
 
 
 
 
But in addition to these changes, which are largely dependent upon differences in the supply of nutrition, there are others associated with alterations in the general metabolism of the body. Up to adult life the constructive metabolism or anabolism is in excess of the destructive metabolism or katabolism, but the amount of the excess is much greater during the earlier periods of development and gradually diminishes as the adult condition is approached. That this is true during intrauterine life is shown by the following figures, compiled by Donaldson:
 
 
Age in Weeks
 
Weight in Grams
 
Age in Weeks
 
Weight in Grams
 
o (ovum)
 
o . 0006
 
24
 
635
 
4
 
 
28
 
1,220
 
8
 
4
 
32
 
1,700
 
12
 
20
 
36
 
2,240
 
16
 
120
 
40 (birth)
 
3,250
 
20
 
28 5
 
 
 
 
 
 
From this table it may be seen that the embryo of eight weeks is six thousand six hundred and sixty-seven times as heavy as the ovum from which it started, and if the increase of growth for each of the succeeding periods of four weeks be represented as percentages, it will be seen that the rate of increase undergoes a rapid diminution after the sixteenth week, and from that on diminishes gradually but less rapidly, the figures being as follows :
 
 
Periods of Weeks
 
Percentage Increase
 
Periods of Weeks
 
Percentage Increase
 
8-12 12-16 16-20 20-24
 
400
500
137 123
 
24-28 28-32 32-36 36-40
 
92
39 32
45
 
 
That the same is true in a general way of the growth after birth may be seen from the following table, representing the average weight of the body in English males at different years from birth up to twenty-three (Roberts), and also the percentage rate of increase.
 
 
 
Year
 
Number of Cases
 
Weight in Kilograms
 
Percentage Increase
 
o
 
45i
 
3-2
 
 
 
i
 
 
(10.8)
 
(238)
 
2
 
2
 
14.7*
 
(36)*
 
3
 
41
 
15-4
 
4.8*
 
4
 
102
 
16.9
 
9-7
 
5
 
*93
 
18. 1
 
7-i
 
6
 
224
 
20.1
 
11
 
7
 
246
 
22 .6
 
12.4
 
8
 
820
 
24.9
 
10.2
 
9
 
1,425
 
27.4
 
10
 
IO
 
1,464
 
30.6
 
"•5
 
ii
 
i,599
 
32.6
 
6-5
 
12
 
1,786
 
34-9
 
7
 
x 3
 
2,443
 
37-6
 
7-7
 
14
 
2,952
 
41.7
 
10.9
 
15
 
3,"8
 
46.6
 
11. 7
 
16
 
2,235
 
53-9
 
15-7
 
17
 
2,496
 
59-3
 
10
 
18
 
2,15°
 
62 .2
 
4.9
 
19
 
i,438
 
63-4
 
1.9
 
20
 
851
 
64.9
 
2-5
 
21
 
738
 
65-7
 
1 .2
 
22
 
542
 
67 .0
 
1.9
 
23
 
55i
 
67 .0
 
 
Certain interesting peculiarities in post-natal growth become apparent from an examination of this table. For while there is a general diminution in the rate of growth, yet there are marked irregularities, the most noticeable being (i) a rather marked diminution during the eleventh and twelfth years, followed by (2) a rapid
 
 
* From a comparison with other similar tables there is little doubt but that the weight given above for the second year is too high to be accepted as a good average
 
 
Age
 
 
LbsM
 
 
14
 
 
1 Z 3 * 5 6 f a 9 ID ft 12 13 14 1$ 16 17 19
 
II
 
i
 
2 3 4-5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 J& I
 
5 /
 
5 17 18
 
 
 
Age
Lbs/4
" 12
" 10
•■ 8
" 6
" * ' Z
 
 
Fig. 282.  -  Curves Showing the Annual Increase in Weight in (I) Boys and (II) Girls.
 
 
The faint line represents the curve from British statistics, the dotted line that from American (Bowditch), and the heavy line the average of the two. Before the sixth year the data are unreliable.  -  (Stephenson.)
acceleration which reaches its maximum at about the sixteenth year and then very rapidly diminishes. These irregularities may be more
Consequently the percentage increase for the second year is too high and that for the third year too low.
 
 
It may be mentioned that the weights in the original table are expressed in pounds avoirdupois and have been here converted into kilograms, and further the figures representing the percentage increase have been added.
 
 
 
clearly seen from the charts on page 474, which represent the curves obtained by plotting the annual increase of weight in boys (Chart I) and girls (Chart II). The diminution and acceleration of growth referred to above are clearly observable and it is interesting to note that they occur at earlier periods in girls than in boys, the diminution occurring in girls at the eighth and ninth years and the acceleration reaching its maximum at the thirteenth year.
 
 
Considering, now, merely the general diminution in the rate of growth which occurs from birth to adult life, it becomes interesting to note to what extent the organs which are more immediately associated with the metabolic activities of the body undergo a relative reduction in weight. The most important of these organs is undoubtedly the liver, but with it there must also be considered the thyreoid and thymus glands, and probably the suprarenal bodies. In all these organs there is a marked diminution in size as compared with the weight of the body, as will be seen from the following table (H. Vierordt), which also includes data regarding other organs in which a marked relative diminution, not in all cases readily explainable, occurs.
 
 
 
ABSOLUTE WEIGHT IN GRAMS.
 
 
New-born and Adult.
 
 
 
 
Liver
 
Thyreoid
 
Thymus
 
Suprarenal Bodies
 
Spleen
 
Heart
 
Kidney
 
„ . Spmal Brain _; . Cord
 
I4I-7 1,819.0
 
4-85 33-8
 
8.15 26.9
 
7-05 7-4
 
10.6
163.0
 
23.6 300.6
 
23-3 3°5-9
 
381.0 1,430.9
 
5-5 39-iS
 
PERCENTAGE WEIGHT OF ENTIRE BODY
New-born and Adult.
 
 
 
Liver
 
Thyreoid
 
Thymus
 
Suprarenal Bodies
 
Spleen
 
Heart
 
Kidney
 
Brain
 
Spinal Cord
 
4-57 2 -57
 
0.16
0.05
 
0.26 0.04
 
0.23
O.OI
 
o-34
0.25
 
0.76 0.46
 
0-7S 0.46
 
12 .29 2 .16
 
0.18 0.06
 
 
476
 
 
 
Recent observations by Hammar render necessary some modification of the figures given for the thymus in the above table. He finds the average weight of the gland at birth to be 13.26 grms., and that the weight increases up to puberty, averaging 37.52 grms. between the ages of 11 and 15. After that period it gradually diminishes, falling to 16.27 g rm sbetween 36 and 45, and to 6.0 grms. between 66 and 75. Expressed in percentage of the body weight this gives a value in the new-born of 0.42 and in an individual of 50 years of 0.02, a difference much more striking than that shown in Vierordt's table.
 
 
It must be mentioned, however, that the gland is subject to much individual variation, being largely influenced by nutritive conditions.
 
 
The remaining organs, not included in the tables given above, when compared with the weight of the body, either show an increase or remain practically the same.
 
 
ABSOLUTE WEIGHT IN GRAMS. New-born and Adult.
 
 
 
 
Skin and Subcutaneous Tissues
 
Skeleton
 
Stomach and Musculature , T
Intestines
 
Pancreas
 
Lungs
 
611.75 11,765.0
 
425-5 ii,575-°
 
776.5 65 28,732.0 1,364
 
3-5 97.6
 
54-i 994-9
 
 
PERCENTAGE OF BODY-WEIGHT. New-born and Adult.
 
 
 
 
Skin and Subcutaneous Tissues
 
Skeleton
 
Musculature
 
Stomach and Intestines
 
Pancreas Lungs
 
19-73 17.77
 
13-7 17.48
 
2 5-05 43-40
 
2 . 1 2 .06
 
0. 11 015
 
i-75 i-5o
 
 
From this table it will be seen that the greatest increment of weight is that furnished by the muscles, the percentage weight of which is one and three-fourths times as great in the adult as in the child. The difference does not, however, depend upon the differentiation of additional muscles; there are just as many muscles in the new-born child as in the adult, and the increase is due merely to an enlargement of organs already present. The percentage weight of the digestive tract, pancreas, and lungs remains practically the same, while in the case of the skeleton there is an appreciable increase, and in that of the skin and subcutaneous tissue a slight
 
 
 
Fig. 283.  -  Longitudinal Section through the Sacrum of a New-born Female Child. -  (Fehling.)
 
 
diminution. The latter is readily understood when it is remembered that the area of the skin, granting that the geometric form of the body remains the same, would increase as the square of the length, while the mass of the body would increase as the cube, and hence in comparing weights the skin might be expected to show a diminution even greater than that shown in the table.
 
 
 
The increase in the weight of the skeleton is due to a certain extent to growth, but chiefly to a completion of the ossification of the cartilage largely present at birth. A comparison of the weights of this system of organs does not, therefore, give evidence of the many changes of form which may be perceived in it during the period under consideration, and attention may be drawn to some of the more important of these changes.
 
 
In the spinal column one of the most noticeable peculiarities observable in the new-born child is the absence of the curves so characteristic of the adult. These curves are due partly to the weight of the body, transmitted through the spinal column to the hipjoint in the erect position, and partly to the action of the muscles, and it is not until the erect position is habitually assumed and the musculature gains in development that the curvatures become pronounced. Even the curve of the sacrum, so marked in the adult, is but slight in the new-born child, as may be seen from Fig. 283, in which the ventral surfaces of the first and second sacral vertebrae look more ventrally than posteriorly, so that there is no distinct promontory.
 
 
But, in addition to the appearance of the curvatures, other changes also occur after birth, the entire column becoming much more slender and the proportions of the lumbar and sacral vertebrae becoming quite different, as may be seen from the following table (Aeby) :
 
 
 
Lengths Of The Vertebral Regions Expressed As Percentages Of The Entire Column
 
 
 
Age
 
Cervical
 
Thoracic
 
Lumbar
 
New-born child
 
25.6
23-3 20.3 19.7 22 .1
 
47-5 46.7
45-6 47.2 46.6
 
26.8
 
Male 2 years
 
30.0
 
Male 5 years
 
34.2
 
Male 1 1 years
Male adult
 
33-i 31.6
 
 
The cervical region diminishes in length, while the lumbar gains, the thoracic remaining approximately the same. It may be noticed, furthermore, that the difference between the two variable regions is greater during youth than in the adult, a condition possibly associated with the general more rapid development of the lower portion of the body made necessary by its imperfect development during fetal life. The difference is due to changes in the vertebrae, the intervertebral disks retaining approximately the same relative thickness throughout the period under consideration.
 
 
The form of the thorax also alters, for whereas in the adult it is barrel-shaped, narrower at both top and bottom than in the middle, in the new-born child it is rather conical, the base of the cone being below. The difference depends upon slight differences in the form and articulations of the ribs, these being more horizontal in the child and the opening of the thorax directed more directly upward than in the adult.
 
 
As regards the skull, the processes of growth are very complicated. Cranium and brain react on one another, and hence, in harmony with the relatively enormous size of the brain at birth, the cranial cavity has a relatively greater volume in the child than in the adult. The fact that the entire roof and a considerable part of the sides of the skull are formed of membrane bones which, at birth, are not in sutural contact with one another throughout, gives opportunity for considerable modifications, and, furthermore, the base of the skull at the early stage still contains a considerable amount of unossified cartilage. Without entering into minute details, it may be stated that the principal general changes which the skull undergoes in its post-natal development are (i) a relative elongation of its anterior portion and (2) an increase in the relative height of the maxillae.
 
 
If a line be drawn between the central points of the occipital condyles, it will divide the base of the skull into two portions, which in the child's skull are equal in length. The portion of the skull in front of a similar line in the adult skull is very much greater than that which lies behind, the proportion between the two parts being 5:3, against 3:3 in the child (Froriep). There has, therefore, been a decidedly more rapid growth of the anterior portion of the skull, a growth which is asssociated with a corresponding increase in the dorso-ventral dimensions of the maxillae. These bones, indeed, play a very important part in determining the proportions of the skull at different periods. They are so intimately associated with the cranial portions of the skull that their increase necessitates a corresponding increase in the anterior part of the cranium, and their increase in this direction stands in relation to the development of the teeth, the eight teeth which are developed in each maxilla (including the premaxilla) in the adult requiring a longer bone than do the five teeth of the primary dentition, these again requiring a greater length when completely developed than they do in their immature condition in the new-born child.
 
 
 
 
 
Fig. 284.  -  Skull of a New-born Child and of an Adult Man, Drawn as of Approximately the Same Size.  -  (Henke.)
 
 
 
 
But far more striking than the difference just described is that in the relative height of the cranial and facial regions (Fig. 284). It has been estimated that the volumes of the two portions have a ratio of 8: 1 in the new-born child, 4: 1 at five years of age, and 2:1 in the adult skull (Froriep) , and these differences are due principally to changes in the vertical dimensions of the maxillae. As with the increase in length, the increase now under consideration is, to a certain extent at least, associated with the development of the teeth, hese structures calling into existence the alveolar processes which ,re practically wanting in the child at birth. But a more important actor is the development of the maxillary sinuses, the practically olid bodies of the maxillae becoming transformed into hollow shells, rhese cavities, together with the sinuses of the sphenoid and frontal >ones, which are also post-natal developments, seem to stand in elation to the increase in length of the anterior portion of the skull, erving to diminish the weight of the portion of the skull in front »f the occipital condyles and so relieving the muscles of the neck of a onsiderable strain to which they would otherwise be subjected.
 
 
These changes in the proportions of the skull have, of course, nuch to do with the changes in the general proportions of the face. 3ut the changes which take place in the mandible are also imporant in this connection, and are similar to those of the maxillae in leing associated with the development of the teeth. In the new10m child the horizontal ramus is proportionately shorter than in he adult, while the vertical ramus is very short and joins the Lorizontal one at an obtuse angle. The development of the teeth if the primary dentition, and later of the three molars, necessitates ,n elongation of the horizontal ramus equivalent to that occurring n the maxillae, and, at the same time, the separation of the alveolar •orders of the two bones requires an elongation of the vertical ramus f the condyle is to preserve its contact with the mandibular fossa, ,nd this, again, demands a diminution of the angle at which the ami join if the teeth of the two jaws are to be in proper apposition.
 
 
In the bones of the appendicular skeleton secondary epiphysial enters play an important part in the ossification, and in few are hese centers developed prior to birth, while the union of the epiphyes to the main portions of the bones takes place only toward maurity. The dates at which the various primary and secondary enters appear, and the time at which they unite, may be seen from he following table:
 
 
31
 
 
482
 
 
POST-NATAL DEVELOPMENT UPPER EXTREMITY.
 
 
 
 
Bone
 
Appearance of
 
Appearance of Secondary
 
Fusion of
 
Primary Center
 
Centers
 
Centers
 
Clavicle
 
6th week.
 
 
 
(At sternal end) 17th year.
 
 
 
20th year.
 
 
 
Scapula.
 
 
Body
 
8th week. <.
 
 
 
2 acromial 15th year.
 
 
2 on vertical border 16th year.
 
 
 
> 20th year.
 
 
 
Coracoid ....
 
 
 
1 st year.
 
 
 
 
 
15 th year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Head 1st year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Great tuberosity 3d year.
 
 
 
> 20th year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Lesser tuberosity 5th year.
 
 
 
J
 
Humerus
 
â– jth week.
 
 
 
Inner condyle 5th year.
 
 
 
1 8th year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Capitellum 3d year.
 
 
 
1
 
 
 
 
 
Trochlea 10th year.
 
 
 
[• 17 th year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Outer condyle 14th year.
 
 
 
J
 
Ulna
 
jth week.
 
 
 
Olecranon 10th year.
 
 
 
16th year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Distal epiphysis 4th year.
 
 
 
1 8th year.
 
 
 
Radius
 
jth week.
 
 
 
Proximal epiphysis 5th year.
 
 
 
17 th year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Distal epiphysis 2d year.
 
 
 
20th year.
 
 
 
Capita turn
 
1st year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Hamatum
 
2d year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Triquetrum . . .
 
 
 
3d year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4th year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Multangulum
 
5th year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
majus.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Navicular
 
6th year.
 
 
Multangulum
 
8th year.
 
 
 
minus.
 
 
 
Pisiform
 
12 th year.
 
 
Metacarpals . . .
 
 
 
gth week.
 
 
 
3d year.
 
 
 
20th year.
 
 
 
Phalanges
 
gth-nth week.
 
 
 
3d~5th years.
 
 
 
17 th-! 8th years.
 
 
 
 
The dates in italics are before birth.
 
 
 
 
POST-NATAL DEVELOPMENT LOWER EXTREMITY.
 
 
 
 
483
 
 
Bone.
 
 
 
Appearance
 
of
 
Appearance of Secondary Fusion of
 
Primary Center
 
Centers
 
Centers
 
 
 
gth week.
 
 
 
 
 
Crest 15th year.
 
 
Anterior inferior spine 15 th year.
 
 
 
V
 
 
 
 
 
â–  22d year.
 
 
 
Ischium
 
4th month.
 
 
 
Tuberosity 15th year.
 
 
 
Pubis
 
4th month.
 
 
 
Crest 1 Sth year.
 
 
 
 
 
Patella
 
Cartilage appears at 4th month, ossification in 3d year.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Head 1st year.
 
 
 
20 th year.
 
 
 
Femur
 
â– jth week.
 
 
 
J
 
Great trochanter 4th year. Lesser trochanter 13 th- 14th year. Condyle gth month.
 
 
 
19 th year. 1 Sth year. 2 1 st year.
 
 
 
Tibia
 
jth week.
 
 
 
1
 
Head end of gth month. Distal end 2d year.
 
 
 
2ist-2 5thyear. 1 Sth year.
 
 
 
Fibula
 
Sth week.
 
 
 
/ \
 
Upper epiphysis 5th year. Lower epiphysis 2d year.
 
 
 
21st year. 20th year.
 
 
 
Talus
 
jth month.
 
 
 
 
Calcaneus
 
6th month.
 
 
 
 
 
10th year.
 
 
 
1 6 th year.
 
 
 
Cuboid
 
A few days after birth.
 
 
 
Navicular
 
4th year.
 
 
 
Cuneiforms.
 
 
 
1 st year.
 
 
Metatarsals
 
gth week.
 
 
 
 
 
3d year.
 
 
 
20th year.
 
 
 
Phalanges
 
gth-i2th week
 
 
 
4th-8th years.
 
 
 
I7th-i8th years.
 
 
 
The dates in italics are before birth.
 
 
So far as the actual changes in the form of the appendicular bones are concerned, these are most marked in the case of the lower limb. The ossa innominata alter somewhat in their proportions after birth, a fact which may conveniently be demonstrated by considering the changes which occur in the proportions of the pelvic diameters, although it must be remembered that these diameters are greatly influenced by the development of the sacral curve. Taking the conjugate diameter of the pelvic brim as a unit for comparison, the antero-posterior (dorso-ventral) and transverse diameters of the child and adult have the proportions shown in the table on the opposite page (Fehling).
 
 
It will be seen from this that the general form of the pelvis in the new-born child is that of a cone, gradually diminishing in diameter from the brim to the outlet, a condition very different from what obtains in the adult. Furthermore, it is interesting to note
 
 
Diameter.
 
 
 
 
New-born
 
Adult
 
New-born
 
Female.
 
 
 
Female.
 
 
 
Male.
 
 
 
i .00
 
1 .00
 
1 .00
 
1. 19
 
1 .292
 
1 .20
 
0.96
 
1. 19
 
0.91
 
1 .01
 
1. 151
 
0.99
 
0.91
 
1.05
 
0.78
 
0.83
 
i-i54
 
0.84
 
 
Adult Male.
 
 
 
 
(Conjugata vera . Transverse
>, f Antero-posterior
rt 1
U y Transverse
-^ ( Antero-posterior
O Transverse
 
 
1.294 1. 18 1. 14 1 .07
1 -153
 
 
that sexual differences in the form of the pelvis are clearly distinguishable at birth; indeed, according to Fehling's .observations, they become noticeable during the fourth month of intrauterine development.
 
 
The upper epiphysis of the femur is entirely unossified at birth and consists of a cartilaginous mass, much broader than the rather slender shaft and possessing a deep notch upon its upper surface (Fig. 285). This notch marks off the great trochanter from the head of the bone, and at this stage of development there is no neck, the head being practically sessile. As development proceeds the inner upper portion of the shaft grows more rapidly than the outer portion, carrying the head away from the great trochanter and forming the neck of the bone. The acetabulum is shallower at birth than in the adult and cannot contain more than half the head of the femur; consequently the articular portion of the head is much less extensive than in the adult.
 
 
It is a well-known fact that the new-born child habitually holds the feet with the soles directed toward one another, a position only reached in the adult with some difficulty, and associated with this supination or inversion there is a pronounced extension of the foot (i. e., flexion upon the leg as usually understood; see p. 102), it being difficult to flex the child's foot beyond a line at right angles with the axis of the leg. These conditions are due apparently to the extensor and tibialis muscles being relatively shorter and the opposing muscles relatively longer than in the adult, and with the elongation or shortening, as the case may be, of the muscles on the assumption
 
 
 
Fig. 2S5.  -  Longitudinal Sections of the Head of the Femur of (.4) New-born
Child and (B) a Later Stage of Development.
 
 
ep, Epiphysial center for the head; h, head; /, trochanter.  -  (Henke.)
of the erect position, the bones in the neighborhood of the anklejoint come into new relations to one another, the result being a modification of the form of the articular surfaces, especially of the talus (astragalus). In the child the articular cartilage of the trochlear surface of this bone is continued onward to a considerable extent upon the neck of the bone, which comes into contact with the tibia in the extreme extension possible in the child. In the adult, however, such extreme extension being impossible, the cartilage upon the neck gradually disappears. The supination in the child brings the talus
 
in close contact with the inner surface of the calcaneus and with the sustentaculum tali; with the alteration of position a growth of these portions of the calcaneus occurs, the sustentaculum becoming higher and broader, and so becoming an obstacle in the way of supination in the adult. At the same time a greater extent of the outer surface of the talus comes into contact with the lateral malleolus, with the result that the articular surface is considerably increased on that portion of the bone. Marked changes in the form of the talo-navicular articulation also occur, but their consideration would lead somewhat further than seems desirable.
 
 
 
 
Literature
 
C. Aeby: "Die Altersverschiedenheiten der menschlichen Wirbelsaule." Archiv fur
Anal, und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1879. W. Camerer: " Utersuchungen iiber Massenwachsthum und Langen wachsthum der
Kinder," Jahrbuchfiir Kinderheilkunde, xxxvi, 1893. H. H. Donaldson: "The Growth of the Brain," London, 1895. H. Fehling: "Die Form des Beckens beim Fotus und Neugeborenen und ihre Bezie
hung zu der beim Erwachsenen," Archiv fur Gynakol., x, 1876. H. Friedenthal: " Das Wachsthum des Korpergewichtes des Menschen und anderer
Saugethiere in verschiedenen Lebensaltern," Zeit. allgem. Physiol., ix, 1909. J. A. Hammar: "Ueber Gewicht, Involution und Persistenz der Thymus im Post
fotalleben des Menschen," Archiv fur Anat. und Phys., Anat. Abth., Supplement,
1906. W. Henke: " Anatomie des Kindersalters," Handbuch der Kinder krankheiten (Cerhardt) ,
Tubingen, 1881. C. Hennig: "Das kindliche Becken," Archiv fur Anat. und Physiol., Anat. Abth., 1880. C. Huter: "Anatomische Studien an den Extremitatengelenken Neugeborener und
Erwachsener," Archiv fur patholog. Anat. und Physiol., xxv, 1862. W. Stephenson: "On the Relation of Weight to Height and the Rate of Growth in
Man," TheLancet, 11, 1888. R. Thoma: " Untersuchungen iiber die Grosse und das Gewicht der anatomischen
Bestandtheile des menschlichen Korpers," Leipzig, 1882. H. Vierordt: "Anatomische, Physiologische und Physikalische Daten und Tabellen,"
Jena, 1893. H. Welcker: "Untersuchungen iiber Wachsthum und Bau des menschlichen
Schadels," Leipzig, 1862.




{{McMurrich1914 footer}}
{{McMurrich1914 footer}}

Latest revision as of 01:41, 17 June 2016

Embryology - 23 Apr 2024    Facebook link Pinterest link Twitter link  Expand to Translate  
Google Translate - select your language from the list shown below (this will open a new external page)

العربية | català | 中文 | 中國傳統的 | français | Deutsche | עִברִית | हिंदी | bahasa Indonesia | italiano | 日本語 | 한국어 | မြန်မာ | Pilipino | Polskie | português | ਪੰਜਾਬੀ ਦੇ | Română | русский | Español | Swahili | Svensk | ไทย | Türkçe | اردو | ייִדיש | Tiếng Việt    These external translations are automated and may not be accurate. (More? About Translations)

McMurrich JP. The Development Of The Human Body. (1914) P. Blakiston's Son & Co., Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.

Historic Disclaimer - information about historic embryology pages 
Mark Hill.jpg
Pages where the terms "Historic" (textbooks, papers, people, recommendations) appear on this site, and sections within pages where this disclaimer appears, indicate that the content and scientific understanding are specific to the time of publication. This means that while some scientific descriptions are still accurate, the terminology and interpretation of the developmental mechanisms reflect the understanding at the time of original publication and those of the preceding periods, these terms, interpretations and recommendations may not reflect our current scientific understanding.     (More? Embryology History | Historic Embryology Papers)
   McMurrich 1914: General 1 Spermatozoon - Spermatogenesis - Ovum - Fertilization | 2 Ovum Segmentation - Germ Layer Formation | 3 Medullary Groove - Notochord - Somites | 4 Embryo External Form | 5 Yolk-stalk - Belly-stalk - Fetal Membranes Organogeny 6 Integumentary System | 7 Connective Tissues - Skeleton | 8 Muscular System | 9 Circulatory - Lymphatic Systems | 10 Digestive Tract and Glands | 11 Pericardium - Pleuro-peritoneum - Diaphragm | 12 Respiration | 13 Urinogenital System | 14 Suprarenal System | 15 Nervous System | 16 Organs of Special Sense | 17 Post-natal | Figures

Chapter VIII. The Development of the Muscular System

Two forms of muscular tissue exist in the human body, the striated tissue, which forms the skeletal muscles and is under the control of the central nervous system, and the non-striated, which is controlled by the sympathetic nervous system and is found in the skin, in the walls of the digestive tract, the blood-vessels and lymphatics, and in connection with the genito-urinary apparatus. In the walls of the heart a muscle tissue occurs which is frequently regarded as a third form, characterized by being under control of the sympathetic system and yet being striated; it is, however, in its origin much more nearly allied to the non-striated than to the striated form of tissue, and will be considered a variety of the former.


The Histogenesis of Non-striated Muscular Tissue

With the exception of the sphincter and dilator of the pupil and the muscles of the sudoriparous glands, which are formed from the ectoderm, all the non-striated muscle tissue of the body is formed by the conversion of mesenchyme cells into muscle-fibers. The details of this process have been worked out by McGill for the musculature of the digestive and respiratory tracts of the pig and are as follows: The mesenchyme surrounding the mucosa in these tracts is at first a loose syncytium (Fig. 117, m) and in the regions where the muscle tissue is to form a condensation of the mesenchyme occurs followed by an elongation of the mesenchyme cells and their nuclei, so that the muscle layers become clearly distinguishable from the neighboring undifferentiated tissue (Fig. 117, mm). Fibrils of two kinds then begin to appear in the cytoplasm of the muscle cells. Coarse fibrils (f.c) make their appearance as rows of granules, which enlarge and increase in number until they finally fuse to form homogeneous



Fig. 117. - Longitudinal Section of the Lower Part of the Oesophagus of a Pig Embryo of 15 mm, Showing the Histogenesis of the Non-striated Musculature.


b, Basement membrane; e, epithelium; /.c, coarse fibril;//., fine fibril; ga, ganglion of Auerbach's plexus; gm, ganglion of Meissner's plexus; m, mesenchyne; mm, muscularis mucosae; pb, protoplasmic bridge; vf, varicose fibril. - (McCill.)


fibrils that are at first varicose, but later become of uniform caliber. Fine fibrils (/./) which are homogeneous from the first, make their appearance after the coarse ones and in some cases seem to be formed by the splitting of the latter. They are scattered uniformly throughout the cytoplasm of the muscle cells and increase in number as development proceeds, while the coarse fibrils diminish and may be entirely wanting in the adult tissue.


Some of the mesenchyme cells in each muscle sheet fail to undergo the differentiation just described and multiply to form the interstitial connective tissue, which usually divides the muscle cells into more or less distinct bundles. Traces of the original syncytial nature of the tissue are to be seen in the intercellular bridges that occur between the non-striated muscle cells of many adult forms.


The cells from which the heart musculature develops are at first of the usual well defined embryonic type, but, as development proceeds, they become irregularly stellate in form, the processes of neighboring cells fuse and, eventually, there is formed a continuous mass of protoplasm or syncytium in which all traces of cell boundaries are lacking (Fig. 118). While the individual cells, or myoblasts as they are termed, are still recognizable, granules appear in their cytoplasm, and these arrange themselves in rows and unite to form slender fibrils, which at first do not extend beyond the limits of the myoblasts in which they have appeared, but later, as the fusion of the cells proceeds, are continued from one cell territory into the other


Fig. 118. - Section through the Heartwall of a Duck Embryo of Three Days. - (M. Heidenhain.)


through considerable stretches of the syncytium, without regard to the original cell areas.


The fibrils multiply, apparently by longitudinal division, and arrange themselves in circles around areas of the syncytium (compare Fig. 119). As the multiplication of the fibrils continues those newly formed arrange themselves around the interior of each of the original circles and gradually occupy the entire cytoplasm, or sarcoplasm as it may now be termed, except immediately around the nuclei where, even in the adult, a certain amount of undifferentiated sarcoplasm persists. The fibrils when first formed are apparently homo


Fig. 119. - Cross-section of a Muscle prom the Thigh of a Pig Embryo 75 mm.


Long. A, Central nucleus; B, new peripheral nucleus. - (Macallum.)


geneous, but later they become differentiated into two distinct substances which alternate with one another throughout the length of the fibril and produce the characteristic transverse striation of the tissue. Finally stronger interrupted transverse bands of so-called cement substance appear, dividing the tissue into areas which have usually been regarded as representing the original myoblasts, but are really devoid of significance as cells, the tissue remaining, strictly speaking, a syncytium.


The Histogenesis of Striated Muscle Tissue

The histogenesis of striated or voluntary muscle tissue resembles very closely that which has just been described for the heart muscle. There is a similar formation of a syncytium by the fusion of the cells of the myotomes, an appearance of granules which unite to form fibrils, an increase of the fibrils by longitudinal division and a primary arrangement of the fibrils around the periphery of areas of sarcoplasm (Fig. 119), each of which represents a muscle fiber. In addition there is an active proliferation of the nuclei of the original myoblasts, the new nuclei arranging themselves more or less regularly in rows and later migrating from their original central position to the periphery of the fibers, and, in the limb muscles, the development is further complicated by a process of degeneration which affects groups of muscle fibers, so that bundles of normal fibers are separated by strands of degenerated tissue in which the fibrils have disappeared, the nuclei have become pale and the sarcoplasm vacuolated and homogeneous. Later the degenerated tissue seems to disappear entirely and mesenchymatous connective tissue grows in between the persisting fibers, grouping them into bundles and the bundles into the individual muscles.


So long as the formation of new fibrils continues, the increase in the thickness of a muscle is probably due to a certain extent to an increase in the actual number of fibers, which results from the division of those already existing. Subsequently, however, this mode of growth ceases, the further increase of the muscle depending upon an increase in size of its constituent elements (Macallum).


The Development of the Skeletal Muscles

It has already been pointed out that all the skeletal muscles of the body, with the exception of those connected with the branchial arches, are derived from the myotomes of the mesodermic somites, even the limb muscles possibly having such an origin, although the cells of the tissue from which the muscles of the limb buds form lack an epithelial arrangement and are indistinguishable from the somatic mesenchyme which forms the axial cores of the limbs.


The various fibers of each myotome are at first loosely arranged, but later they become more compact and are arranged parallel with one another, their long axes being directed antero-posteriorly. This stage is also transitory, however, the fibers of each myotome undergoing various modifications to produce the conditions existing in the adult, in which the original segmental arrangement of the fibers can be perceived in comparatively few muscles. The exact nature of these modifications is almost unknown from direct observation, but since the relation between a nerve and the myotome belonging to the same segment is established at a very early period of development and persists throughout life, no matter what changes of fusion, splitting, or migration the myotome may undergo, it is possible to trace out more or less completely the history of the various myotomes by determining their segmental innervation. It is known, for example, that the latissimus dorsi arises from the seventh and eighth* cervical myotomes, but later undergoes a migration, becoming attached to the lower thoracic and lumbar vertebrae and to the crest of the ilium, far away from its place of origin (Mall), and yet it retains its nerve-supply from the seventh and eighth cervical nerves with which it was originally associated, its nerve-supply consequently indicating the extent of its migration.


By following the indications thus afforded, it may be seen that the changes which occur in the myotomes may be referred to one or more of the following processes: 1. A longitudinal splitting into two or more portions, a process well illustrated by the trapezius and sternomastoid, which have differentiated by the longitudinal splitting of a single sheet and contain therefore portions of the same myotomes. The sternohyoid and omohyoid have also differentiated by the same process, and, indeed, it is of frequent occurrence.


2. A tangential splitting into two or more layers. Examples of this are also abundant and are afforded by the muscles of the fourth, fifth, and sixth layers of the back, as recognized in English text-books


  • This enumeration is based on convenience in associating the myotomes with the nerves which supply them. The myotomes mentioned are those which correspond to the sixth and seventh cervical vertebrae.


of anatomy, by the two oblique and the transverse layers of the abdominal walls, and by the intercostal muscles and the transversus of the thorax.


3. A fusion of portions of successive myotomes to form a single muscle, again a process of frequent occurrence, and well illustrated by the rectus abdominis (which is formed by the fusion of the ventral portions of the last six or seven thoracic myotomes) or by the superficial portions of the sacro-spinalis.


4. A migration of parts of one or more myotomes over others. An example of this process is to be found in the latissimus dorsi, whose history has already been referred to, and it is also beautifully shown by the serratus anterior and the trapezius, both of which have extended far beyond the limits of the segments from which they are derived.


5. A degeneration of portions or the whole of a myotome. This process has played a very considerable part in the evolution of the muscular system in the vertebrates. When a muscle normally degenerates, it becomes converted into connective tissue, and many of the strong aponeurotic sheets which occur in the body owe their origin to this process. Thus, for example, the aponeurosis connecting the occipital and frontal portions of the occipito-frontalis is formed in this process and is muscular in such forms as the lower monkeys, and a good example is also to be found in the aponeurosis which occupies the interval between the superior and inferior serrati postici, these two muscles being continuous in lower forms. The strong lumbar aponeurosis and the aponeuroses of the oblique and transverse muscles of the abdomen are also good examples.


Indeed, in comparing one of the mammals with a member of one of the lower classes of vertebrates, the greater amount of connective tissue compared with the amount of muscular tissue in the former is very striking, the inference being that these connectivetissue structures (fasciae, aponeuroses, ligaments) represent portions of the muscular tissue of the lower form (Bardeleben). Many of the accessory ligaments occurring in connection with diarthrodial joints apparently owe their origin to a degeneration of muscle tissue, the fibular lateral ligament of the knee-joint, for instance, being probably a degenerated portion of the peroneus longus, while the sacrotuberous ligament appears to stand in a similar relation to the long head of the biceps femoris (Sutton).


6. Finally, there may be associated with any of the first four processes a change in the direction of the muscle-fibers. The original antero-posterior direction of the fibers is retained in comparatively few of the adult muscles and excellent examples of the process here referred to are to be found in the intercostal muscles and the muscles of the abdominal walls. In the musculature associated with the branchial arches the alteration in the direction of the fibers occurs even in the fishes, in which the original direction of the muscle-fibers is very perfectly retained in other myotomes, the branchial muscles, however, being arranged parallel with the branchial cartilages or even passing dorso-ventrally between the upper and lower portions of an arch, and so forming what may be regarded as a constrictor of the arch. This alteration of direction dates back so far that the constrictor arrangement may well be taken as the primary condition in studying the changes which the branchial musculature has undergone in the mammalia.


It would occupy too much space 'in a work of this kind to consider in detail the history of each one of the skeletal muscles of the human body, but a statement of the general plan of their development will not be out of place. For convenience the entire system may be divided into three portions - the cranial, trunk and limb musculature; and of these, the trunk musculature may first be considered.


The Trunk Musculature

It has already been seen (p. 82) that the myotomes at first occupy a dorsal position, becoming prolonged ventrally as development proceeds so as to overlap the somatic mesoderm, until those of opposite sides come into contact in the mid-ventral line. Before this is accomplished, however, a longitudinal splitting of each myotome occurs, whereby there is separated off a dorsal portion which gives rise to a segment of the dorsal musculature of the trunk and is supplied by the ramus dorsalis


of its corresponding spinal nerve. In the lower vertebrates this separation of each of the trunk myotomes into a dorsal and ventral portion is much more distinct in the adult than it is in man, the two portions being separated by a horizontal plate of connective tissue extending the entire length of the trunk and being attached by its inner edge to the transverse processes of the vertebrae, while peripherally it becomes continuous with the connective tissue of the


Fig. 120. - Embryo of 13 mm. showing the Formation of the Rectus Muscle. - (Mall.)

dermis along a line known as the lateral line. In man the dorsal portion is also much smaller in proportion to the ventral portion than in the lower vertebrates. From this dorsal portion of the myotomes are derived the muscles belonging to the three deepest layers of the dorsal musculature, the more superficial layers being composed of muscles belonging to the limb system. Further longitudinal and tangential divisions and a fusion of successive myotomes bring about the conditions which obtain in the adult dorsal musculature.


While the myotomes are still some distance from the mid-ventral line another longitudinal division affects their ventral edges (Fig. 120), portions being thus separated which later fuse more or less perfectly to form longitudinal bands of muscle, those of opposite sides being brought into apposition along the mid-ventral line by the continued growth ventrally of the myotomes. In this way are formed the rectus and pyramidalis muscles of the abdomen and the depressors of the hyoid bone, the genio-hyoid and genio-glossus* in the neck region. In the thoracic region this rectus set of muscles, as it may be termed, is not represented except as an anomaly, its absence being probably correlated with the development of the sternum in this region.


The lateral portions of the myotomes which intervene between the dorsal and rectus muscles divide tangentially, producing from their dorsal portions in the cervical and lumbar regions muscles, such as the longus capitis and colli and the psoas, which lie beneath the vertebral column and hence have been termed hyposkeletal muscles (Huxley). More ventrally three sheets of muscles, lying one above the other, are formed, the fibers of each sheet being arranged in a definite direction differing from that found in the other sheets. In the abdomen there are thus formed the two oblique and the transverse muscles, in the thorax the intercostals and the transversa thoracis, while in the neck these portions of some of the myotomes disappear, those of the remainder giving rise to the scaleni muscles, portions of the trapezius and sternomastoid (Bolk), and possibly the hyoglossus and styloglossus. In the abdominal region, and to a considerable extent in the neck also, the various portions of myotomes fuse together, but in the thorax they retain in the intercostals their original distinctness, being separated by the ribs.


  • This muscle is supplied by the hypoglossal nerve, but for the present purpose it is convenient to regard this as a spinal nerve, as indeed it primarily is.



The table on page 203 will show the relation of the various trunk muscles to the portions of the myotomes.


The intimate association between the pelvic girdle and the axial skeleton brings about extensive modifications of the posterior trunk myotomes. So far as their dorsal portions are concerned probably all these myotomes as far back as the fifth sacral are represented in the sacro-spinalis, but the ventral portions from the first lumbar myotome onward are greatly modified. The last myotome taking part in the formation of the rectus abdominis is the twelfth thoracic and the last to be represented in the lateral musculature of the


Fig. 121. - Perineal Region of Embryos of (A) Two Months and (25) Four to Five Months, showing the Development of the Perineal Muscles.


dc, Nervus dorsalis clitoridis; p, pudendal nerve; sa, sphincter ani; sc sphincter cloacae; sv, sphincter vaginse. - (Popowsky.)

abdomen is the first lumbar, the ventral portions of the remaining lumbar and of the first and second sacral myotomes either having disappeared or being devoted to the formation of the musculature of the lower limb.


The ventral portions of the third and fourth sacral myotomes are represented, however, by the levator ani and coccygeus, and are the last myotomes which persist as muscles in the human body, although traces of still more posterior myotomes are to be found in muscles such as the curvator coccygis sometimes developed in connection with the coccygeal vertebrae.


The perineal muscles and the external sphincter ani are also developments of the third and fourth (and second) sacral myotomes. At a time when the cloaca (see p. 280) is still present, a sheet of muscles lying close beneath the integument forms a sphincter around its opening (Fig. 121). On the development of the partition which divides the cloaca into rectal and urinogenital portions, the sphincter is also diyided, its more posterior portion persisting as the external sphincter ani, while the anterior part gradually differentiates into the various perineal muscles (Popowsky).


The Cranial Musculature

As was pointed out in an earlier chapter, the existence of distinct mesodermic somites has not yet been completely demonstrated in the head of the human embryo, but in lower forms, such as the elasmobranch fishes, they are clearly distinguishable, and it may be supposed that their indistinctness in man is a secondary condition. Exactly how many of these somites are represented in the mammalian head it is impossible to say, but it seems probable, from comparison with lower forms, that there is a considerable number. The majority of them, however, early undergo degeneration, and in the adult condition only three are recognizable, two of which are prseoral in position and one postoral. The myotomes of the anterior praeoral segment give rise to the muscles of the eye supplied by the third cranial nerve, those of the posterior one furnish the superior oblique muscles innervated by the fourth nerve, while from the postoral myotomes the lateral recti, supplied by the sixth nerve, are developed. The muscles supplied by the hypoglossal nerve are also derived from myotomes, but they have already been considered in connection with the trunk musculature.


The remaining muscles of the head differ from all other voluntary muscles of the body in the fact that they are derived from the branchiomeres formed by the segmentation of the cephalic ventral mesoderm. These muscles, therefore, are not to be regarded as equivalent to the myotomic muscles if their embryological origin is to be taken as a criterion of equivalency, and in their case it would seem, from the fact that they are innervated by nerves fundamentally distinct from those which supply the myotomic muscles, that this criterion is a good one. They must be regarded, therefore, as belonging to a special category, and may be termed branchiomeric muscles to distinguish them from the myotomic set.


If their embryological origin be taken as a basis for homology, it is clear that they should be regarded as equivalent to the muscles derived from the ventral mesoderm of the trunk, and these, as has been seen, are the non-striated muscles associated with the viscera, among which may be included the striated heart muscle. At first sight this homology seems decidedly strained, chiefly because long-continued custom has regarded the histological and physiological peculiarities of striated and non-striated muscle tissue as fundamental. It may be pointed out, however, that the branchiomeric muscles are, strictly speaking, visceral muscles, and indeed give rise to muscle sheets (the constrictors of the pharynx) which surround the upper or pharyngeal portion of the digestive tract. It is possible, then, that the homology is not so strained as might appear, but further discussion of it may profitably be deferred until the cranial nerves are under consideration.


The skeleton of the first branchial arch becomes converted partly into the jaw apparatus and partly into auditory ossicles, and the muscles derived from the corresponding branchiomere become the muscles of mastication (the temporal, masseter, and pterygoids), the mylohyoid, anterior belly of the digastric, the tensor veli palatini and the tensor tympani. The nerve which corresponds to the first branchial arch is the trigeminus or fifth, and consequently these various muscles are supplied by it.


The second arch has corresponding to it the seventh nerve, and its musculature is partly represented by the stylohyoid and posterior belly of the digastric and by the stapedius muscle of the middle ear. From the more superficial portions of the branchiomere, however, a sheet of tissue arises which gradually extends upward and downward to form a thin covering for the entire head and neck, its lower portion giving rise to the platysma and the nuchal fascia which extends backward from the dorsal border of this muscle, while its upper parts become the occipito-frontalis and the superficial muscles of the face (the muscles of expression), together with the fascia? which unite the various muscles of this group. The extension of the platysma sheet of muscles over the face is well shown by the development of the branches of the facial nerve which supply it (Fig. 122).


Fig. 122. - Head of Embryos (.4) of Two Months and (B) of Three Months showing the Extension of the Seventh Nerve upon the Face. - (Popowsky.)


The degeneration of the upper part of the third arch produces a shifting forward of one of the muscles derived from its branchiomere, the stylopharyngeus arising from the base of the styloid process. The innervation of this muscle by the ninth nerve indicates, however, its true significance, and since fibers of this nerve of the third arch also pass to the constrictor muscles of the pharynx, a portion of these must also be regarded as having arisen from the third branchiomere.


The cartilages of the fourth and fifth arches enter into the formation of the larynx and the muscles of the corresponding branchiomeres constitute the muscles of the larynx, together with the remaining portions of the constrictors of the pharynx and the muscles of the soft palate, with the exception of the tensor. Both these arches have branches of the tenth nerve associated with them and hence this nerve supplies the muscles named. In addition, two of the extrinsic muscles of the tongue, the glosso-palatinus and chondroglossus, belong to the fourth or fifth branchiomere, although the remaining muscles of this physiological set are myotomic in origin.


Finally, portions of two other muscles should probably be included in the list of branchiomeric muscles, these muscles being the trapezius and sternomastoid. It has already been seen that they are partly derived from the cervical myotomes, but they are also innervated in part by the spinal accessory, and since the motor fibers of this nerve are serially homologous with those of the vagus it would seem that the muscles which they supply are probably branchiomeric in origin. Observations on the development of these muscles, determining their relations to the branchiomeres, are necessary, however, before their morphological significance can be regarded as definitely settled.


The table on page 209 shows the relations of the various cranial muscles to the myotomes and branchiomeres, as well as to the motor cranial nerves.


Eleventh



Trapezius. Sternomastoid.



Tenth



Constrictors of pharynx (in part). Pharyngopalatinus. Levator veli palatini. Musculus uvulae. Muscles of the larynx. Glosso-pal atinus.


Chrondro glossus.


â– 5 .S



Stylo-pha ryngeus.


Constrictors of pharynx (in part).


6 > <U CO



Stylohyoid.


Digastric (posterior belly).


Stapedius. Platysma. Occipitofrontalis.


Muscles of expression.


CO

a) 3 h-1 M



3


Temporal. . Masseter.


Pterygoids.


Mylohyoid.


Digastric (anterior belly).


Tensor veli palatini.


Tensor tympani.


3 3


O u CO O

•A M V

1 O

«5 <u "0 s


'in U % I u pq

I 3 1


The Limb Muscles.

It has been customary to regard the limb muscles as derivatives of certain of the myotomes, these structures in their growth vent rally in the trunk walls being supposed to pass out upon the postaxial surface of the limb buds and loop back again to the trunk along the praeaxial surface, each myotome thus giving rise to a portion of both the dorsal and the ventral musculature of the limb. This view has not, however, been verified by direct observation of an actual looping of the myotomes over the axis of the limb buds; indeed, on the contrary, the limb muscles have been found to develop from the cores of mesenchyme which form the axes of the limb buds and from which the limb skeleton is also developed. This may be explained by supposing that the limb muscles are primarily derivatives of the myotomes and that an extensive concentration of their developmental history has taken place, so that the axial mesenchyme actually represents myotomic material even though no direct connection between it and the myotomes can be discovered. Condensations of the developmental history certainly occur and the fact that the muscles of the human limbs, as they differentiate from the axial cores, present essentially the same arrangement as in the adult seems to indicate that there is actually an extensive condensation of the phylogenetic history of the individual muscles, since comparative anatomy shows the arrangement of the muscles of the higher mammalian limbs to be the result of a long series of progressive modifications from a primitive condition. However, even though this be the case, there is yet the possibility that the limb musculature, like the limb skeleton, may take its origin from the ventral mesoderm and consequently belong to a different embryological category from the axial myotomic muscles.


The strongest evidence in favor of the myotomic origin of the limb muscles is that furnished by their nerve supply, this presenting a distinctly segmental arrangement. This does not necessarily imply, however, a corresponding primarily metameric arrangement of the muscles, any more than the pronouncedly segmental arrangement of the cutaneous nerves implies a primary metamerism of the dermis (see p. 143). It may mean only that the nerves, being segmental, retain their segmental relations to one another even in their distribution to non-metameric structures, and that, consequently, the limb musculature is supplied in succession from one border of the limb bud to the other from succeeding nerve roots.


But whether further observation may prove or disprove the myotomic origin of the limb musculature, the fact remains that it possesses a segmentally arranged innervation, and it is possible,


Fig. 123. - Diagram of a Segment of the Body and Limb. bl, Axial blastema; dm, dorsal musculature of trunk; rl, nerve to limb; s, septum between dorsal and ventral trunk musculature; str.d, dorsal layer of limb musculature; tr.d and tr.v, dorsal and ventral divisions of a spinal nerve; vm, ventral musculature of the trunk. - (Kollmann.) therefore, to recognize in the limb buds a series of parallel bands of muscle tissue, extending longitudinally along the bud and each supplied by a definite segmental nerve. And furthermore, corresponding to each band upon the ventral (praeaxial) surface of the limb bud, there is a band similarly innervated upon the dorsal (postaxial) surface, since the fibers which pass to the limb from each nerve root sooner or later arrange themselves in praeaxial and postaxial groups as is shown in the diagram Fig. 123. The first nerve which enters the limb bud lies along its anterior border, and consequently the muscle bands which are supplied by it will, in the adult, lie along


Fig. 124. - External Surface of the Os Innominatum showing the Attachment of Muscles and the Zones Supplied by the Various Nerves.


12, Twelfth thoracic nerve; I to V, lumbar nerves; 1 and 2, sacral nerves. - (Bolk.) the outer side of the arm and along the inner side of the leg, in consequence of the rotation in opposite directions which the limbs undergo during development (see p. 101).


The first nerve which supplies the muscles attached to the dorsum of the ilium is the second lumbar, and following that there come successively from before backward the remaining lumbar and the


Fig. 125. - Sections through (A) the Thigh and (B) the Calf showing the Zones Supplied by the Nerves. The Nerves are Numbered in Continuation with the Thoracic Series. - (A, after Bolk.)


first and second sacral nerves. The arrangement of the muscle bands supplied by these nerves and the muscles of the adult to which they contribute may be seen from Fig. 124. What is shown there is only the upper portions of the postaxial bands, their lower portions

extending downward on the anterior surface of the leg. Only the sacral bands, however, extend throughout the entire length of the limb into the foot, the second lumbar band passing down only to about the middle of the thigh, the third to about the knee, the fourth to about the middle of the crus and the fifth as far as the base of the fifth metatarsal bone, and the same is true of the corresponding praeaxial bands, which descend from the ventral surface of the os coxae (innominatum) along the inner and posterior surfaces of the leg to the same points. The first and second sacral bands can be traced into the foot, the first giving rise to the musculature of its


Fig. 126. - Section through the Upper Part of the Arm showing the Zones Supplied by the Nerves.


$v to jv, Ventral branches; 5J to Sd, dorsal branches of the cervical nerves. - (Bolk.)

inner side and the second to that of its outer side, the praeaxial bands forming the plantar musculature, while the postaxial ones are upon the dorsum of the foot as a result of the rotation which the limb has undergone.


In a transverse section through a limb at any level all the muscle bands, both praeaxial and postaxial, which descend to that level will be cut and will lie in a definite succession from one border of the limb to the other, as is seen in Fig. 125. In the differentiation of the individual muscles which proceeds as the nerves extend from the trunk into the axial mesenchyme of the limb, the muscle bands undergo modifications similar to those already described as occurring in the trunk myotomes. Thus, each of the muscles represented in Fig. 125, B, is formed by the fusion of elements derived from two or more bands; the soleus and gastrocnemius represent deep and superficial layers formed from the same bands by a horizontal (tangential) splitting, these same muscles contain a portion of the second sacral band which overlaps muscles composed only of higher myotomes, and the intermuscular septum between the peroneus brevis and the flexor hallucis longus represents a portion of the third sacral band which has degenerated into connective tissue.


A similar arrangement occurs in the bands which are to be recognized in the musculature of the upper limb. These are supplied by the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth cervical and the first thoracic nerves, and only those supplied by the eighth cervical and the first thoracic nerves extend as far as the tips of the fingers. The arrangement of the bands in the upper part of the brachium may be seen from Fig. 126, in connection with which it must be noted that the fourth cervical band does not extend down to the level at which the section is taken and that the praeaxial band of the eighth cervical nerve and both the praeaxial and postaxial bands of the first thoracic are represented only by connective tissue in this region.


In another sense than the longitudinal one there is a division of the limb musculature into more or less definite areas, namely, in a transverse direction in accordance with the jointing of the skeleton. Thus, there may be recognized a group of muscles which pass from the axial skeleton to the pectoral girdle, another from the limb girdle to the brachium or thigh, another from the brachium or thigh to the antibrachium or crus, another from the antibrachium or crus to the carpus or tarsus, and another from the carpus or tarsus to the digits. This transverse segmentation, if it may be so termed, is not, however, perfectly definite, many muscles, even in the lower vertebrates, passing over more than one joint, and in the mammalia, especially, it is further obscured by secondary migrations, by the partial degeneration of muscles and by an end to end union of primarily distinct muscles.


The latissimus dorsi, serratus anterior and pectoral muscles are all examples of a process of migration as is shown by their innervation from cervical nerves, as well as by the actual migration which has been traced in the developing embryo (Mall, Lewis). In the lower limb evidences of migration may be seen in the femoral head of the biceps, comparative anatomy showing this to be a derivative of the gluteal set of muscles which has secondarily become attached to the femur and has associated itself with a praeaxial muscle to form a compound structure. An appearance of migration may also be produced by a muscle making a secondary attachment below its original origin or above the insertion and the upper or lower part, as the case may be, then degenerating into connective tissue. This has been the case with the peroneus longus, which, in the lower mammals, has a femoral origin, but has in man a new origin from the fibula, its upper portion being represented by the fibular lateral ligament of the knee-joint. So too the pectoralis minor is primarily inserted into the humerus, but it has made a secondary attachment to the coracoid process, its distal portion forming a coraco-humeral ligament.


The comparative study of the flexor muscles of the antibrachial and crural regions has yielded abundant evidence of extensive modifications in the differentiation of the limb muscles. In the tailed amphibia these muscles are represented by a series of superposed layers, the most superficial of which arises from the humerus or femur, while the remaining ones take their origin from the ulna or fibula and are directed distally and laterally to be inserted either into the palmar or plantar aponeurosis, or, in the case of the deeper layers, into the radius (tibia) or carpus (tarsus). In the arm of the lower mammalia the deepest layer becomes the pronator quadratus, the lateral portions of the superficial layer are the flexor carpi ulnaris and the flexor carpi radialis, while the intervening layers, together with the median portion of the superficial one, assuming a more directly longitudinal direction, fuse to form a common flexor mass which acts on the digits through the palmar aponeurosis. From this latter structure and from the carpal and metacarpal bones five layers of palmar muscles take origin. The radial and ulnar portions of the most superficial of these become the flexor pollicis brevis and abductor pollicis brevis and the abductor quinti digiti, while the rest of the layer degenerates into connective tissue, forming tendons



Fig. 127. - Transverse sections through (A) the forearm and (B) the hand showing the arrangement of the layers of the flexor muscles. The superficial layer is shaded horizontally, the second layer vertically, the third obliquely to the left, the fourth vertically, and the fifth obliquely to the right. AbM, abductor digiti quinti; AdP, adductor pollicis; BR, brachio-radialis; ECD, extensor digitorum communis; ECU, extensor carpi ulnaris;£Z, extensor indicis; EMD, extensor digiti quinti; EMP, abductor pollicis longus; ERB, extensor carpi radialis brevis; FCR, flexor carpi radialis; FCU, flexor carpi ulnaris; FLP, flexor pollicis longus; FM, flexor digiti quinti brevis; FP, flexor digitorum profundus; FS, flexor digitorum sublimis; ID, interossei dorsales; IV, interossei volares; L, lumbricales; OM, opponens digiti quinti; PL, palmaris longus; PT, pronator teres; R, radius; U, ulna; II-V, second to fifth metacarpal.


which pass to the four ulnar digits. Gradually superficial portions of the antibrachial flexor mass separate off, carrying with them the layers of the palmar aponeurosis from which the tendons representing the superficial layer of the palmar muscles arise, and they form with these the flexor digitorum sublimis. The deeper layers of the antibrachial flexor mass become the flexor digitorum profundus and the flexor pollicis longus (Fig. 127, A), and retain their connection with the deeper layers of the palmar aponeurosis which form their tendons; and since the second layer of the palmar muscles takes origin from this portion of the aponeurosis it becomes the lumbrical muscles, arising from the profundus tendons (Fig. 127,



Fig. 128. - Transverse sections through (A) the crus and (B) the foot, showing the arrangement of the layers of the flexor muscles. The shading has the same significance as in the preceding figure. AbH, abductor hallucis; AbM, abductor minimi digiti; AdH, adductor hallucis; ELD, extensor longus digitorum; F, fibula; FBD, flexor brevis digitorium; FBH, flexor brevis hallucis; FBM, flexor brevis minimi digiti; FLD, flexor longus digitorum; G, gastrocnemius; ID, interossei dorsalis; IV, interossei ventrales; L, lumbricales; P, plantaris; Pe, peroneus longus; Po, popliteus; S, soleus; T, tibia; TA, tibialis anticus; TP, tibialis posticus; I-V, first to fifth metatarsal.


B). The third layer of palmar muscles becomes the adductors of the digits, reduced in man to the adductor pollicis, while from the two deepest layers the interossei are developed. Of these the fourth layer consists primarily of a pair of slips corresponding to each digit, while the fifth is represented by a series of muscles which extend obliquely across between adjacent metacarpals. With these last muscles certain of the fourth layer slips unite to form the dorsal interossei, while the rest become the volar interossei. j The modifications of the almost identical primary arrangement in the crus and foot are somewhat different. The superficial layer of the crural flexors becomes the gastrocnemius and plantaris (Fig. 128, A) and the deepest layer becomes the popliteus and the interosseous membrane. The second and third layers unite to form a common mass which is inserted into the deeper layers of the plantar aponeurosis and later differentiates into the soleus and the long digital flexor, the former shifting its insertion from the plantar aponeurosis to the os calcis, while the flexor retains its connection with the deeper layers of the aponeurosis, these separating from the superficial layer to form the long flexor tendons. The fourth layer partly assumes a longitudinal direction and becomes the tibialis posterior and the flexor hallucis longus and partly retains its original cblique direction and its connection with the deep layers of the plantar aponeurosis, becoming the quadratus plantse. In the foot (Fig. 128, B) the superficial layer persists as muscular tissue, forming the abductors, the flexor digitorum brevis and the medial head of the flexor hallucis brevis, the second layer becomes the lumbricales, and the third the lateral head of the flexor hallucis brevis and the adductor hallucis, while the fourth and fifth layers together form the ioterossei, as in the hand, the flexor quinti digiti brevis really belonging to that group of muscles.


Literature

C. R. Bardeen and W. H. Lewis: "Development of the Limbs, Body-wall, and Back in Man," The American Journal of Anat., 1, 1901.

K. Bardeleben: "Musk el und Fascia," Jenaische Zeitschr. fiir Naturwissensch., xv, 1882.

L. Bolk: "Beziehungen zwischen Skelett, Muskulatur und Nerven der Extremitaten, dargelegt am Beckengurtel, an dessen Muskulatur sowie am Plexus lumbo sacralis," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxi, 1894.

L. Bolk: " Rekonstruktion der Segmentirung der Gliedmassenmuskulatur dargelegt an den Muskeln des Oberschenkels und des Schultergurtels," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxii, 1895.

L. Bolk: "Die Sklerozonie des Humerus," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxill, 1S96.

L. Bolk: "Die Segmentaldifferenzierung des menschlichen Rumpfes und seiner Extremitaten," 1, Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxv, 1898.

R. Futamtjra: "Ueber die Entwickelung der Facialismuskulatur des Menschen," Anat. Hefte, xxx, 1906.

E. Godlewski: "Die Entwicklung des Skelet- und Herzmuskelgewebes der Sauge thiere," Archiv fur mikr. Anat., lx, 1902.

E. Grafenberg: "Die Entwicklung der menschlichen Beckenmuskulatur," Anal. Hefte, xxiii, 1904.

W. P. Herringham: "The Minute Anatomy of the Brachial Plexus," Proceedings of the Royal Soc. London, xli, 1886.

W. H. Lewis: " The Development of the Arm in Man," Amer. Jour, of Anat., 1, 1902

J. B. MacCallum: "On the Histology and Histogenesis of the Heart Muscle-cell," Anat. Anzeiger, xiil, 1897.

J. B. MacCallum: "On the Histogenesis of the Striated Muscle-fiber and the Growth of the Human Sartorius Muscle," Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, 1898

F. P. Mall: "Development of the Ventral Abdominal Walls in Man," Journ. of Morphol., xiv, 1898.

Caroline McGill: "The Histogenesis of Smooth Muscle in the Alimentary Canal and Respiratory Tract of the Pig," Internat. Monatschr. Anat. und Phys., xxiv, 1907.

J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Forearm Flexors," Amer. Journ, of Anat., 11, 1903.

J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Palmar Musculature," Amer. Journ. of Anat., 11, 1903.

J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Crural Flexors," Amer. Journ. of Anat., iv, 1904.

J. P. McMurrich: "The Phylogeny of the Plantar Musculature," Amer. Journ. of Anat., vi, 1907.


A. Meek: "Preliminary Note on the Post-embryonal History of Striped Muscle-fibers in Mammalia," Anat. Anzeiger, xiv, 1898. (See also Anat. Anzeiger, xv, 1899.)

B. Morpurgo: "Ueber die post-embryonale Entwickelung der quergestreiften Muskel von weissen Ratten," Anat. Anzeiger, xv, 1899.

I. Popowsky: " Zur Entwicklungsgeschichte des N. facialis beim Menschen," Morphol. Jahrbuch, xxiii, 1896.

I. Popowsky: " Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der Dammmuskulatur beim Menschen," Anat. Hefte, xi, 1899.

L. Rethi: "Der peripheren Verlauf der motorischen Rachen- und Gaumennerven," Sitzungsber. der kais. Akad. Wissensch. Wien. Math.-Naturwiss. Classe, Cii, 1893.

C. S. Sherrington: " Notes on the Arrangement of Some Motor Fibers in the Lumbosacral Plexus," Journal of Physiol., xin, 1892.

J. B. Sutton: "Ligaments, their Nature and Morphology," London, 1897.


Historic Disclaimer - information about historic embryology pages 
Mark Hill.jpg
Pages where the terms "Historic" (textbooks, papers, people, recommendations) appear on this site, and sections within pages where this disclaimer appears, indicate that the content and scientific understanding are specific to the time of publication. This means that while some scientific descriptions are still accurate, the terminology and interpretation of the developmental mechanisms reflect the understanding at the time of original publication and those of the preceding periods, these terms, interpretations and recommendations may not reflect our current scientific understanding.     (More? Embryology History | Historic Embryology Papers)
   McMurrich 1914: General 1 Spermatozoon - Spermatogenesis - Ovum - Fertilization | 2 Ovum Segmentation - Germ Layer Formation | 3 Medullary Groove - Notochord - Somites | 4 Embryo External Form | 5 Yolk-stalk - Belly-stalk - Fetal Membranes Organogeny 6 Integumentary System | 7 Connective Tissues - Skeleton | 8 Muscular System | 9 Circulatory - Lymphatic Systems | 10 Digestive Tract and Glands | 11 Pericardium - Pleuro-peritoneum - Diaphragm | 12 Respiration | 13 Urinogenital System | 14 Suprarenal System | 15 Nervous System | 16 Organs of Special Sense | 17 Post-natal | Figures


McMurrich JP. The Development Of The Human Body. (1914) P. Blakiston's Son & Co., Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.


Cite this page: Hill, M.A. (2024, April 23) Embryology McMurrich1914 Chapter 8. Retrieved from https://embryology.med.unsw.edu.au/embryology/index.php/McMurrich1914_Chapter_8

What Links Here?
© Dr Mark Hill 2024, UNSW Embryology ISBN: 978 0 7334 2609 4 - UNSW CRICOS Provider Code No. 00098G